initial commit of ebook 24705HEADmain

6 files changed, 9543 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/old/20080227-24705-8.txt b/old/20080227-24705-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..73dbf2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/20080227-24705-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3098 @@
+Project Gutenberg's The Woman with a Stone Heart, by Oscar William Coursey
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Woman with a Stone Heart
+       A Romance of the Philippine War
+
+Author: Oscar William Coursey
+
+Release Date: February 27, 2008 [EBook #24705]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WOMAN WITH A STONE HEART ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net/ (This book was
+produced from scanned images of public domain material
+from the Google Print project.)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                  The Woman with a Stone Heart
+
+                A Romance of the Philippine War.
+
+                               By
+
+                  O. W. Coursey, (U. S. Vols.)
+
+                           Author of
+
+       "History and Geography of the Philippine Islands."
+                  "Who's Who In South Dakota."
+                 "Biography of General Beadle."
+                      "School Law Digest."
+
+
+
+
+        All of these books are published and for sale by
+                  THE EDUCATOR SUPPLY COMPANY
+                     Mitchell, South Dakota
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                        Copyrighted 1914
+
+                        By O. W. Coursey
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+THE WOMAN WITH A STONE HEART
+
+
+INTRODUCTION
+
+
+To those whose love of adventure would cause them to plunge head-long
+into an abyss of vain glory, hoping at life's sunset to reap a
+harvest contrary to the seed that were sown, let me suggest that
+you pause first to read the story of "The Woman With a Stone Heart,"
+Marie Sampalit, dare-devil of the Philippines.
+
+Perhaps we might profitably meditate for a few moments on the musings
+of Whittier:
+
+
+            "The tissue of the life to be
+            We weave in colors all our own,
+            And in the field of destiny
+            We'll reap as we have sown."
+
+                                    --The Author.
+
+
+
+
+
+DEDICATION
+
+
+To Her, who, as a bride of only eighteen months, stood broken-hearted
+on the depot platform and bade me a tearful farewell as our train of
+soldier boys started to war; who later, while I was Ten Thousand miles
+away from home on soldier duty in the Philippine Islands, became a
+Mother; and who, unfortunately, three months thereafter, was called
+upon to lay our first-born, Oliver D. Coursey, into his snow-lined
+baby tomb amid the bleak silence of a cold winter's night, with no
+strong arm to bear her up in those awful hours of anguish and despair,
+
+
+My Soldier Wife, Julia,
+
+this book is most affectionately dedicated.
+
+
+                "Only a baby's grave,
+                    Yet often we go and sit
+                By the little stone,
+                And thank God to own,
+                    We are nearer heaven for it."
+
+                                        --O. W. Coursey.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+
+                                               Page
+
+            Marie Sampalit                       10
+            Region Around Manila Bay             29
+            Admiral Dewey                        39
+            Aguinaldo                            61
+            Marie, Her Mother, etc               82
+            Filipinos at Breakfast              100
+            End of the Boat-Battle              113
+            The Rescue                          126
+            Floating Down The Rapids            129
+            General Lawton and Staff            139
+
+
+
+
+
+TABLE OF CONTENTS
+
+
+
+        Chapters:                             Page
+
+        I.      Love Defeated                     9
+        II.     First Shot of A New War          25
+        III.    Avenged Her Lover's Death        41
+        IV.     The Interval                     57
+        V.      Filipino Uprising                69
+        VI.     As A Spy                         81
+        VII.    Off For Baler                    93
+        VIII.   The Gilmore Incident            105
+        IX.     The American Prisoners          113
+        X.      Death of General Lawton         131
+        XI.     North-bound                     141
+        XII.    Crossing the Sierra Madres      153
+        XIII.   Compensation                    167
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+LOVE DEFEATED
+
+
+Marie Sampalit and her fiancee, Rolando Dimiguez, were walking
+arm-in-arm along the sandy beach of Manila bay, just opposite old
+Fort Malate, talking of their wedding day which had been postponed
+because of the Filipino insurrection which was in progress.
+
+The tide was out. A long waved line of sea-shells and drift-wood
+marked the place to which it had risen the last time before it began
+to recede. They were unconsciously following this line of ocean
+debris. Occasionally Marie would stop to pick up a spotted shell
+which was more pretty than the rest. Finally, when they had gotten
+as far north as the semi-circular drive-way which extends around
+the southern and eastern sides of the walled-city, or Old Manila,
+as it is called, and had begun to veer toward it, Marie looked back
+and repeated a beautiful memory gem taught to her by a good friar
+when she was a pupil in one of the parochial schools of Manila:
+
+
+            "E'en as the rise of the tide is told,
+                By drift-wood on the beach,
+            So can our pen mark on the page
+                How high our thoughts can reach."
+
+
+They turned directly east until they reached the low stone-wall that
+prevents Manila bay from overflowing the city during the periods
+of high tides. Dimiguez helped Marie to step upon it; then they
+strolled eastward past the large stake which marked the place where
+the Spaniards had shot Dr. Jose Rizal, the brainiest patriot ever
+produced by the Malay race.
+
+When they came to the spot, Marie stopped and told Dimiguez how she
+had watched the shooting when it took place, and how bravely Rizal
+had met his fate.
+
+"If it hadn't been for this outrage committed by the Spaniards,"
+remarked Dimiguez, "this insurrection would not have lasted these two
+years, and we would have been married before now; but our people are
+determined to seek revenge for his death."
+
+Then they started on, changed their course to the northward, entered
+the walled-city by the south gate, walked past the old Spanish arsenal,
+and then passed out of the walled-city by the north gate. Here they
+crossed the Pasig river on the old "Bridge of Spain" (the large
+stone bridge near the mouth of the river, built over 300 years ago)
+and entered the Escolta, the main business street of Manila. After
+making their way slowly up the Escolta they meandered along San Miguel
+street until they finally turned and walked a short distance down a
+side street to a typical native shack, built of bamboo and thatched
+with Nipa palms, happily tucked away beneath the overhanging limbs
+of a large mango tree in a spacious yard,--the home of the Sampalits.
+
+Here Marie had been born just seventeen years before; in fact the next
+day, April 7, would be her seventeenth birthday. When she was born,
+her father instituted one of the accustomed Filipino dances which last
+from three to five days and nights, and at its conclusion she had been
+christened "Maria," subsequently changed by force of habit to "Marie."
+
+Late that evening, while they were seated side-by-side on a bamboo
+bench beside of her home, tapping the toes of their wooden-soled
+slippers on the hard ground, and indulging in a wandering lovers'
+conversation, Marie said to him (calling him affectionately by his
+first name), "Rolando, when did you first decide to postpone our
+wedding day?"
+
+"Well, I'll tell you how it was," answered he, meditatingly. "The
+thought of serving my country had been lingering on my mind all
+last summer--in fact, ever since the insurrection first broke out in
+the spring of 1896. You know I intended coming down to see you last
+Christmas, but I couldn't get away. That night I walked the floor
+all night in our home at Malolos, debating in my mind whether we
+had better get married in March, as we had planned, or if it would
+not be wiser and more manly for me to go to war, take chances on
+getting back alive and postpone our wedding day until after the war
+is over. Toward morning, I decided that it was my duty to become a
+soldier; so I called my father and mother, got an early breakfast,
+bade them goodby and started for Malabon, which was Aguinaldo's
+headquarters, and enlisted. He was glad to see me. You know, he and
+I attended school together for one year at Hongkong. Well, Aguinaldo
+at once commissioned me a spy and assigned me to very important duty."
+
+"My God!" interrupted Marie, "you are not on that duty now, are you,
+Rolando?"
+
+Dimiguez arose. "Marie," said he firmly, "I must be off."
+
+"But won't you tell me where you are going and what task lies before
+you?" pleaded Marie, as she threw both arms about his neck and began to
+sob, "I'll never tell a living soul, so help me God, but I must know!"
+
+"A spy never tells his plans to anyone, Marie," said Dimiguez
+slowly. "He takes his orders from his chief, plays his part; and
+if he gets caught, he refuses to speak and dies without a murmur,
+like a man. Good night, Marie, I must be off; duty lies before me."
+
+Marie cried herself to sleep.
+
+The next morning she started down town, as usual, for the market place,
+with her bamboo basket filled with bananas, sitting on her head,
+and a cigarette in her mouth. She had only gone a block when she met
+a neighbor girl, one of her chums of equal years to her own, who was
+a chamber-maid in the German consul's home on San Miguel Street.
+
+Her friend looked excited. "Have you heard the awful news, Marie?" said
+she.
+
+"No!" exclaimed Marie, "What is it?"
+
+"Why, Dimiguez was caught last night by Spanish guards inside the
+yard of the governor-general's summer palace up on the Malacanan,
+just as he was slipping out of the palace itself. How he got in there,
+nobody knows."
+
+Marie dropped her basket. "Heavens!" gasped she, "Did he do anything
+wrong?"
+
+"They found in his pocket diagrams of the interior of the palace,
+showing the entries to it, the room where the governor-general sleeps,
+and many other things; also your picture. See here! the morning paper
+gives a full account of it."
+
+Marie glanced at the head lines and then started on a vigorous run for
+the building in which the Spanish military court was sitting. Rushing
+in, past an armed guard, she began to plead for her lover's life. But
+he had already been tried, convicted and sentenced to death by
+strangulation in the old chute at Cavite. Dimiguez never moved a
+muscle when he saw Marie. Armed guards forced her abruptly out of
+the building and ordered her to leave.
+
+Inside of two hours, on the same day, April 7, the anniversary of
+Marie's birth, he was taken to the little town of Cavite, seven miles
+southwest of Manila, and was there placed in the lower end of a long
+chute built out into Manila Bay. This chute was just wide enough for
+a man to enter. Its sides, top and bottom were all built of heavy
+planks. The side planks lacked a few inches of connecting with the
+top, although of course the side posts ran clear up and the top was
+firmly bolted to them. The entrance to it was well elevated near the
+docks. The lower end protruded into the bay, so that it was visible
+about eighteen inches above the water during the period of low tide,
+and submerged several feet during high tide.
+
+Tides come in slowly at Cavite, each succeeding wave rising but a
+trifle higher than the others, until the usual height is reached. Thus,
+a prisoner placed in this chute, forced to the lower end and then
+fastened securely during low tide, can look out over the side planks
+at the hideous spectators, watch the tide as it begins to rise and
+see slow death approaching. It was in this chute that Marie's lover
+met his death.
+
+Marie saw the launch that carried him away as it left Manila. She
+rushed down to the Pasig river, loosened her little boat from the
+tree to which it was tied, jumped in, seized the oars and started in
+pursuit. The launch on which he was being carried had for its power
+a gasoline engine, and, of course, it soon left her far behind. When
+she first started, the swells caused by the launch rocked her little
+canoe quite roughly and impeded her progress. As she approached the
+mouth of the river, passed the monument of Magellan and came between
+the walled-city on the southern bank and the docks on the northern
+bank, a crowd of excited natives thronged the shore, and many of them
+recognized her. She heard some one cry out, "Vive Marie!" With might
+and main she strove forward.
+
+The launch made its seven-mile run to Cavite; the victim was placed
+in the chute; the tide had risen to the danger line; her lover,
+with his head thrown back, had just begun to gurgle the salt water,
+when Marie, in frantic agony, almost exhausted, rowed around the
+lower end of the chute and came near enough to the dying hero to
+be recognized by him. Straining ever muscle to keep his head above
+the water a second longer, he cried out in chocking tones that were
+interrupted by the merciless sea which was rapidly filling his mouth,
+"Goodby, Marie, God bless you. Avenge my death!"
+
+Hush! At this moment another tidal wave engulfed the apex of the
+chute. Not a sound could be heard save the slight flapping of the
+waves against the pier, and the dismal chant of three priests, who
+stood on the shore near by, and who had not been permitted to attend
+the young spy before his death. Marie trembled; she dropped the oars;
+her eyes fell; for a moment it seemed that her young heart stood still:
+then her face flushed; the tears stopped flowing; anguish gave vent
+to determined revenge; pent-up sorrows yielded to out-spoken threats;
+and in tones sufficiently audible to be heard ashore, she cried,
+"I'll do it."
+
+The Spaniard knows no pity. If Marie were to have stepped ashore
+immediately after her lover's strangulation, she might have come
+to grief. It is strange that she escaped punishment for having
+followed. She, therefore, rowed directly east and landed on the beach
+of the bay, about four miles south of Manila, just west of the little
+city of Paranaque.
+
+From sheer exhaustion, she needed food; therefore, she walked northward
+along the shore until she found a Mango tree heavily laden with
+fruit. After eating a few luscious mangoes, she crept into a clump
+of bamboo and had a good cry: tears so ease a woman's soul.
+
+From her position on the beach she could readily see the Spaniards
+as they took her dead lover from the chute when the tide had lowered
+toward evening. She saw them even strike his corpse, and she bit her
+finger nails as she watched them place him in a rough wooden box and
+haul him up through the streets of the village on an old two-wheeled
+cart drawn by a caribou.
+
+With the approach of sunset, things grew strangely quiet. The spring
+zephyr that had blown modestly during the day died away. There was no
+longer even a dimple in the blue surface of Manila Bay. Not a leaf was
+astir. It seemed to Marie that the only sound she could hear was the
+the throbbing of her own heart. To her the whole world seemed like an
+open sepulcher. Looking down she discovered that she was unconsciously
+sitting on a flowery terrace and that all about her was life. She
+pulled one of those exquisite white flowers with wide pink veins,
+peculiar alone to the Philippines, and pressed it to her lips.
+
+The sun was just setting beyond Corregidor. The island's long shadows
+seemed to extend completely across the bay to her feet. As the solar
+fires burned themselves out, the orange tint which they left behind
+against the reddened sky reminded Marie of the night before, when
+she and her lover had strolled along the shore of the bay about three
+miles farther north; and as the sun slowly nodded its evening farewell
+and buried its face in the pillow of night, she remembered how he, on
+the previous night, had called to her attention the lingering glow of
+its fading beams. Before her lay the Spanish fleet, it, too, casting
+shadows that first grew longer and longer and then dimmer and dimmer
+until they in turn had died away in the spectral phenomenon of night.
+
+Marie's thoughts turned toward home. What about her mother? She walked
+back to her little boat, pushed it out into the bay, and, stepping
+into it, sat down, took hold of the oars and started northward near
+the beach. Just opposite Fort Malate, she swung westward, and, passing
+outside of the break-water a mile from shore, she entered the Pasig
+river and hurried homeward. When she arrived, about nine o'clock,
+she found her mother on the verge of prostration; for that very day,
+strange to say, Marie's father, who was a colonel in the Filipino
+infantry, had been killed at San Francisco del Monte, six miles
+north-east of Manila, in a battle with Spanish troops.
+
+"Don't cry, mother," expostulated Marie, "from now on I intend to
+kill every foe of ours in these islands!"
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+FIRST SHOT OF A NEW WAR
+
+
+Three weeks passed by. Marie had gone down town late in April to
+do some shopping. While she was standing in the door of the old
+postoffice on the Escolta, she heard the shrill voice of a Filipino
+lad piping out: "Papers! Papers! All about the war with the United
+States. Dewey's comin'!" He had a bundle of newspapers under his right
+arm and was waving one in his left hand. Everybody rushed out of the
+bazaars and offices along the Escolta where they were transacting
+their business, and each one who could get near enough to the boy,
+eagerly bought a morning paper.
+
+The lad's papers were all gone but one. Marie Sampalit snatched it from
+his hands, and dropped into one of them a small coin. She stepped into
+the corridor of the post office, to escape the annoyance of the crowd,
+and read the large head lines:
+
+
+        "WAR BETWEEN THE UNITED STATES AND SPAIN
+
+        dewey en route to manila great naval
+        battle friday or saturday in manila bay
+
+        The Stone Wall Around the City will be
+        Razed to the Ground. Great Loss of Life."
+
+
+"Then, I'm off for Corregidor Island right away!" exclaimed
+Marie. "Dewey can't get into the Bay except by that route. That's
+where the fight will begin. Mother doesn't know this. I'll tell her
+I am going to take some supplies to the Spanish garrison. I will go
+at once!"
+
+She set out from Manila in a small casco, or flat-bottomed native boat,
+heavily laden with fresh fish, pine-apples, mangoes, bananas, tobacco
+and cigarettes--all intended for the Spanish garrison on Corregidor
+Island. Manila is situated on the eastern shore of Manila Bay. From
+there to the island it is nearly thirty miles. Her little boat was
+driven forward on its journey by an easterly wind that gently swelled
+the tiny sails.
+
+She reached the island at five o'clock that afternoon and was given
+a royal welcome by the Spanish soldiers. Marie gave them the morning
+paper containing the news of Dewey's prospective arrival. She asked
+permission to take part in the fight.
+
+Marie was a favorite with the Spanish garrison. Her genial disposition,
+added to her almost inconceivable daring, had won for her the
+friendship and admiration of all. The gunners had playfully taught
+her all about loading, firing and swabbing their cannon. She had also
+learned the art of good marksmanship, so that at a target practice
+she was an adept.
+
+Impatiently she awaited the arrival of the American fleet. She heard
+the Spaniards discuss among themselves the cowardice of the American
+soldiers, and saw them wager the Dewey would not come to Manila at all
+but that he would sail down around the Malay Peninsula and hasten home
+by way of Good Hope to save his vessels from certain destruction. All
+this sounded plausible to her and she grew restless and enthusiastic
+as the dull hours dragged away.
+
+Dewey was so long in coming from Hongkong and the garrison on the
+island had been kept at their guns ready for action for so many hours
+without rest that many of them were completely tired out by the last
+day of April, and asked for relief. It was hard to give it. Marie's
+opportunity had come. Her ability as an expert rifle shot was known
+alike to officers and enlisted men. She offered to serve. The Spanish
+commandant could not well refuse. He needed her services; besides,
+the Spaniards were just then doing all within their power to win the
+temporary friendship of the natives. Consequently, he promised to
+assign her to duty for the night.
+
+The sunset, as viewed from Corregidor Island on the evening of
+April 30, was most glorious. Not a cloud was in the sky; a dead calm
+prevailed, so that the sea was unusually smooth. As the sun sank to
+rest behind the shimmering horizon it caused the island to cast a
+long shadow over Manila bay as far as the eye could reach, but this
+soon disappeared.
+
+When the sun had sunk from view, Marie noticed that a comparatively
+new moon was visible in the sky, and she remarked to the Sergeant
+of the Guard, "It will not be very dark to-night. We can see the
+Americanos a long way off."
+
+"Yes," replied the Sergeant, "the only difficulty with the cowards is
+that they will not come near enough to be seen at all. They have had
+plenty of time to run from Hongkong to Manila and back again; still
+they have not been seen or heard of. I'll bet you a peso (Spanish
+dollar) that they have gone home and that all of this excitement has
+been for nothing. Dewey is getting old, Marie; he doesn't want to go
+to a watery grave so far from home. If he were young and ambitious,
+it would be different. Old men do not care much about real fighting,
+especially on the sea. It is different with old generals commanding
+land forces. They can sit away back in the rear of the battle-field,
+receive messages that come to them; plan certain movements based upon
+these reports; and while they do have considerable responsibility,
+still they are not in the actual fight. As for Dewey, nobody has
+ever heard of him. He is not a recognized naval commander. Besides,
+the old fellow, according to reports, is slow and easy going. If he
+should come to make us an unfriendly call tonight, mark my word, Marie,
+there will not be a sliver of his entire fleet left floating above the
+water yonder inside of thirty minutes after the first shot is fired."
+
+He had scarcely concluded speaking when the Officer of the Guard,
+Lieutenant Orlando, called out, "Sergeant of the Guard! Fall in the
+First Relief!" The Sergeant threw his arm over Marie's shoulder in an
+affectionate manner, smacked a hurried caress against her olive cheek,
+jumped up from the little bamboo bench on which they were sitting,
+rushed up to the guard house and cried out, "First Relief! Fall in!"
+
+Marie hastened after him. As the relief was forming in line, she seized
+a Mauser rifle that stood leaning against a huge rock, grabbed up a
+cartridge belt well filled with Mauser ammunition that was lying on
+the ground near by, hastily adjusted it to fit her waist measure,
+buckled it on and fell into the rear rank.
+
+"Count fours!" ordered the Sergeant. As is usual in military affairs,
+the front and rear rank men count in unison; that is, number one in
+the front rank and number one in the rear rank both count "one" at the
+same time; second file counts "two," etc. When it came to Marie she
+piped out simultaneously with the corporal who stood in front of her,
+"quatro." (four).
+
+As the guard was marched along the stony pathways on Corregidor Island
+and the various sentinels were relieved, Marie soon saw that there was
+not going to be a place for her. She tip-toed up to the corporal who
+was posting the relief and asked him where he was going to station her.
+
+"Never mind," said the corporal, "we have a place for you." And sure
+enough, they had.
+
+Every soldier or civilian who has ever been on this island will readily
+recall the rough, hard-beaten, winding path that led from the summit of
+the hill, in a south-westerly direction, down over precipices, around
+clumps of bamboo, to a beautiful fresh water spring which bubbled
+out of the coral rocks at a point just high enough to prevent it from
+being inundated or even infiltrated during the season of high tides.
+
+A few feet from this spring and elevated but slightly above it, is a
+massive, flat rock. Along the north and west sides of this rock is a
+vertical stone precipice some eight feet high, which from its upper
+edge inclines back gradually at an angle of about twenty degrees
+above a horizontal plane, toward the crest of the island.
+
+On this rock Spain firmly bolted one of her most modern cannon--a
+good seven-inch gun. It was so situated on a revolving casement that
+its shots could be made to sweep the whole Boca Grande channel, as
+the large entrance south of the island is called. Marie had often
+operated this gun. She had done splendid work with it on a floating
+target two miles distant. Its deadly roar was her delight. Oh! if
+she could but use it just once on an actual enemy instead of firing
+it at an indicated one!
+
+When the old guard had been relieved and the sentries were marched
+back to the guard-house to be dismissed, poor Marie, heavy hearted,
+marched along. Just as they approached the guard-house, the sergeant
+motioned to her to fall out and to come toward him. This she did.
+
+Into her ear he whispered the information that was to start her on her
+eventful military career. "Marie," said he, "the officer of the Guard
+informs me that we cannot use you in the infantry service tonight,
+but that you will be needed with the artillery."
+
+"Good!" exclaimed Marie, "Where shall I serve?"
+
+"At the new gun on the large rock near the spring," answered the
+Sergeant.
+
+"Thank heaven!" said Marie. "Dewey will surely come, and when I put
+a solid shot through the 'Olympia' just below the water line--the
+battle will be half over. Oh! I'm so anxious! May I go down there
+tonight and take charge of the gun at once?"
+
+The Sergeant told her to report to the headquarters of the artillery
+department where she would receive instructions.
+
+At last she found herself on actual duty. How her young heart throbbed
+as her black eyes peered forth into the darkness. Toward midnight,
+small clouds began to drift oceanward. For a few moments at a time
+they would obscure the quartered cheek of the young moon. Oh! if
+Dewey would but come. The hopes of a life-time were poised on that
+painful "if." Before her was the dream of glory; behind her, the
+dreary forgetfulness of the past. Hour after hour whiled away. The
+tiny lights in the natives' shacks along the opposite shore began to
+go out and grow fewer and fewer until the closing day had died safely
+away into the solemn night. As usual, "taps" were blown at ten o'clock
+and things on the island grew very quiet. Days--yes, weeks--seemed
+to crowd themselves into those long hours. Would he ever come?
+
+Presently she heard the sentry's shrill cry on the brow of the hill,
+"Twelve o'clock! All's well!" The echo of his repeated call had
+scarcely died away when Marie thought she saw something dark on the
+water near the center of the channel, perhaps three miles away. She
+whispered to a member of the artillery corps, who sat near her watching
+the shadow of his pipe on the rock near the base of the cannon. They
+both looked. Surely! it's Dewey! The artilleryman sent up a rocket as
+a warning. Marie took hurried aim. "Boom!" went her cannon, and from
+its mouth a seven-inch shot was hurled over the "Concord," between
+its main and mizzen masts. It went a trifle high and did no harm.
+
+"Bang!" went one of the port batteries on the "Raleigh" and before
+its flash was gone a shudder shot through every vein, every nerve
+and every fiber of Marie's body. Such a crash she had never heard
+before. "War is hell" to be sure. She sniffed the smoke from her own
+gun, and looked around to see what had happened. The stone precipice
+behind her was torn into fragments. A man's hand protruded from the
+debris. "My God!" she murmured. Yes, there was the evidence. The
+man who had sat by her side and who sent up the rocket, lay cold in
+death. His head was torn off and his body was mangled among the pieces
+of broken rock. The gunner on the "Raleigh" had done his work well;
+and Marie's dream of American cowardice, of their poor marksmanship
+and of her ability to sink Dewey's flag ship, were shattered in an
+instant. She had fired the FIRST gun of the war, but not the LAST!
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+AVENGED HER LOVER'S DEATH
+
+
+After Dewey's fleet had passed the island and entered the bay, proper,
+Marie crept up to the top of the cliff and awaited the results. As she
+sat there shivering with fright, day began to dawn. Presently she heard
+the Spanish batteries on Point Cavite fire a heavy shot--then a second
+one; and a few minutes later she saw flames of fire and smoke belching
+forth from the starboard sides of Dewey's entire squadron. Then the
+Spanish fleet, lying off of Point Cavite, commenced a united and
+simultaneous action.
+
+Shells rent the air; the men on both fleets cheered as they beheld
+the effect on the enemy of a well-directed shot; smoke-begrimed
+gunners, with the perspiration washing light-colored furrows down
+their manly cheeks, stood at their guns and worked like demons as they
+swabbed their cannon and crowded into them shot after shot. Hissing
+projectiles that missed the opposing ships and plunged into the bay,
+were throwing volumes of splashing foam into the air. Dewey's vessels
+were moving in a figure eight and using alternately the several guns
+on their port and on their starboard sides, while the Spanish ships
+moved about promiscuously among each other in an awkward fashion,
+over a small area, and fired only as an opportunity offered.
+
+"Thank God, I'm out of range of the demons," said Marie to a Spanish
+officer who had come to her side.
+
+Just then, there was a lull in the battle. Dewey's ships ceased firing
+and withdrew to the middle of the bay. No apparent damage had been
+sustained by the vessels of either command.
+
+"The old fellow is going to quit," said Marie to the Spanish officer
+who stood erect with his field glasses carefully trained on Dewey's
+squadron.
+
+"They're coming this way, Marie," said the officer.
+
+"My God! where will we go, if they come past the island and open
+fire on us again?" shouted Marie. "We haven't a mounted gun left to
+shoot with."
+
+The officer remained quiet. Presently he said, "They've stopped and
+are dividing up their ammunition. Evidently they are going to resume
+the fight."
+
+He guessed it right. In thirty minutes Dewey's vessels were heading
+straight for the Spanish fleet. His first shot set on fire the
+beautiful Spanish flag-ship, the "Reina Christina." Then her magazine
+blew up. She was hastily scuttled on the beach near Cavite and deserted
+amid great disorder by that portion of her crew which was able to
+leave. The dead and the dying were left to their fate. Magazines in
+several other Spanish ships soon blew up. In a few minutes most of them
+were on fire. Dewey's gunners were doing deadly execution. Hundreds
+of Spanish soldiers could be seen jumping from their burning vessels
+into the ocean.
+
+"Now what is he going to do?" said Marie, with some excitement, as
+she saw one of Dewey's ships, the "Concord," disengage herself from
+the rest of the fleet and head straight for a large Spanish gun-boat
+that was lying off to herself and whose sole business it seemed was
+to keep up a deadly fire on Dewey's flagship, the "Olympia." The
+Concord literally disembowled her.
+
+"The heartless wretches!" exclaimed Marie, as she watched another
+American ship, the "Petrel," leave the line of battle and make a rapid
+run right past the Spanish fleet for the village of Cavite. "I wonder
+what the villains are up to now." In a few minutes the Petrel returned,
+with six small vessels in tow as prizes. In addition, she was flying
+at her mast head this signal, "Have destroyed eight vessels."
+
+Dewey's ships moved over toward the city of Manila, took their
+positions in line and remained quiet.
+
+"What time is it?" asked Marie of the Spanish officer who stood
+near her.
+
+"Twelve-thirty," answered he, as he looked at his watch.
+
+Marie whiled away the afternoon watching the Spaniards on Corregidor
+island burying their dead comrades. She wanted to go home, but she
+feared to go past Dewey's fleet.
+
+That evening things became solemnly quiet; and the blazing sun, as its
+face reddened into nightly slumber beyond the watery horizon of the
+Pacific, bade farewell to a finished deed, which, in the history of
+naval warfare, has never been surpassed; while the pale-faced moon,
+moving slowly up her appointed path, looked calmly down with her
+quartered cheek in silent benediction on the blazing hulls of the
+Spanish ships as they slowly cremated their dead and dying.
+
+The next day the Spanish Commandante on Corregidor discovered that
+Dewey had blockaded the port of Manila, so he restrained Marie from
+starting home for nearly a week.
+
+Finally, she got permission to go. As she passed Dewey's fleet she
+was surprised to find everything so peaceful and to see dozens of
+native canoes hovering along the port-holes of his vessels, selling
+fruit and curios to his men.
+
+Marie reached home in the early evening, and found her old mother
+frantic because of her absence and the excitement that had taken place.
+
+During the next few weeks while Dewey was waiting for reinforcements
+from home, many strange things occurred on shore. The Filipinos
+captured or killed nearly all of the smaller Spanish garrisons
+distributed throughout the islands. On May 26, they secretly cut
+down the Spanish guards walking their beats along the western side of
+the little town of Cavite, and let in a horde of Tagalos well armed
+with bolos, who crept up near a large stone cathedral, built in 1643,
+in which the Spaniards, as a military necessity after their defeat by
+Dewey, were making their headquarters. These Filipinos made a mad rush
+through the back door of the building and captured all the Spaniards
+being quartered therein. This feat also gave them possession of another
+lot of Mauser and Remington rifles and a goodly store of ammunition,
+for which they had been yearning.
+
+Dewey had no men whom he could spare to send ashore; therefore, he had
+left these surrendered Spaniards to take care of themselves. Evidently
+he did not anticipate an attack upon the garrison at Cavite, or
+he might have landed enough marines from his battleships to have
+prevented it.
+
+When Marie heard about the capture of the Spanish garrison at Cavite
+by the Filipinos, she at once rowed over there to see what was going
+to be done with the prisoners. This was the first time she had been
+at Cavite since the day of her lover's tragic death. She found the
+Filipinos jubilant over their new fire-arms. But many of them had
+never before used a gun and they were very awkward with them, so
+that accidents were constantly occurring. The privileges of target
+practice given to Marie by the Spaniards, in times past, now found a
+new reward. She organized the Filipinos into squads for this training,
+arranged suitable targets for them, supervised the loading and cleaning
+of their guns, and by voluntary assent became the leader in a whole
+lot of nefarious mischief in the neighborhood.
+
+But what about her lover's dying request and the vow she registered
+in her aching soul as she left the scene of his death? By remaining
+away from the graves of our loved ones we may check memory and
+enthrone reason, thus more rapidly overcoming sorrow. By constantly
+resorting to places of grief we keep that grief, whatever may have
+been its cause, fresh on the tablets of our memories. The fact that
+Marie had not returned to Cavite, the scene of her sorrow, for about
+two months, helped her to forget it and to flirt with fate among the
+very troops who had caused it. Now that she had returned to Cavite,
+old visions began to haunt her. Shooting at wooden targets was not
+desperate enough to appease her nature; she longed for bloodshed.
+
+Between herself and a few Filipino leaders she concocted a scheme
+that would be hilarious, avenge the death of him whom she had
+briefly mourned, as well as the deaths of Rizal and thousands of
+other Filipinos who had been shot or strangled by the Spaniards,
+and satisfy the longings of her innermost nature. It was this: a
+pit twenty feet in diameter and ten feet deep was to be dug on the
+higher ground a few miles southwest of Cavite. Each morning twenty
+of the captured Spaniards were to be marched out to this pit and
+made to slide down a bamboo pole into it. The Filipino soldiers,
+armed with their newly-captured rifles, were then to stand around
+the brink of this pit and use these half-starved Spaniards for living
+targets. Marie gloated over her new enterprise. What sport! How she
+enjoyed it! The Filipino's marksmanship was poor and many of their
+unfortunate prisoners were shot over a dozen times before they were
+stilled in death. This bloody practice was kept up until over two
+hundred Spaniards had been slain.
+
+About this time rumors of what was being done reached the ears
+of General Anderson. He ordered it stopped, and sent food ashore,
+under American escorts, for the Spanish prisoners. These prisoners,
+before being led to the slaughter, were housed by the Filipinos
+in an unfinished portion of the old convent at Cavite, and in some
+large stone buildings without floors and with only a few windows,
+heavily barricaded with iron bars, formerly used by the natives for
+storage purposes for various cargoes of raw materials, preparatory
+to exportation. These buildings were dark, damp and infested with a
+multiplicity of insectivora.
+
+The Spaniards, imprisoned therein, were fed by the Filipinos on a
+very small ration of uncooked rice. This they had to pound into meal,
+and eat it out of their hands. Water, although plentiful, was denied
+them, except in small quantities. They had no beds, but slept on
+the bare ground. Many of them were practically nude. They had staid
+by their guns on the Spanish fleet until their ships began to sink;
+then they had jumped overboard and swam ashore, taking off most of
+their clothes before making the attempt. The Filipinos had little
+clothing to give them and no disposition to share what they did have.
+
+These half-starved wretches, pale, lean and ghostly looking, many
+of them sick with fever and other ailments, none of them with a
+cent of money, were a sickening sight to the American troops whom
+General Anderson sent ashore to investigate their circumstances
+and conditions. Of course the healthier ones were marched out and
+killed first. Some of them began to cry when the American officers,
+pushing the Filipino sentries aside, poked their vigorous manly faces
+through the openings of the massive doors to see who and what was on
+the inside; but most of them propped themselves up on one elbow and
+held out the other hand for something to eat. Others indicated by
+motions that they wanted paper and pencils, so as to write letters
+home, telling their loved ones in far-off Spain that they were still
+alive, and asking for money.
+
+As the Americans began to empty their haversacks and hand hard-tack
+and Boston baked beans to them, some of the prisoners seized them by
+the fingers and kissed the backs of their hands in grateful homage
+for their kindness. A few of the more ignorant ones, who had heard so
+much about the cruelty of the American soldiers, and who, upon sight
+of our officers, believing the end was near, had sought a kneeling
+attitude and begun to pray, gradually sank back into a reclining
+posture and held out their hands for a morsel of food.
+
+The Filipino guards sulked when they were displaced by the American
+sentries, and some of them had to be forced from their posts of
+fiendish duty at the point of the bayonet. They considered these
+Spaniards as reprisals, constituting their own private property, with
+whom they could do as they pleased without any justifiable interference
+on the part of anybody. Marie Sampalit slapped an American private
+who had been sent to displace a Filipino sentry whom she had just
+stationed at one of the prison doors. He promptly knocked her down with
+the butt of his rifle. What she said in reply he could not understand.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+THE INTERVAL
+
+
+After avenging her lover's death, Marie returned again to Manila
+where she remained at home until the Filipino uprising against the
+American troops in the spring of 1899. During this interval of nine
+months, she daily frequented the places of rendezvous of the American
+troops stationed in and around Manila. She also went to the officers'
+homes in the city where their wives and children were stopping. She
+did their washing, and cared for the children. Her congeniality made
+her a favorite. Some of the American ladies offered to bring her back
+to America with them for a house-hold servant.
+
+From them she learned to speak the English language nearly as fluently
+as Spanish. The American soldiers were kind and polite to her. She
+made considerable money by doing washing for them. It was noticeable
+that she was gradually improving the old bamboo home in Manila. In a
+few months she had come into possession of more money than she thought
+there was in the entire world. Most of it was American gold--largely
+in five dollar denominations. (This is what the United States used in
+paying the soldiers.) These she took to the Spanish bank in Manila
+and exchanged them for Mexican silver, which, until the United
+States began to issue special coins for the Philippine islands,
+was the standard medium of exchange in the archipelago.
+
+Marie began to dress better. Her penia cloth gave way to Chinese silks;
+her wooden hair combs to expensive ones inlaid with gold, bought at
+the Spanish bazar down town. Many little comforts were bought for her
+home. Still the washings kept growing larger. She and her mother could
+be seen back of their shack, in the shade, pounding American soldiers'
+white uniforms on large boulders from early morning till night.
+
+Aguinaldo, who had previously sold out his country and gone to
+Singapore, after commissioning Dimiguez, upon hearing that war
+was about to begin between the United States and Spain, made his
+way northward to Hongkong. After the battle of Manila Bay, Dewey
+despatched the revenue cutter, "McCulloch," to Hongkong to cable
+home the news of his splendid victory. On her return to Manila,
+she permitted Aguinaldo to come along.
+
+After a brief conversation with Admiral Dewey on board the "Olympia,"
+he went ashore at Cavite, his boyhood home, began to organize the
+Filipinos into a powerful army, captured 1500 Spanish soldiers who
+were holding out-lying posts, and hemmed in the city of Manila.
+
+On August 13, following, Dewey and General Merritt, by a union of
+their forces, captured the city of Manila which offered but slight
+resistance. Aguinaldo's native troops rushed forward with the Americans
+in the charge that was made by the land forces and they insisted on
+looting the city. General Merritt refused this and ordered them to
+withdraw beyond the city limits. This they did after considerable
+wrangling. Then the Americans established out-posts on every road and
+pathway leading to and from the city, completely around the town;
+and they were given instructions by the commanding officer not to
+allow any Filipino troops to enter the city.
+
+Aguinaldo discarded his uniform one evening, completely
+disguised himself as a Filipino fruit-vender, and made his way
+into Manila. Naturally, he slipped around to the home of his old
+friends, the Sampalits. He sat in a semi-darkened room, with all the
+hinged-windows to the shack tightly closed and stroked Marie's soft
+black hair with his left hand. As he engaged her and her mother in
+conversation in subdued tones, he little thought that in so short a
+time Marie would be associated with him in a series of bloody tragedies
+that would revolutionize the government of the islands forever.
+
+"Marie," said he, "I'm going to force the Americans to acknowledge
+the independence of the Philippine islands, or I shall not permit
+the rest of their army to land. Dewey tells me he has sent home for
+reinforcements. There is no use for us to let these troops land, if
+America instead of Spain is going to govern the islands. What we want
+is absolute independence with myself as president of the new Filipino
+Republic. If the Americans won't concede this to us, let's fight!"
+
+"That's what I say!" declared Marie. "Let's drive the foreign devils
+off the islands or slay them all. Here's father dead and--Dimiguez,
+too"--Marie's voice trembled--"I tell you it's too much. Let's kill
+every one of them!"
+
+"Yes; but say Marie, we must keep quiet about all this," cautioned
+Aguinaldo. "I'll tell you what I have in mind. We'll wait about four
+weeks and by that time if Dewey hasn't received definite instructions
+from Washington, and if he won't give me any satisfaction, I'm going
+to go to Malolos, proclaim myself Dictator of the Philippines, appoint
+a cabinet and a congress from among some of the bright young Filipinos
+here in Manila who have been educated abroad, draw up a Revolutionary
+form of government, and begin to administer the affairs of these
+islands just as I please.
+
+"We'll keep our present army in the field, and if the Americans do
+land we'll shut them up in Manila, so that they will have nothing at
+their command but the city to regulate. This won't amount to much as
+compared with the rest of the islands which I will dominate."
+
+"Are you sure the Americans won't land a powerful army, cut through
+your lines around Manila and drive you out of Malolos, or capture you
+and your officials at that place? It seems to me I would go farther
+inland--say to San Isidro," said Marie.
+
+Aguinaldo thought a moment, then replied: "That's true, in a sense,
+Marie; but I have got to be on or near the railroad where I can have
+easy and rapid access to Manila. Malolos is not far from here and
+it is situated on the railroad. It has some very large buildings in
+which our legislative sessions could be held. I think it the place
+for the undertaking.
+
+"To be on the safe side, I believe I will have our troops erect a
+series of fortifications between here and there along the railroad
+track, so that if the Americans do attempt to advance by that route
+I can easily stop them."
+
+"I think that would be a good scheme," said Marie. "Malolos is about
+twelve miles from Manila Bay; besides, the bay is shallow in the
+north end, so that heavy boats could not go up there. This will make
+it impossible for Dewey to shell the place with his fleet. We've got
+to watch out for that--no matter what we do. My! but those American
+ships can shoot! Did you hear about me shooting at 'em with that
+cannon on Corregidor island when they entered the bay? I mighty near
+got one of their vessels."
+
+"No," said Aguinaldo, "I have not heard very much about the firing
+off Corregidor, but as I came from Hongkong the other day on the
+"McCulloch" I noticed that the Spanish fortifications on the island
+had all been dismantled."
+
+"Why! they killed a man right at my feet, the very first shot," said
+Marie; "and then one of their boats drew nearer and fired several
+times more and they killed every Spaniard in the relief guard which
+was near by,--seven of them in all."
+
+"And I was terribly worried about Marie," interrupted her mother who
+had listened to the conversation with deepest interest. "She had been
+gone for a week, and I hadn't heard a word from her."
+
+"Oh! well, I don't pity the Spaniards any for what the Americans did
+to them," interjected Aguinaldo, with some emphasis.
+
+"Be careful," said old lady Sampalit, putting her finger on her lips,
+"don't speak too loud."
+
+Aguinaldo continued in a lower voice: "They killed your husband. They
+shot Rizal. They strangled Dimigeuz. They tortured to death several
+hundred of our young fellows in the dungeons. They have left ridges
+of dead wherever their armies have moved among us. I tell you they
+deserved all they got."
+
+Mrs. Sampalit and Marie had grown heavy hearted. Aguinaldo looked at
+his watch. It was after ten P. M.
+
+"I wonder," said Aguinaldo, hesitatingly, "how I shall be able to
+get back to our lines tonight."
+
+"Don't go!" said Marie, in an emphatic whisper, "stay over night!"
+
+"Yes, do!" entreated the old lady, "I'm nervous."
+
+"It might be best; it would surely be the safest thing to do," said
+Aguinaldo, in a meditating manner.
+
+"We sleep on bamboo beds," said Marie. "There stands mine. You may use
+it tonight, and I will sleep on the floor. I don't mind. Mother and
+I frequently lie down on the floor near the window, when the nights
+are sultry."
+
+The next morning Aguinaldo arose very early, made his way to the
+edge of the city and stealthily stole out threw the Americans' lines,
+never again to return to Manila until General Funston brought him back,
+two years later, a captive.
+
+He made his way to Malolos, a few weeks after this conversation,
+declared himself "Dictator of the Philippines," appointed a Filipino
+congress, set up a government of his own and began to run the general
+affairs in the interior of Luzon.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+FILIPINO UPRISING
+
+
+The close of the eventful year of 1898 was near at hand. General Otis
+had been made governor-general of the islands. He had received about
+15,000 troops from home. These had all been landed and were quartered
+in the city of Manila.
+
+Preparations had begun by the American troops for a great day of field
+sports to be held on the Luneta--a beautiful narrow park paralleling
+Manila bay and extending southward from the walled-city about four
+miles--on New Year's day, 1899.
+
+On the afternoon of January I, as planned, the exercises were
+begun. The afternoon program consisted of foot races, running high
+jumps, wheelbarrow race, fat man's race, running broad jump, high
+kicking, fancy club swinging, tumbling, shot-put, sack race, tugs of
+war, five boxing contests, base ball, foot ball, and pole vaulting.
+
+Situated on the Luneta, about a mile south of the walled city, and
+distant from Manila bay about 100 feet, is a large bandstand. This
+served as headquarters for the exercises. The day was perfect--clear,
+cool and calm.
+
+About 2:00 P.M. over 40,000 natives, soldiers (including jack-tars
+from Dewey's fleet, Spaniards and Americans) and foreign residents
+had assembled around this bandstand to hear the Address of Welcome and
+to witness the sports. When the speaker arose to deliver the address,
+for which he was afterward voted, and presented with, a medal by the
+Eight Army Corps, he said in part (verbatim report):
+
+"On behalf of these committeemen who have spared no efforts to make
+these Field Day Exercises a success, and this occasion one long to
+be remembered by those who have assembled here this afternoon, I bid
+you, one and all--officers, soldiers, sailors and civilians of every
+nationality--a hearty welcome."
+
+"Again to you, the members of Admiral Dewey's fleet, I feel obligated
+to extend a separate and special welcome; for without your chivalrous
+devotion to duty last May Day, yon shell-riven wrecks (part of unraised
+Spanish fleet visible above the bay) would not bespeak the down-fall
+of a sister nation, and we ourselves would not have been permitted
+to assemble here this afternoon. There is no braver man on land or
+sea than the American marine; and on behalf of the entire American
+army of occupation, I bid you a most cordial welcome."
+
+Touching upon the question of territorial expansion, the speaker said:
+
+"This was a war for humanity, not for conquest. But simply because
+it suddenly closed and left us in possession of large tracts of
+new territory, is no reason why these spoils of war should be given
+up. I hold this to be true Americanism: that wherever the old flag
+is established through sacrifice of American blood, whether it be on
+the barren sands of the desert, at the frigid extremes of the earth,
+or on the rich and fertile islands of the sea, there is should remain
+triumphant, shedding forth beams of liberty to the oppressed, shouts
+of defiance to the oppressor, and furnish protection and enlightenment
+to all who come beneath its streaming folds forever!" (applause).
+
+A chubby Filipino maiden, standing near the speaker's stand, and
+who had listened intently to every word of the address, because she
+now understood the English tongue, quietly elbowed her way through
+the dense crowd which was gradually becoming more compressed, until
+she reached a car drawn by two Chinese ponies on the old street car
+line running south from Manila to Fort Malate and back. Taking the
+car she rode up town to the Escolta. Going into the postoffice, she
+hastily wrote and mailed to Aguinaldo at Malolos a letter containing
+an account of what was said. It follows:
+
+
+"Manila, P. I., Jan. 1, 1899.
+
+
+My Dear General:
+
+Those wretched Americans are holding some kind of exercises on the
+Luneta this afternoon. I heard one of the speeches. It was awful
+bad. The fellow talked loud. He swung his hands in the air and the
+crowd seemed to get terribly excited over what he was saying.
+
+He told about that treaty of peace, and he said no power under the
+sun would haul down the American flag from over Manila.
+
+It made me angry. I am going right out to the Filipino trenches to
+see my Uncle (Colonel Miguel). He'll fix those fellows. I'll bet
+he'll haul down their flag before tomorrow morning.
+
+
+Goodby,
+
+Marie."
+
+
+
+The evening program on the Luneta, which followed the afternoon
+exercises, was largely literary in its nature. It consisted of music
+by the California band, singing by the famous Washington Male Quartet,
+fancy dancing, selected recitations, and stump speeches. In addition,
+Privates Green and Martin boxed four rounds, much to the satisfaction
+of the natives.
+
+The program had just been completed when the Master of Ceremonies
+received from the American general in charge a note telling
+him to announce the conclusion of the program at once and to
+order all soldiers to report immediately at their respective
+regimental headquarters;--trouble had been reported at the
+out-posts. Reinforcements were hastened to several of the out-post
+reserves, and it appeared that the expected insurrection was at hand.
+
+After the out-break by the Filipinos on New Year's night, it was
+evident to both sides that it was only a question of a short time when
+blood would be spilled in abundance. The Filipinos occupied all of the
+block-houses--some seventeen in number--around the city of Manila. This
+forced the Americans to stand in the open and do guard duty exposed.
+
+The Filipino troops were saucy. They couldn't understand why men should
+be armed with rifles and not be permitted to shoot. They tormented
+the American soldiers daily with hideous pranks. They grew bolder,
+and pushed their out-posts forward until they stood within a few feet
+of the American sentries.
+
+Marie went out and back through the American lines at will. She
+secretly kept the Filipino army thoroughly posted on the arrival of
+new troops from America. Occasionally she would take the train and
+go up to Malolos to see Aguinaldo. She was the best posted person
+in the Philippines as to what was going on in each of the hostile
+armies. Nobody suspected her. She was respected by the American
+troops. Everybody came to know her.
+
+Just before dusk, on the evening of February 4th, 1899, Marie
+and her mother left the city of Manila, in a cariole, drawn by a
+Chinese pony which they had recently purchased. They had in it all of
+their most precious household trinkets. As they passed Colonel John
+M. Stotsenberg, commanding the 1st Nebraska volunteers, stationed
+on McLeod's hill at the eastern edge of Manila, he recognized them,
+and called to Marie, "Where are you going?"
+
+"Out on a little trip," retorted Marie.
+
+"How soon will you be back?" asked he.
+
+"O, I can't tell," responded Marie. "Mother is getting so nervous
+that we thought best to go away for awhile."
+
+"Say, Marie," said the colonel, "do you know who the Filipino officer
+is in command of all those thousands of troops that are now assembling
+in the ravines between the hills along the far side of the river
+valley, yonder?"
+
+"No, I do not," she declared with an emphatic swing of her head.
+
+But she was lying. It was Colonel Miguel, her own uncle. She knew about
+it. He had secretly informed her that he was preparing to attack the
+city and burn it and that he was going to exterminate the American
+army of occupation and all foreign residents that fell into the hands
+of his mighty army. He told her that he had chosen the east side of
+the city as his main point of attack, so that Dewey could not reach
+his troops with the shells from his gun boats in case he tried to
+assist the American army, without elevating his guns and shooting
+completely over the city--a thing wholly impractical within itself,
+as Dewey could not determine whether his shells would be falling
+among the Filipino or the American troops. It was he who advised her
+to take her mother and flee to the hills for refuge.
+
+Colonel Stotsenberg then asked Marie if she knew anything about the
+proposed attack on the city by her people. This, she denied also. The
+colonel's face flushed. Pulling back the flap of his tent, he said
+emphatically: "Do you see that gun, Marie? Tell those fellows over
+there when you pass their lines that I said they could have trouble
+whenever they want it."
+
+Marie drove on.
+
+Inside the colonel's tent stood a large gun from the Utah battery,
+mounted, loaded, ready for action; its threatening nose was
+pointed directly at the line of little brown men assembled across
+the valley. The Filipinos were smarting for trouble. They wanted it
+badly. Wherever and whenever possible they improved every opportunity
+to bring it about. The trouble came. Colonel Stotsenberg that night
+used the cannon he had pointed out to Marie. A long pile of mangled
+forms lying at the base of the river hills on the opposite of the
+valley next morning told the results.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+AS A SPY
+
+
+Marie was well equipped by instinct and experience for a spy. The
+tragic nature of such work was exceptionally inviting to her. When
+a chance came to undertake it, she lost no time in embracing the
+opportunity.
+
+After passing out through the American lines, she drove on down the
+slope of the hill and crossed the San Juan River on the old stone
+bridge where the fighting was begun that night by young Grayson of
+the Nebraska regiment. After reaching the Filipinos' lines she at once
+reported to her uncle, Colonel Miguel, and had an extended interview
+with him.
+
+Secret plans were agreed upon whereby she was to become the colonel's
+chief scout. Two Filipino soldiers were sent to accompany her old
+mother to the little town of Angono on the eastern bank of Lake Laguna
+de Bay, near its northern end. A native family, quite familiar with
+the Sampalits and related to them, lived in this village. Marie stayed
+with the troops in the field. Her young brain danced at the thought
+of more bloodshed. She must be in the fight.
+
+Just what part Marie took in the attack made upon the Americans by
+the Filipinos on the night of February 4th, and in the fighting on
+February 5th, the world will never know. The two main figures in
+these operations were Colonel Miguel, in command of the main portion
+of the Filipino forces, and Colonel Stotsenberg, who commanded the
+1st Nebraska volunteers. Before the close of the war these men were
+both shot; consequently, there is no one left to tell the story,
+and history is silent on the point.
+
+After the fight of February 4 and 5, the entire line of block-houses
+and intrenchments circumscribing Manila, were in the hands of the
+Americans. From the Pasig river on the east, around the city to the
+bay on the north, this line was commanded by Major-General MacArthur;
+the corresponding semi-circle on the south, by Major-General Anderson.
+
+During the next seven weeks, fresh troops were constantly
+arriving. Each side was preparing for the long, inevitable conflict.
+
+At day break, on March 25, General MacArthur, leaving Hall's brigade
+in the trenches and placing those of Otis and Hale on the firing line,
+which was over seven miles in length, made a brilliant charge along
+the entire front on the Filipinos' breastworks about a mile and a
+half distant and constructed parallel to those of the Americans'.
+
+Before night he had cut the Filipino army into hopeless fragments;
+had advanced his own army over nine miles; had inflicted a terrible
+loss upon Aguinaldo's troops; had demonstrated to them the difference
+between a determined American advance and an irresolute Spanish one;
+and had taken up in earnest the invasion of Luzon, the capture of
+the Filipinos' temporary capital, Malolos, the overthrow of their
+provisional government, and the establishment of American sovereignty
+throughout the entire archipelago.
+
+That night, about eleven o'clock, a nervous Filipino woman came walking
+down along the American out-post reserves which, during actual war,
+are usually only from 100 to 200 feet in the rear of the sentries. She
+reached Company "G's" reserve of the 1st South Dakota Volunteers,
+where she was ordered to halt. She refused, but acted as though she
+did not understand. Drawing a large bamboo bonnet down over her face
+to conceal her identity, she mumbled something apparently to herself,
+and walked rapidly on. In a moment she was seized; her bonnet was
+torn off; her identity revealed: it was Marie.
+
+She had been counting the American out-posts and the reserves to see
+if the defeated Filipinos, with the reinforcements which they had
+received, would be warranted in making a night attack.
+
+She boldly denied her identification; fought, scratched,
+scrambled--making it necessary to employ two privates, a corporal
+and a sergeant to send her to the rear.
+
+When she was taken before Major William F. Allison, commanding the
+3rd battalion of the South Dakotas, who was acting as field-officer
+that night, he ordered her restrained until morning. A tired private
+was detailed to guard her. He gave her a rubber poncho, and insisted
+that she wrap herself up in it and lie down to sleep. Although she
+drew the poncho about her to keep herself warm (it grew very chilly
+before morning) she refused to sleep, and made repeated efforts to
+escape. Her teeth chattered and she seemed distressed--evidently
+through fear of what the morning might bring to her.
+
+The next day she was set free, after taking a solemn oath to return
+to Manila and not take any further part in the insurrection. She
+pleaded earnestly for her liberty, and voluntarily promised that
+after her return to Manila she would do washing free of charge for
+the American soldiers who were sick in quarters.
+
+After being liberated, Marie walked eastward, following an irregular
+sled-road; that is, a road-way used by the Filipinos for sledding
+their rice to market. This is done by means of a bamboo sled drawn
+over the dry ground by a caribou. She followed this road for over
+two miles until she came to the San Mateo river.
+
+Although given a few hardtack by her captors at the time of her
+release, she was getting hungry. As she approached the stream she
+noticed an old Filipino standing near his bamboo cabin which was neatly
+tucked away oh the slope of a deep ravine near by. Turning from her
+pathway which had now grown somewhat indistinct she approached the
+old gentleman.
+
+When quite close to him she said, "Buenos dias," (Good morning in
+Spanish.)
+
+"Magandang umaga," (Good morning, in Tagalo), muttered the old man.
+
+After a brief conversation during which Marie told him that she had
+been captured by the Americans, had been terribly misused and he had a
+miraculous escape, he invited her into his cabin where his aged wife
+gave her something to eat. This breakfast consisted of boiled rice,
+some fish which the old man had just brought from his set lines in
+the San Mateo river, and some bacon which he had found along the
+trail made by the American's pack train the day before.
+
+While the old couple were outside of their home--he breaking up
+some bamboo with which to re-kindle the fire, and she, cleaning the
+fish--Marie ransacked the house. She stole a large diamond ring which
+the old man had taken from the finger of a Spanish officer during
+the previous insurrection. She opened an old mahogany chest and took
+from it a rosary valued at several hundred dollars; also a gold lined
+cup which the old man, himself, had stolen from a Spanish priest,
+and some Spanish coins.
+
+After a hearty lunch, she started on.
+
+Crossing the river at the rapids, on the boulders which projected
+above the water, she quickened her steps and hurried along. Changing
+her course to the southward, she started for the northern end of Lake
+Laguna de Bay to see her mother.
+
+She had not gone far through a small clump of timber when she came
+upon the corpse of a Filipino soldier who had been shot in the previous
+day's engagement,--perhaps by a stray ball. Hastily stealing the cross
+which hung from a small cord about his neck, and a valueless ring from
+one of his fingers, she seized his Mauser rifle and his cartridge belt
+which was partly filled with ammunition, and then resumed her journey.
+
+A short distance ahead was a large opening--an old rice field
+well cleared. She had scarcely begun to cross it when she heard a
+noise. She turned and saw the bow-legged old man whom she had robbed,
+with a machete in his hand, coming after her as fast as he could. He
+had discovered that the rosary was missing, and upon looking around,
+that several other things were gone; therefore he at once started
+in pursuit of the fiend who had just enjoyed his hospitality. Marie
+was not disturbed. Raising to her shoulder the rifle which she had
+just found, she took deliberate aim and at the first shot laid him
+low in death.
+
+She reached the small native village of Angono, where her mother was
+stopping, about four o'clock in the afternoon of March 26th.
+
+The old lady was wonderfully elated to receive the new jewels which
+Marie had stolen. She put on the rosary and danced about in the native
+hut like a young child on Christmas morning, when it sees the gorged
+stocking fastened to its bed.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+OFF FOR BALER
+
+
+That night Marie had a good rest. The next morning, fired with ambition
+and discontent, she lit her accustomed cigarette and started for
+Manila. Instead of going overland, she went in a row boat via the
+Pasig river which drains the lake into Manila bay and which flows
+through the city of Manila situated at its mouth.
+
+While stealthily prowling around through Manila during the next few
+days, Marie accidentally discovered that plans were being carried
+out by the Americans to relieve the remnant of the old Spanish
+garrison of fifty men stationed at the little town of Baler, near
+the eastern coast of Luzon. This garrison was of course surrendered
+to the American forces with the remainder of the Spanish army on
+August 13, 1898, but as all lines of communication with them had been
+destroyed by the Filipinos they had never been officially notified
+of the capitulation. Scouting parties brought in the information that
+they were being besieged by a horde of blood-thirsty Filipinos which
+outnumbered them ten to one, and that it was only a question of time
+before all would be exterminated.
+
+Accordingly, Admiral Dewey and General Otis decided that something
+must be done at once to relieve them. A rescuing party was formed and
+placed aboard the "Yorktown," which carried them around the southern
+point of Luzon and then northward to the mouth of the Baler river.
+
+Marie, nerved by the thought of a new exploit, forgot her oath not
+to take up arms against the Americans again during the insurrection,
+and hastily departed overland for Baler to notify the besieging
+Filipinos of what was to take place, and to help them as best she
+could to resist the advance of the rescuing party.
+
+Although Baler is situated on the Baler river, near the eastern coast
+of Luzon, and Manila is on the west side of the island Baler is,
+nevertheless, almost directly north of Manila. This is caused by the
+deep indention of Manila bay, on the extreme eastern side of which
+Manila is situated, and by the abrupt inclination to the westward of
+the eastern coast line of Luzon directly above a point straight east
+of Manila.
+
+In starting on her journey Marie left Manila by a little Filipino
+foot-path which enters the city in the northeastern part near the
+San Sebastian church. She followed it to Block-house No. 4, which is
+situated about three miles north and a trifle east of Manila. At that
+point she took a road which veered off perceptibly to the east for a
+short distance and which was made by the Americans' commissary train
+on the morning that the advance was begun toward Malolos, March 25,
+preceding.
+
+She had gone but a quarter of a mile when her attention was
+attracted to a board used as the head-stone for a grave only a few
+feet distant from her pathway. She walked over to in and found these
+words inscribed thereon:
+
+
+                       "R. I. P. D. O. M.
+
+                         Wat Erbuf Falo
+
+              Born -- (?) Died, February 12, 1899.
+
+
+        To those who bring flowers to this lonely grave,
+           Some facts on its headstone we wish to engrave;
+        If this mound could speak no doubt it would tell
+           Bill Sherman was right when he said, 'War is Hell.'
+        He charged on two pickets whose names are below;
+           They took him for niggers,--poor wronged buffalo.
+        As to the way he met death, everybody knows how;
+           As to whom he belonged we don't caribou.
+
+                Signed: Barney and Barkley, Co. "M," 1st. Col. Vols."
+
+
+
+It was now April 2nd, and Marie had ahead of her about ninety miles
+overland to be made on foot or else on horse-back; and it was necessary
+for her to hurry along, as the rescuing party was scheduled to reach
+the mouth of Baler river April 10th, or 12th.
+
+Her course led past the little shack on the bank of the San Mateo
+river, where she had robbed the elderly couple who had been so kind
+to her and near where she later had shot the old man when he was
+pursuing her to regain possession of his stolen property.
+
+She found it deserted; but in a little bamboo corral nearby she found
+three Chinese ponies. Evidently they had made their escape from the
+scene of battle and had drifted into this yard for refuge. There was
+a small stack of rice straw just outside the corral. From this Marie
+soon made a stoutly-twisted rope which she hastily arranged in the
+form of a bridle. Placing it over the head of the largest pony she
+mounted him and rode off.
+
+She got ten miles beyond this last stopping place before sunset. That
+night she stopped at a small inland village. As she lay down to sleep
+on the bamboo floor in the hut of a Tagalo family whose acquaintance
+she had readily formed, recollections of the place which she had
+passed during the afternoon where she had previously robbed the old
+couple immediately after she was released upon oath by the Americans,
+suggested to her the thought that she was violating her oath; that she
+was now out in a country where she might be betrayed at any moment by
+her own people, or else be captured by a squad of American infantry
+or cavalry; therefore, she decided that on the following day she
+would destroy her identity.
+
+Upon retiring the previous night Marie coiled up for a pillow her head
+of long black hair. "I hate to give it up," thought she, "but what
+will the Americans do to me if they capture me another time? Oh! well,
+after the war is over it will soon grow out again."
+
+The next morning, after a scanty breakfast of bananas and rice, and
+a pineapple which Marie salted heavily before she ate it, she went to
+a native barber and had her long hair cut close to the scalp, except
+for a little tuft on top which she had him brush up for a pompadour.
+
+Before cutting off her hair the barber tied a piece of hemp very
+tightly around it, just back of her neck. After he had detached it,
+he held it in front of Marie and asked her what she wished done with
+it. She took it in her own hands.
+
+The barber kept on trimming her shortened hair. Marie stopped talking
+and seemed to be in deep meditation.
+
+Presently the barber said. "That's all."
+
+Marie arose from the rough mahogany slab on which she had been sitting,
+handed him a puesta (twenty cents, Mexican), looked out of the window
+and said, "I'll tell you what I'll do: I'll trade you my hair for
+that quilas (two-wheeled cart) standing there."
+
+"All right"; said the barber, "My pony is dead, and the war has so
+devasted the country, and money has become so scarce, that I can't
+afford to buy another one."
+
+"The harness hanging on it goes with the cart," said Marie.
+
+"Oh no!" exclaimed the barber, "my wife borrowed that, and I must
+return it."
+
+"It doesn't make any difference to whom it belongs," said Marie,
+emphatically, "you traded me the cart, and everything that was in it
+goes with the trade. How do you suppose I could hitch my pony into
+the cart without a harness?"
+
+Just then she pulled a bolo out from under her apron. The barber said
+no more.
+
+Marie hitched her pony into the cart and started on toward Baler.
+
+That day she followed a good road leading toward the mountains near
+the eastern coast of Luzon. By night her pony had made twenty miles.
+
+She had already reached the foot-hills. It was impossible for her
+to make head-way any longer with the cart. She would soon be across
+the mountains and be in the region to be approached by the American
+relief party. What was to be done?
+
+A happy thought came to Marie. She clasped her hands and muttered to
+herself, "I'll trade the cart for a suit of men's clothes and trade
+the harness for a sombrero," (bamboo hat.)
+
+Since the middle of the afternoon she had been driving parallel to a
+stream that wound its way, nearby, from the mountains across the plains
+to the sea. Villages along the banks were numerous. At night fall she
+was still in Tagalo territory. It was her own tribe. She soon found a
+place to stay over night. Her pony was turned loose in a vacant yard,
+with an old bamboo fence around it, and given some young rice.
+
+That evening while smoking cigarettes, and while inflaming the minds
+of the villagers with startling stories about the atrocities, of the
+American soldiers, Marie finally succeeded in making the trade which
+she had planned during the afternoon.
+
+Next morning, April 5, she rode on. Before her lay sixty miles of
+unknown territory to be covered during the next four days, if she
+were to reach Baler in time to warn the besieging Filipinos of the
+contemplated attack by the Americans.
+
+A half mile out from the village, Marie came to an abrupt turn in the
+road. Near by was a dense cluster of banana trees. She dismounted,
+and while her pony was nibbling young rice she went into the thicket
+and changed her attire. Then she tied a good-sized stone up in her
+old clothes and threw them into the river. As she stood on the bank
+watching them sink, she saw her shadow in the water. How changed she
+looked! The sombrero was such a relief in keeping the hot sun off
+her head.
+
+"Now, I'll not be recognized," thought she. "How nice it is to be
+dressed like a man. From now on I mean to play a man's part and be
+a full-fledged soldier."
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+THE GILMORE INCIDENT
+
+
+Marie reached her destination late in the evening of April 9th,
+and she at once notified the officers commanding the Filipinos who
+were besieging Baler, what to expect. Knowing that with so small a
+force, if the Americans undertook to relieve the Spanish garrison,
+it would necessarily have to be done by way of the Baler river--as
+the town of Baler where the Spanish garrison was located is some two
+miles up the river from where it empties into the Pacific ocean, and
+the American troops were too greatly outnumbered by the Filipinos to
+make a land expedition safe,--she suggested to them the advisability
+of fortifying the river at specific intervals along either bank and
+of taking the precaution to cover the fortifications with freshly-cut
+brush so that the Americans could not locate them for the purpose of
+bombarding them in case they saw fit to load some of the smaller cannon
+on cascoes and make their way up the river for an attack in that way.
+
+The Filipinos took her suggestions, and the entrenchments and places
+for the sentries were quickly, yet very wisely, arranged. It was
+during the dry season and the river was very low at the time. This
+made it possible to dig ditches on the sand bars which extended far
+out into the stream; and by throwing into the river the loose sand
+taken therefrom, to conceal these entrenchments by strewing over them
+some fresh-cut limbs and old under brush which had the appearance of
+having drifted to their lodgment.
+
+The Yorktown arrived off the mouth of the Baler river, April 11, as
+scheduled. Ensign Stanley went ashore, under a flag of truce, where,
+to his surprise, he was cordially received by the Filipino officers;
+but their exceptionally good behavior and the twinkle of their eyes
+told only too plainly to the ensign that something was wrong. He
+therefore returned to the Yorktown without having accomplished anything
+in particular.
+
+The next morning, at four o'clock, Lieutenant Gilmore and sixteen
+brave associates left the Yorktown in a row boat, and entered the
+mouth of the river. Ensign Stanley and Quartermaster Lysac were put
+ashore to reconnoiter. In a few minutes daylight broke forth and
+those left in the boat were discovered by the Filipino sentry who
+was walking his beat along the shore. He gave the alarm. Lieutenant
+Gilmore and his party could easily have pulled out to sea and gotten
+away, but humanity forbade it. What would become of the two scouts
+who went ashore? Their comrades in the boat could not desert them,
+so they rowed up the river into the very jaws of impending danger.
+
+Presently out of a concealed trench hundreds of armed Filipinos
+opened a deadly fire on Gilmore and his comrades, at only fifty yards
+distance. The water at this point was shallow. The boat got stuck in
+the mud. There was nothing to do but to fight. In a moment Morrisy
+fell dead, having been shot through the head; Dillon followed;
+then McDonald, then Nygard;--Marie was doing deadly work with her
+Mauser rifle.
+
+The Americans returned the fire as best they could; but what was
+the use. They could see nothing to fire at, so perfectly had the
+Filipinos screened their trenches; besides, the Filipinos were using
+smokeless powder.
+
+Four of Gilmore's men were already dead, two were mortally wounded
+and begging their comrades to shoot them before they fell into the
+hands of the Filipinos, and two more were slightly wounded. Most
+of the oars had been badly shattered by the enemy's rifle balls. In
+this moment of desperation, Ellsworth, Woodbury and Edwards jumped
+overboard and tried to push the boat out to mid-stream. It was no use;
+the tide was coming in and the current was so strong that they could
+not compete against it.
+
+Lieutenant Gilmore was firing his revolver. He decided to change and
+use one of the dead men's rifles. As he picked it up he noticed the
+lock had been struck by a Remington ball and the clip had been jammed
+in. He handed it to an apprentice lad, named Venville, to be fixed.
+
+The boy had scarcely begun to examine the gun, when a bullet struck
+him in the fleshy part of the neck. He had never been under fire
+before. Looking up calmly, he said, "Mr. Gilmore, I'm hit."
+
+In a moment another bullet struck him in the chest and came out of
+his arm pit. With his attention riveted on his task, he remarked,
+"I'm hit again, Mr. Gilmore."
+
+Only a moment later another ball grazed the side of his head and cut
+a painful wound in his scalp. "Mr. Gilmore, they've hit me again,"
+he muttered, while he kept on working at the gun, with blood running
+down all over him.
+
+In a few minutes a fourth ball passed through the lad's ankle, one of
+the most painful parts of the body in which to get shot. This time,
+with a slight tremble in his voice, he said, "Mr. Gilmore, I'm hit
+once more; but I've fixed your gun, Sir."
+
+Just at this moment the Filipinos saw that the Americans' fire had
+practically ceased. Throwing back from off their trench the limbs and
+underbrush that had concealed them, the Filipinos, armed with guns,
+spears, bolos and clubs, made a bold dash for the boat and captured
+the entire crew.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+THE AMERICAN PRISONERS
+
+
+Those of the Americans who were alive and able to help themselves
+were ordered to go ashore on the sand bar, where the Filipinos robbed
+them of their personal effects and then lined them up preparatory
+to shooting them all down in a body. Gilmore, being an officer,
+protested against having his hands tied. He claimed, according to
+the accepted rules of warfare, that on account of his rank he had
+a right to die honorably with his hands free. The Filipinos have
+great superstitions about "rank" in military affairs. Marie knew the
+significance of Gilmore's request; she respected it.
+
+The Filipinos had loaded their rifles, cocked them, raised the same
+to their shoulders, had taken aim, and Marie was about to give the
+fatal command, "Fire!", when a shout from the bank stopped her and
+for a moment engaged the attention of both the Americans and the
+Filipinos. It came from a Filipino officer, running down to the
+shore. He ordered them to stop. One second longer would have been
+too late.
+
+This Tagalo officer ordered the Americans to get back into their boat
+and to row across to the opposite shore. After bailing the water out
+of the boat and plugging up the holes in it made by the enemy's rifle
+balls, they obeyed his command.
+
+When they went ashore, Lieutenant Gilmore asked permission to bury
+his dead comrades. This privilege was emphatically denied. What was
+done with their bodies by the Filipinos is hard to tell, but in all
+probability, as was customary with the natives, they cut them into
+fragments and threw them away.
+
+The ones who were mortally wounded, but who were still alive, were
+placed under a tree by Gilmore and his comrades, and left to die. The
+Lieutenant asked that a native doctor be summoned to give them aid,
+but it was not done. What their fate was Eternity alone will reveal.
+
+Gilmore and his comrades picked up the lesser wounded and carried
+them, and together the whole procession was marched inland about a
+mile to the Filipino Commandante's headquarters.
+
+Here they were questioned at length. Gilmore asked permission to
+write a note to the commander of the Yorktown telling him of their
+fate. Permission was granted, but the note was never delivered. The
+two scouts who went ashore, returned to the Yorktown in the afternoon
+and reported that they had heard heavy firing up the river.
+
+After waiting several days for news of some kind for them, and finally
+concluding that they were either captured or killed, the crew of
+the Yorktown, heavy-hearted over their failure and their sacrifice,
+steamed back to Manila.
+
+During the afternoon of the same day that the battle took place,
+the American prisoners were ordered to march to an old bamboo church
+in the northern outskirts of the little town of Baler, a mile and
+a half farther on. By this time the wounded men were suffering
+terribly. Little Venville's ankle had swollen badly. From his four
+wounds he had bled so much that he had grown faint. Therefore, he
+and several of the others had to be carried.
+
+En route to their new destination, the Americans passed in sight of
+the old stone church being used as a fortress by the Spanish garrison
+whom they had originally set out to relieve. The Americans had gone
+to the Philippines to fight the Spaniards. They were now sacrificing
+their lives to save them.
+
+At the bamboo church, an old Filipino with a kindly face and a manner
+that elevated him above his fellow tribesmen, came in to see them. He
+examined the wounded and then disappeared. Presently he returned with
+some large leaves that resembled rhubarb, under his arm. Out of the
+big stems of these native herbs he squeezed a milky secretion which he
+permitted to drop into the gaping wounds of the Americans. The torture
+of the wounded occasioned by this liquid was damnable. The men grew
+deathly pale. They rolled and screamed and begged to be shot. But
+it did not last long. In ten minutes the torture had ceased, the men
+became quiet, the swelling around their wounds was gradually reduced,
+and their temperatures soon lowered. The herb doctor evidently knew
+his business.
+
+The next day the Filipinos received orders from Aguinaldo, who,
+with his appointed congress, was now at San Isidro, to march the
+captured Americans to his headquarters. Accordingly, the trip
+was undertaken. But the apprentice lad, Venville, was unable to
+go along. Obeying the stubborn orders of the rapacious Filipinos
+his comrades left him lying on the floor of the old rickety bamboo
+church,--wounded--uncared for--suffering--hungry--thirsty--dying. A
+year later the assistance of the entire naval organization in the
+Philippines was given to the task of trying to ascertain from the
+Filipinos in the neighborhood of Baler some information concerning
+the lad's whereabouts or his burial place, but no trace of him,
+dead or alive, could ever be found.
+
+
+                An aged mother, ill and bowed,
+                  Keeps asking, "Where's my boy?"
+                But zephyrs from the Orient
+                  Refuse to bring the joy.
+
+
+Amid great privations the marching column crossed the mountains and
+the fertile plains on the opposite side, to the city of San Isidro. It
+was heralded in advance that the Americans were coming through the
+country. Obeying their greatest national instinct--curiosity--the
+natives assembled by thousands in the villages along the road. Every
+one of them kept crowding forward to get to touch the Americans to see
+what their skins felt like. Others were looking for the long feathers
+in their hair, which they had heard so much about. It was all the
+Filipino guards could do to restrain their own people. The latter,
+like monkeys, jabbered incessantly. Gilmore's men hurled back at them
+defiant epithets. They realized that involuntarily they had become
+the chief actors in a new moving circus.
+
+Again, when they reached San Isidro, a great throng of curious natives
+had come to town to see them. These fellows were very hostile to the
+Americans. It was all the native guard could do to keep the Filipinos
+from doing violence to them. Gilmore was again questioned at length
+and then he was separated from his comrades and all were hurried off
+to jail.
+
+In a few days it was rumored that the American army was approaching the
+city. Aguinaldo and his associates hurriedly prepared to leave. Orders
+were given to march the prisoners overland north and then westward
+across another range of high mountains to Arancay, on the western
+coast of Luzon,--a distance of 100 miles.
+
+This time the crowd of prisoners was greatly increased. At San
+Isidro there were added 600 Spaniards; a small tribe of mountain
+Negritos whom Aguinaldo had originally sent to fight the Americans,
+but who, being armed only with spears and bolos, soon got tired of
+seeing their number decrease so rapidly before American riflemen,
+and refused to fight, and who were later imprisoned and terribly
+misused by Aguinaldo's selected guards; and eighteen Americans in
+addition to Gilmore's party (total twenty-six Americans), who had
+been captured in as many different ways around Manila by the crafty,
+cunning Filipinos. Among them was Frank Stone, of the U. S. Signal
+Corps, captured by some "amigos" (friendly natives) on the railroad
+track near Manila, while out strolling one Sunday afternoon; Private
+Curran, of the 16th U.S. Infantry who was grabbed within fifty feet
+of his own outpost, gagged and dragged into captivity; also a civilian
+who had gone to the Philippines to sell liquor.
+
+This fellow was captured by the Filipinos in the outskirts of Manila
+while he was searching for a small boatload of stolen beer. He was the
+life of the expedition. He took his captivity as a joke, told stories
+to keep the prisoners good natured, and painted on ever boulder that
+he passed the seemingly sacrilegious words, "Drink Blank's beer on
+the road to H----." It was, however, this harmless practice that later
+on enabled the American relief party to follow the prisoners' trail.
+
+After reaching the western shore of Luzon, the party was marched
+northward along the beach, another 100 miles, to the city of
+Vigan. Here they were imprisoned for three months longer. The sudden
+presence of an American war-ship in the harbor, off Vigan, caused the
+natives to abandon that city and start inland with their prisoners
+for some mountain fastness. The Americans were separated from the
+rest of the prisoners whom they never saw again.
+
+High up in the mountains of northern Luzon, two of the American boys
+were taken sick with fever and fell down, exhausted. The Filipino
+lieutenant who had charge of the prisoners, ordered them to go on;
+they could not. He threatened to shoot them. Gilmore interceded for
+them without avail. The Americans refused to leave their Anglo-Saxon
+comrades and prepared to fight. At this moment the Filipino officer
+himself was suddenly taken ill, and by the time he was able to advance,
+the sick Americans were able to go along.
+
+A few days later they struggled over the crest of the divide and came
+upon the headwaters of a beautiful mountain torrent dancing down the
+rocky ledges in its onward course to the sea. At a widened place in
+the canon, the Filipinos withdrew from the Americans, and with guns
+in hand took their positions on the rocks round-about and above them.
+
+"Prepare to die," said Gilmore to his companions; "they are going to
+shoot us." Calling the Filipino lieutenant to his side Gilmore asked
+him why he did not shoot them on the opposite side of the mountains,
+and not have made them make all of that hard climb for nothing.
+
+The native officer said in reply: "My orders were to shoot all of
+you when I got you up in the mountains, where, in all probability,
+your bodies would be destroyed by wild animals and no trace of them
+ever be found by your countrymen; but a few nights ago when you showed
+me that crucifix tattooed on your chest while you were a midshipman
+in America, I decided not to carry out my order, but to let you all
+go free. I may be punished for disobedience of orders; but we are
+both bound together by the great Catholic church, and my conscience
+forbids that I should kill you."
+
+Gilmore replied: "You might as well shoot us as to set us free away
+up here in the mountains in our weakened condition with nothing to
+defend ourselves with against the savages whose territory we will have
+to cross in order to get to the sea. Can't you spare us at least two
+rifles and some ammunition? If you will do this, I will give you a
+letter which, should you fall into the hands of the Americans, will
+make you safe and bring you ample reward."
+
+The Filipino looked meditatingly at the ground for several moments,
+then he calmly said, "I shall not dare to do it. An American relief
+party, seeking your liberation, is close on our heels. They will
+protect and care for you. Goodby!"
+
+Gilmore did not believe him.
+
+Under cover of the night the Filipinos disappeared. In the morning,
+after nine long, tedious months of captivity resulting from Marie
+Sampalit's depredations,--sick, nearly starved, practically nude, with
+nothing but two battle axes and a bolo for both weapons of defense
+and for tools--the Americans at last found themselves free men in
+the wilds of northern Luzon, with positive death left behind, and
+with possible life and all of its happy associations still before them.
+
+Their first day of liberty was spent in preparing bamboo rafts on
+which to float down the tortuous, winding river to the sea. The next
+night they all slept well; and on the following morning, just after
+they had gotten up and begun to saunter around, everybody present was
+suddenly shocked by the shrill yell of a strong American voice. They
+all looked up, and while their hearts for a moment seemingly stopped
+beating and fairly rose in their throats, the liberated prisoners
+beheld the blue shirts and khaki trousers of Colonel Hare's rescue
+party that for several weeks had been on their trail.
+
+What rejoicing! The bony, ill-clad prisoners fell on the strong bosoms
+of their rescuers and wept.
+
+Colonel Hare's father, Judge Hare, of Washington, D.C., knew Gilmore
+personally. He had seen the military reports of his captivity among
+the natives. When his son bade him goodby as he started for the
+Philippines, Judge Hare said, "My boy, God bless you; find Gilmore
+and bring him home!" Colonel Hare had remained true to his trust.
+
+The party could not retrace their steps over the mountains, owing to
+the weakened condition of the prisoners and the lack of food. Their
+only chance for self-preservation and a possible return to civilization
+lay in carrying out Gilmore's designs to build bamboo rafts and float
+down the river to the sea. This was done. In going over rapids and
+water-falls, many rafts were destroyed and new ones had to be built.
+
+Two of the boys got the measles. The raft on which one of them,
+Private Day, was being transported, got smashed on the rocks and he
+was thrown into the water. He took cold and died the next day. His
+comrades took his body with them and did not bury it until they finally
+reached the little town of Ambulug, at the mouth of the stream they
+had been following, on the northern coast of Luzon. There, amid a
+simple but impressive ceremony, it was buried in the church-yard of
+the cathedral to await the resurrection morn.
+
+At Ambulug the Americans secured ox-carts drawn by caribous and drove
+along the beach to the city of Aparri, at the mouth of the Cagayan
+river. Here they were met by a detachment of American Marines who
+took them aboard a war-ship, lying out to sea, which carried them
+around the northwest promontory of Luzon to the city of Vigan on the
+western coast, at which place they had been imprisoned for so long.
+
+Here they met General Young who shook hands with each of them;
+congratulated the rescued and complimented the rescuers.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+DEATH OF GENERAL LAWTON.
+
+
+After the battle of Baler, Marie and a few native soldiers hastened
+westward in advance of the prisoners, to San Isidro to notify Aguinaldo
+who had moved his headquarters to that place, that the Americans were
+advancing northward in great numbers and that nothing could impede
+their progress. This information had previously been conveyed to the
+Filipino general from other sources, so that Marie found him in his
+so-called congress packed up and ready to move,--a thing they were
+forced to do a few days after the American prisoners arrived. She
+accompanied them for several long, tedious months, acting as cook for
+the expedition and serving in other capacities--none of them seeming
+to her to be ample reward for all she had done.
+
+Early in the coming fall, Marie, tired of Aguinaldo's game of
+hide-and-go-seek, and anxious to find out about her mother and to get
+into more fighting, if there be a chance, made her way back to Manila.
+
+But her conscience bothered her. She remembered that broken oath and
+many other acts of wanton treachery that would shock the civilized
+world. She feared that her own life would soon be sought either by
+the Americans or by the Filipinos. Accordingly she suggested to her
+mother that they again go to her aunt's in the little town of Angono
+at the north end of Lake Laguna de Bay, where she had left her mother
+stationed when last they had parted. Her mother, growing old and
+nervous through accumulated years, past grievances, hard work and the
+strain of the present conflict, favored the plan; and so they departed
+on December 2nd, taking the same road over McLeod's Hill and on down
+over the Santa Mesa bridge that they had traveled on February 4th.
+
+Before leaving Manila she learned through the private Filipino Junta
+which was secretly assisting in the war by accumulating funds for
+its prosecution and by distributing among the native troops the
+inflammatory literature which was being promiscuously sent out by
+the people in the United States who opposed the war, that a secret
+reward of $10,000. had been offered for the death of General Lawton.
+
+About the middle of December, 1899, the General had returned to
+Manila from another telling campaign northward, when he learned that
+the Filipinos were assembling in large numbers under one of their
+fearless leaders, General Geronemo, on the San Mateo river, but a
+few miles out of Manila, for the purpose of making one more attempt
+to break through the American lines guarding that city.
+
+On December 17, Marie heard that another attack was to be made on
+Manila, so she left her mother at Angono and made her way to the
+Filipinos' camp along the San Mateo river, only a few miles south of
+where she had crossed it at the rapids the morning after she had been
+liberated under oath by Major Allison.
+
+The next day, she was in secret consultation with Geronemo, and she
+disclosed to him all the information she had concerning the defenses
+of Manila.
+
+That evening, Filipino scouts, dressed in female attire, brought to
+General Geronemo the news that the Americans, under General Lawton,
+who was supposed to be away up in the northern part of Luzon, had
+anticipated his movements and were assembling in the woods on the
+opposite side of the valley in large numbers, possibly for a night
+attack.
+
+Marie told Geronemo what she had learned while in Manila concerning
+the reward that had been secretly offered for the killing of General
+Lawton. He knew all about it and confirmed the offer. She told him all
+about her training as a marksman with the Spanish on Corregidor island
+and of her subsequent experience, and said she knew General Lawton
+well; that she could single him out, and in case he led his troops,
+as he usually did in battle, she was sure she could capture the prize.
+
+A place of unusual safety and concealment was selected along the
+Filipinos' lines, directly in front of the center of the probable point
+of attack by the Americans, for Marie, and for a Filipino lieutenant
+and a corporal, both of whom were also good shots.
+
+Geronemo had instructed them that Marie was to have the first three
+shots at the general, in case he appeared on the scene of battle. If
+she failed to hit him, the lieutenant was then to try it. After he
+had taken three shots, if he, too, failed, the corporal was to be
+given a chance.
+
+The next morning, December 19, the American line of battle came out
+of the woods on the opposite side of the valley, ready to charge on
+the Filipinos' position. The morning was bright and clear, so that
+General Lawton, with his tall figure, resplendent uniform and large
+white helmet, could easily be discerned by the entire Filipino command.
+
+"I'll fix him," whispered Marie, "just wait till the firing begins,
+so that I can shoot without attracting attention to our position."
+
+In a moment, the Filipinos opened fire on the Americans all along
+the line. The latter sought cover. General Lawton remained erect. He
+made an ideal target. Marie took careful aim. "Bang!" went her rifle,
+and at that very moment this peerless leader of men, this hero of
+several wars, was shot through the heart and fell dead in the arms
+of his aide. His only words were, "I'm shot."
+
+"See that! What did I tell you?" snapped out Marie, "I told you I'd
+get him! Now for my dinero." (money).
+
+The Americans were so angered because of the sudden death of their
+beloved commander that they made a mad rush forward, without orders,
+and swept the Filipino army from the field.
+
+Marie returned to Manila where she claimed the reward for having shot
+the general. The lieutenant who was with her claimed that he did it,
+and by promising half of the bounty to the corporal for swearing to
+the lie, he proved it. Meager reports of the affair state that only
+$7000 of the money was actually paid over. Like Aguinaldo who crept
+into a cave northwest of Manila and sold out his country during the
+insurrection of 1896, and then could not collect his fee, so Marie,
+too, found herself deprived of the compensation for her bloody deed.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+NORTH-BOUND
+
+
+The controversy over the distribution of the fund in Manila for the
+death in any form of General Lawton permitted the unholy scheme to
+simmer its way into publicity. The United States authorities employed
+secret detectives to investigate the matter and if possible to locate
+the persons who claimed to be responsible for the act. Marie soon
+found herself under surveillance and she quickly left the city.
+
+Making her way north on horse back along the same route she had taken
+when on her way to Baler about a year before, she came to the city
+of San Miguel where one of the hardest battles of the war had been
+fought. The troops engaged in this fight had become so disorganized
+that all formation by regiments, companies, etc., had been broken
+up. Unfortunately, one of the Americans' dead privates could not be
+identified. He was buried where he fell, and a board tombstone was
+placed at the head of his grave, on which was carved this lonely word,
+
+
+                            "UNKNOWN".
+
+
+As Marie passed over the old field, she saw this grave and read the
+solemn word on its headstone. "Alas!" she muttered, "I wonder if the
+same sad fate will some day overtake me."
+
+The body of this "unknown" soldier was exhumed by the government a few
+months later and brought back to the United States for burial. Upon
+its arrival the following pathetic poem appeared in "Leslie's Weekly";
+
+
+                JUST AN "UNKNOWN"
+
+                After the fight was over,
+                  They found him stark and dead,
+                Where all the bamboo thicket
+                  Was splashed and stained and red.
+                No name was missed at roll call,
+                  Not one among them knew
+                The slender, boyish figure
+                  Arrayed in army blue.
+
+                Among our fallen soldiers
+                  They brought him o'er the deep,
+                And with the nation's heroes
+                  They laid him down to sleep.
+                A starry flag above him,
+                  And on the simple stone
+                That marked his final bivouac,
+                  The single word, "Unknown."
+
+                Perchance a mother watches,
+                  Her eyes with weeping dim,
+                Or sweetheart waits the postman
+                  In vain for news of him.
+                While snow of winter freezes,
+                  And April violets thrust
+                Sweet blossoms through the grasses
+                  Above his nameless dust.
+
+                But when the last great trumpet
+                  Shall sound the reveille,
+                And all the blue battalions
+                  March up from land and sea,
+                He shall awake to glory--
+                  Who sleeps unknown to fame,
+                And with Columbia's bravest
+                  Will answer to his name.
+
+
+Her personal safety demanded that she continue her journey northward,
+without delay; also her inclination to rejoin Aguinaldo and his
+troops--although his exact whereabouts were unknown--invited her in
+this direction.
+
+At San Isidro, from which place Aguinaldo had been driven, she
+saw some American soldiers administering the water cure to some
+Filipinos in order to make them reveal the whereabouts of their wily
+general. Marie was angry. She yearned to shoot, but she was no longer
+on the aggressive; she was now a fugitive from justice. At this
+place she inspected the old Filipino prison and on its walls found
+the names of Gilmore and his party, whom she had helped to capture at
+Baler, who had been imprisoned there, and who were still alive when
+Aguinaldo was driven from the city of San Isidro by the approach of
+the Americans. She determined to take her revenge on them for this
+water cure punishment, if she ever found them. But the opportunity
+never came. So journeying on toward the northern part of Luzon she had
+many experiences, and she came in contact with tribes whom she had
+never seen before and whose dialect was foreign to her. Many things
+combined to retard her progress. Often she grew very weary and would
+have turned back, except for fear.
+
+Following up the valley of the Pampanga river and thence on northward
+along the Barat, she passed through the province of Nueva Ecija,
+crossed the Caraballo mountains which form its northern boundary,
+and then entered the province of Nueva Vizcaya, where she came upon
+the head-waters of the Rio Magat river.
+
+In crossing the Caraballo mountains she made her way through a deep
+gorge at night. It was now about the middle of February. A full moon
+shone at its best. The weather was ideal. Journeying was abnormally
+pleasant. Under favorable conditions, during times of peace, the trip
+she was taking would have been a delightful outing. Just now things
+were different. Small garrisons of American soldiers had crowded
+forward and were occupying the largest cities along her route. As yet
+she had not gotten beyond them. "A guilty conscience needs no accuser";
+everywhere that she went she imagined herself to be under suspicion.
+
+Far up in the Caraballos she came across a little mountain torrent
+which leaped down over the mountain side from one rocky ledge to
+another at quite regular intervals in a series of waterfalls until it
+beat itself into a turbulent spray in the bed of the chasm below. The
+laughing moon filtered its beaming rays through the thin sheet of
+shimmering water as it danced down its course from precipice to
+precipice, and seemingly converted it into a great silvery stair-way
+connecting earth with heaven. Marie's heart throbbed with emotion. The
+dashing of the falling water on the rocks below in the bed of the canon
+made a hollow sound as its echoes reverberated through the gorge above.
+
+A half mile farther up, the valley widened somewhat; and finding here
+some grass for her pony to forage on, she stopped for the night. The
+flimsy saddle was removed from her horse and converted into a crude
+pillow, in true cowboy style. Marie was uneasy. This was the first
+night in all her adventures that she had been absolutely alone,
+separated from both friends and foes, with no house to shelter her
+weary head, with the cloudless canopy of the silent heavens arched
+above her, the silvery moonbeams dancing in her face, and with
+no voice, save the echoes of her own, to answer back the whispers
+of night.
+
+It is often only in such a silent nook as this, with no one present
+but God and self, that humanity asserts itself and the tenderest
+portions of the human soul become paramount and give rise to
+sacred thoughts. Even the savage cannot escape it, for he, too,
+feels his responsibility to something outside of self. No doubt the
+self-conscious criminal would be the most susceptible to it.
+
+What a night for Marie! Solitude gave rise to fear; fear, to conscious
+criminality; a sense of wrong-doing, to grief. Would morning never
+come? Every time she fell into a doze her sleep was disturbed by dreams
+of the past. Recollections of her dying benefactor in the woods by
+the San Mateo river, of Gilmore's comrades bleeding by his side, and
+of Lawton in the arms of his aide, filled her soul with remorse and
+suggested to her with an unspeakable vividness that in all probability
+she would pay the penalty on both sides of the grave. Awakening from
+one awful dream, she would, after listening to the stillness of the
+night for a time, lapse into another. Again she would suddenly awake
+and begin to fumble her rosary and repeat selections from a Catholic
+prayer book. Would she dare to turn back? Behind her was certain death;
+before her, the possibility of life. She resolved to go on.
+
+The night whiled away. Her pony ate his fill and lay down to
+rest. Beaded dew drops collected themselves in close proximity upon
+the grasses and foliage about her feet. The cool mountain air from
+without and fear from within caused her to shiver a great deal. Day
+finally came; Marie rode on.
+
+Following the Magat river she finally reached the city of Bayombong
+with a population of 20,000 people. Here she learned from the natives
+that Aguinaldo and a loyal remnant of his appointed congress had
+passed through the city ahead of her, en route northward.
+
+At Bayombong she was advised to follow down the Magat river for
+twenty miles, then to bear to the northeast along the pathway made by
+Aguinaldo and his followers in their recent retreat. This she did,
+crossing another range of mountains near Fort Del Pilar, which had
+been erected by the Filipinos to circumvent as well as to prevent the
+progress of the Americans, should they attempt to follow them. On
+the farther side of this slope she came upon the headwaters of the
+Rio Grande de Cagayan river, which she followed on to the north for
+several weeks, enjoying the hospitality of the natives along the
+course, until at last she came upon the beautiful city of Ilagan at
+the confluence of the Cagayan and Pinacanalan rivers.
+
+It was now late in April. Marie was tired and needed rest. At Ilagan
+she was cordially received by the curious natives who were eager to
+learn some news concerning the war which was being conducted several
+hundred miles further south. Marie grew cheerful. There were no
+Americans in the city, and nobody knew of any within the valley. She
+felt that at last she had successfully eluded her supposed pursuers and
+that she was safe. Ilagan is the capital of Isabella province. It has
+a population of approximately 60,000 people. Marie's natural ability,
+information gathered in the school of experience, knowledge of the
+details of the war, and her willingness to talk (quite a number at
+Ilagan could speak Spanish) made of her a sort of responsive idol
+for the entire populace.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+CROSSING THE SIERRA MADRES.
+
+
+She remained at Ilagan until the middle of June, when it began to be
+rumored that the Americans were preparing to invade the Cagayan valley,
+not only soldiers from the south but with the "mosquito fleet" coming
+up the river from its mouth at the extreme northern end of the island
+of Luzon. Nobody in the city seemed to know just where Aguinaldo had
+gone. Part of his advance guard had arrived in the city some three
+months before, but he had not come, and his soldiers had soon departed
+for the southeast, following the valley of the Pinacanalan river.
+
+Tired of her surroundings and impatient to join Aguinaldo, Marie
+departed by the same route that his soldiers had taken. From an
+old native living all alone in a bamboo shack on the bank of the Rio
+Masagan river, which empties into the Pinacanalan about eighteen miles
+southeast of Ilagan, she learned that Aguinaldo and his troops had
+started up the valley of the Masagan. This stream rises high up near
+the summit of the Sierra Madre mountains which parallel the eastern
+coast of northern Luzon for nearly five hundred miles, and are inland
+from the coast from ten to thirty miles.
+
+Marie had with her three trusted natives from Ilagan. She did not want
+to spend another night alone in the mountains. After proceeding up
+the Masagan for thirty-five miles to a place where its valley narrows
+itself to a gorge, its bed was so strewn with huge boulders that it
+became impossible to travel any longer on horseback; therefore, one
+of the natives was sent back with the horses, and Marie and the two
+others continued the ascent on foot, taking with them such equipment
+and provisions as they could conveniently carry.
+
+After many hardships they succeeded in crossing the range in safety
+and soon found themselves descending the other side. A Filipino
+scouting party was met at the evening of the first day's tramp down
+the Pacific slope. They were well supplied with food--thing Marie and
+her companions greatly needed. From them it was learned that Aguinaldo
+and his body guard and quite a complement of Filipino soldiers were
+secreted at the little town of Palanan on a small stream by the same
+name, about ten miles back from the coast and lying directly east
+of them on the journey which they were pursuing. This party escorted
+them to Filipino headquarters, which they reached July 10, 1900.
+
+Marie was cordially welcomed by Aguinaldo, who restored her to a
+position on his staff and secured from her the identical information
+which he desired relative to the movement of the American troops, and
+the very information, strange to say, which led to his own discovery
+and capture by General Funston of the American forces in March of
+the following year.
+
+Aguinaldo learned from Marie that from the Filipinos' standpoint, the
+war around Manila had been a dismal failure. He decided, therefore,
+to send one of his trusted generals south by practically the same
+route over which Marie had come, with information to the Filipino
+troops east and south of Manila to move all their available forces
+north with the quickest possible despatch and to place them under his
+immediate command so that he might not only render himself immune from
+capture, but take the initiative and oppose the American campaign in
+the valley of the Cagayan river.
+
+In December, 1900, about three months before his capture by General
+Funston, Aguinaldo, having learned that the Americans were making their
+way in great numbers into the valley of the Cagayan, asked Marie to
+take up duty as a spy again; to recross the Sierra Madre mountains;
+visit the American lines; ascertain their number of soldiers on duty
+in the valley on the opposite side of the mountains and then to bring
+this information to him, so that when reinforcements should arrive
+he would know better how to undertake the campaign.
+
+To this, Marie willingly assented, but she insisted that she could
+not make the trip alone over the rugged Sierra Madre mountains;
+that she had nearly famished crossing them the first time. Aguinaldo
+therefor fitted out a little expedition consisting of eight Filipinos,
+in addition to Marie, and a pack-train of fourteen ponies to accompany
+her over the divide. Nine of the animals were for riding purposes;
+the other five were to pack the supplies,--three of them for the
+outward trip, two for the incoming. In addition to the rice which
+they took along, they were instructed to forage as much as possible.
+
+On December 9, the party started out on their perilous undertaking. A
+point far up on the mountain slope, near a refreshing mineral spring,
+having been reached on December 17, the party halted and established
+a sub-base for their return trip. It was evident to them that they
+had struck the wrong trail and were going to be compelled to send
+Marie back through a different gorge from the one by which she and
+her associates had come over a few months before.
+
+Here the party divided into two relays--one to accompany Marie close
+to the top of the mountains, the other to remain where it was until
+her guides returned. At this temporary base three Filipinos and two
+pack-horses were left. The Filipinos thus left behind were instructed
+to hunt and trap all they could till their comrades returned.
+
+The on-going squad, consisting of Marie and five native soldiers, took
+with them their six riding ponies and three of the pack-horses. They
+departed from their comrades early in the morning, December 18. By
+night of the second day they had gotten so near the crest they could
+plainly discern that in one long march Marie could cross the divide
+and get a safe distance down the slope on the opposite side. Coming to
+an old stone church they dismounted and established themselves for the
+night. It was December 19,--the anniversary of Lawton's death. Marie
+remarked about it.
+
+This old church had partly fallen down. Vines and mosses had so
+interlaced themselves in climbing over its rocky walls and across its
+openings that they had to be cut away by the unwelcome intruders before
+they could gain an entrance. The stone cross on the front gable was
+still in place; but the old mahogany door had long since been torn
+from its hinges by the mountain storms, and it lay in a state of
+decay on the ground. An earthquake had destroyed part of the roof,
+and had caused the west wall to become inclined and to crumble.
+
+Within, one end of the old altar was still found to be intact. The
+priest's pulpit chair had become ivy-mantled, and one handle had rotted
+from its fastenings and had fallen to the floor. Statues of the Saints
+had pitched from their moorings in the alcoves along the walls and were
+lying face-downward or standing on their heads amid the debris below.
+
+What hands had built this old church, none could tell. It seemed
+certain that no human being had entered it for over a century. The
+mountain tribes who had lifted into place the huge chalk stones
+that composed its massive walls, under the devout leadership of some
+pious monk, for a place of worship, had long since perished from the
+earth. The mountain game which rendered possible their habitation in
+this altitude had vanished. Everything and everybody had evidently
+given way before some fierce invasion of one of their southern tribes.
+
+Marie was busy cleaning off the trash from the massive rock that lay
+at the entrance to the door-way. "1765," said she; "come, see the
+date chiseled in the rock! I wonder what has become of the tribe that
+built it?"
+
+A soldier who had made his entrance by one of the window openings,
+was busily engaged in prying up a huge flat stone just back of the
+altar. He had it loosened; he called for help to remove it. When the
+stone had been overturned and had fallen back onto its aged neighbors,
+some soft damp earth beneath it was slowly scraped away.
+
+"Listen!" said the native who on bended knees was doing the
+sacrilegious work, "Did you hear that grating noise?"
+
+He scraped again with his bolo turned edgewise, and gripping the back
+of it firmly with both hands. "Do you hear it?" said he. "It's here!"
+
+In a few minutes a metallic box was pried out of the earth wherein
+it had lain unmolested for many years.
+
+"Can you read the inscription on it?" asked Marie.
+
+Carefully the sediment and rust shales were removed. The grooves in
+the letters and figures of the inscription were carefully cleaned
+out with a knife. It read
+
+
+                             FATHER
+                            JUADANEZ
+                              1768.
+
+
+"The old father has been dead a long time," said the fellow who was
+doing the details of the work.
+
+"I wonder," said Marie, "if we really ought to disturb his bones."
+
+"Do you suppose they put any valuables in the little chest when they
+sealed it up?" asked another.
+
+"It has always been customary to put in the sacred urn," said Marie.
+
+"Cut it open!" commanded a corporal.
+
+"I can't," said the robber; "we'll have to build a fire and melt
+it open."
+
+This they did; and in it they found the dust of his bones and a number
+of valuables including the Patricia's gold-lined cup which Marie took
+and hung on her belt.
+
+That night a terrible storm swept over the mountains. Marie and her
+companions crept into the old church for refuge. The ponies had been
+given some rice and then set free to forage as best they could. They
+were stampeded by the violence of the wind and rain.
+
+The morning broke cool and clear. Everybody was astir at day-break. The
+ponies were gone, but plenty of rice remained. Marie soon saw a way
+out of the difficulty. She left three of her men at the old church to
+await the return of the two who were to accompany her until she reached
+some plan for speedy descent on the opposite side of the mountains.
+
+The advance party started out early on foot, taking with them such
+a supply of rice and bananas as they could carry. Only three miles
+farther up they entered a canon whose rocky walls, at places almost
+perpendicular and seeming to form pillars for the sky, were so close
+together at their base that it would have been impossible to have used
+the ponies for travel, even though they had not retreated in the storm.
+
+Good progress was made, and by sun-down, December 20, they had reached
+the upper rivulets of what afterwards proved to be the north fork of
+the Rio Masagan, instead of the south fork which she had previously
+followed. The beautiful valleys below them were plainly visible as
+the sun sank to rest over the distant hills. A small native village
+could be seen on the bank of the stream a few miles ahead. The party
+bivouacked for the night.
+
+Early the next morning, after a light lunch of cold rice, Marie was
+off on her important mission.
+
+Her two escorts made their way back to the old church, where after
+another night's rest, the five undertook their return journey to
+the sub-base at the spring far down the mountain side. When they
+reached this camp they found their ponies all returned to it; and
+their comrades, thinking they had all been captured or slain by the
+Americans, were hastily preparing to retreat. The entire party, except
+Marie, got back to Aguinaldo's camp at Palanan, on Christmas Day.
+
+Marie, was therefore, left to arrange for her own return, after her
+spy work had been completed. She contemplated securing help from
+the natives at Ilagan, among whom she had previously lived for a
+few months.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+COMPENSATION
+
+
+On the evening of December 24, 1900,--one of those dark nights in
+the Philippines when the air seems so dense that you can almost
+take hold of it with your hands--when the heavy clouds blanket the
+earth so closely that the terrible thunders seem to shake the earth
+in its orbit, with the deep-toned diapason of their melody--when
+the lightening bugs flutter from twig to twig, revealing their
+lanterned wings--when the human heart beats with a conscious thump
+in anticipation of something awful--when those who are out alone
+whistle to give themselves courage--when the zigzag openings rent
+through the clouds by the vicious lightning flashes almost reveal
+Eternity;--Christmas Eve, that sacred occasion which we all celebrate
+and shall continue to celebrate till the end of time, to commemorate
+the birth of our Christ,--a sharp-eyed, dare-devil Filipino crept
+slowly out of the city of Ilagan along a foot-path toward the
+Americans' camp about a mile north of that city.
+
+When so near to the Americans that their out-posts were plainly visible
+during the flashes of lightning, the Filipino spy crept into a bamboo
+thicket not over fifty feet from an American sentry. After lying there
+for a half hour, waiting for the storm to come, the native grew a
+trifle bolder and arose to his knees. That moment the sharp eyes of
+the sentry caught him.
+
+"Corporal of the Guard!" called the sentry in a loud voice.
+
+The corporal, being suspicious that something unusual was taking place,
+in responding to the call took with him two armed privates.
+
+Approaching the sentry, with light steps and in a crouching attitude,
+the corporal said in a heavy whisper, "What's the matter, Jack?"
+
+The sentry was standing with gun in hand, loaded, cocked, and with
+bayonet fixed. Keeping his eye centered on the exact spot where he had
+last seen the slowly gravitating figure before him, the guard said
+in an undertone that denoted grave alarm, "Do you see that thicket
+just to the left of that big mango tree?"
+
+"Yes;" said the corporal in a whisper, "What's the trouble?"
+
+"There's a man in there," said the sentry. "I saw him quite plainly at
+first--and I think he's got a gun in his hand. You better watch out,
+boys. He's still there."
+
+The corporal and the two privates fixed the bayonets on their
+Krag-Jorgensons, filled the magazines, slipped a shell into the
+barrel of each rifle, cocked them, crouched close to the ground,
+some ten feet apart, and began to move forward, a step at a time,
+between the flashes of lightening. Each time it would flash, they
+would peer into the thicket. Each step brought them nearer.
+
+"There he lies!," said one of the privates in a quick out-spoken voice.
+
+"Amigo," (a friend) said the stretched-out form, as three guns were
+raised in unison with the anxious muzzles pointing directly at him.
+
+"Este no quere combate" (you don't desire to fight), said the corporal,
+in crude Spanish.
+
+"Mucho amigo" (very friendly), came the reply.
+
+"Vamose aque!" (come here), commanded the corporal.
+
+With his eyes fixed in theirs, the Filipino raised himself slowly up
+and came toward the three Americans who stood but twelve feet away.
+
+"Take him by the arms," said the corporal to the two privates who were
+with him, "while I look behind that rice-dyke to see if he had a gun."
+
+"Here's what the rascal was up to," said the corporal, holding a
+Mauser above his head. "Good thing you saw him when you did, Jack."
+
+The storm was coming nearer; the first gust of wind had just struck
+them. It blew back the Filipino's little checkered frock. The corporal
+saw a glitter.
+
+"Watch out! boys, he's got a machete under his coat," said the
+corporal.
+
+He was searched for more weapons and then marched inside the American
+lines and taken directly to headquarters. A drum-head court was
+convened at once and the prisoner led in.
+
+With hands clinched, muscles taut, eyes piercing at the court, he
+listened to the reading of the charge:
+
+"Caught acting as a spy for the enemy in violation of the Articles
+of War; armed, with intent to take the life of an American sentry
+on guard!"
+
+After the testimony had been taken, the prisoner was given a chance
+to speak, but he absolutely refused to do so, even though addressed
+in several different languages and dialects.
+
+"He spoke Spanish to us as we captured him," interjected the corporal.
+
+"GUILTY!"
+
+said the lieutenant-colonel who was presiding, in a firm military
+tone. "The court fixes the penalty at death, and sentences the prisoner
+to be shot at sun-rise."
+
+"Remove him, Sergeant, and detail a firing squad to execute the order
+of the court!"
+
+As the prisoner was led away, the lieutenant-colonel dropped his
+chin in the palms of his hands as he rested his elbows on his knees,
+and muttered in a semi-regretful way: "I hate to do it; but in the
+past we have always been so chicken-hearted about punishing these
+blood-thirsty natives that they have now come to regard our kindness
+as cowardice. I can't help but feel that it will bring the war to a
+close quicker if we deal with them hereafter with a good firm hand."
+
+"I wonder what province the young fellow came from," said a major
+who was sitting near.
+
+"I really don't know," replied the lieutenant-colonel: "his face shows
+him to be a Tagalo. Certain it is that he didn't come from Isabella
+province in which we are now campaigning. I wouldn't be surprised if
+Aguinaldo were near here and if he had sent this young dare-devil to
+cut down our sentry, so as to make an attack upon us tonight during
+the storm."
+
+Toward morning the storm subsided. At day-break a comparatively shallow
+grave was hastily dug near the edge of a little bamboo thicket on
+a slightly elevated piece of ground. As the flickering rays of the
+tropical sun began to shoot above the pale, ashen-gray hue of the
+eastern horizon, the prisoner was led to the foot of his prospective
+tomb. The firing squad took its place in line.
+
+The guns had been carefully loaded in advance for their deadly work;
+all but one contained blank cartridges. As usual, after loading, the
+guns were intermixed, so that no man might know which one contained
+the deadly bullet.
+
+"Ready!" commanded the sergeant who had charge of the squad,--the
+corporal having taken his usual place in line with his men.
+
+"Click," went the hammers of the rifles in unison, as they were
+brought to a full cock.
+
+"Aim!" came the next command in a firmer tone. The soldiers brought
+their rifles to their shoulders. Every barrel was pointed at the
+chest of the prisoner, who now for the first time, began to tremble
+and turn a sickly yellow.
+
+"Fire!" commanded the sergeant.
+
+"Bang!" went the united roar of the guns; and as the light powder smoke
+cleared away and the echoes reverberated through the woods of northern
+Luzon, the firing squad stepped forward to view their heroic dead.
+
+A private jumped into the grave and turned the corpse over onto
+its back.
+
+That night Frank W. Pugh, of the regular army, a member of this
+unfortunate firing squad, who died later at Fort Worth, Texas, of
+fever contracted in the Philippines, sitting in his little dog-tent,
+meditating, wrote in his diary, which is now preserved in the archives
+at Washington with other relics of the war, the following appropriate
+poem:
+
+
+                A CHRISTMAS COURT-MARTIAL
+
+                "The night was dark and threatening rain,
+                  No stars were in the sky;
+                We caught him hiding in the pines--
+                  A Filipino spy.
+                A slender youth with coal black eyes,
+                  Brim full of frightened tears;
+                We turned him over to the guard,
+                  I fear with callous jeers.
+
+                Next morning it was Christmas day,
+                  The sun was shining hot,
+                A drum-head court had said, "The spy,
+                  Is sentenced to be shot."
+                Erect before the officers,
+                  He still disdained to speak,
+                Although a single crystal drop,
+                  Empearled his olive cheek.
+
+                Upon a long and hurried march,
+                  In light array, you see,
+                We could not take the boy along,
+                  So stood him near a tree;
+                Told off the little firing squad,
+                  And ordered it in line.
+                One gun was loaded in the lot--
+                  I hope it was not mine.
+
+                Birds in the branches overhead
+                  Sang softly in the heat.
+                The grave, a trench of steaming sand,
+                  Gaped yellow at his feet;
+                He faced us with a dauntless air,
+                  Although his lips were white;--
+                Our grim old Sergeant turned away,
+                  He could not stand the sight.
+
+                A flash, a roar, a cloud of smoke,
+                  And headlong to the ground
+                He fell face downward in the grave,
+                  And died without a sound.
+                We turned him over on his back,
+                  And DEATH the TRUTH confessed,
+                For through his open jacket peeped
+                  A Woman's tender breast."
+
+
+
+Marie Sampalit had earned her doom. After her grave had been filled,
+the soldier boys placed at its head a cartridge-box lid on which they
+inscribed the pitiful word,
+
+                            "UNKNOWN."
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Woman with a Stone Heart, by 
+Oscar William Coursey
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WOMAN WITH A STONE HEART ***
+
+***** This file should be named 24705-8.txt or 24705-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/7/0/24705/
+
+Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net/ (This book was
+produced from scanned images of public domain material
+from the Google Print project.)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/old/20080227-24705-8.zip b/old/20080227-24705-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f27f1af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/20080227-24705-8.zip
diff --git a/old/20080227-24705-h.zip b/old/20080227-24705-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d42ee1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/20080227-24705-h.zip
diff --git a/old/20080227-24705.txt b/old/20080227-24705.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..95c8c68
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/20080227-24705.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3098 @@
+Project Gutenberg's The Woman with a Stone Heart, by Oscar William Coursey
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Woman with a Stone Heart
+       A Romance of the Philippine War
+
+Author: Oscar William Coursey
+
+Release Date: February 27, 2008 [EBook #24705]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WOMAN WITH A STONE HEART ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net/ (This book was
+produced from scanned images of public domain material
+from the Google Print project.)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                  The Woman with a Stone Heart
+
+                A Romance of the Philippine War.
+
+                               By
+
+                  O. W. Coursey, (U. S. Vols.)
+
+                           Author of
+
+       "History and Geography of the Philippine Islands."
+                  "Who's Who In South Dakota."
+                 "Biography of General Beadle."
+                      "School Law Digest."
+
+
+
+
+        All of these books are published and for sale by
+                  THE EDUCATOR SUPPLY COMPANY
+                     Mitchell, South Dakota
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                        Copyrighted 1914
+
+                        By O. W. Coursey
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+THE WOMAN WITH A STONE HEART
+
+
+INTRODUCTION
+
+
+To those whose love of adventure would cause them to plunge head-long
+into an abyss of vain glory, hoping at life's sunset to reap a
+harvest contrary to the seed that were sown, let me suggest that
+you pause first to read the story of "The Woman With a Stone Heart,"
+Marie Sampalit, dare-devil of the Philippines.
+
+Perhaps we might profitably meditate for a few moments on the musings
+of Whittier:
+
+
+            "The tissue of the life to be
+            We weave in colors all our own,
+            And in the field of destiny
+            We'll reap as we have sown."
+
+                                    --The Author.
+
+
+
+
+
+DEDICATION
+
+
+To Her, who, as a bride of only eighteen months, stood broken-hearted
+on the depot platform and bade me a tearful farewell as our train of
+soldier boys started to war; who later, while I was Ten Thousand miles
+away from home on soldier duty in the Philippine Islands, became a
+Mother; and who, unfortunately, three months thereafter, was called
+upon to lay our first-born, Oliver D. Coursey, into his snow-lined
+baby tomb amid the bleak silence of a cold winter's night, with no
+strong arm to bear her up in those awful hours of anguish and despair,
+
+
+My Soldier Wife, Julia,
+
+this book is most affectionately dedicated.
+
+
+                "Only a baby's grave,
+                    Yet often we go and sit
+                By the little stone,
+                And thank God to own,
+                    We are nearer heaven for it."
+
+                                        --O. W. Coursey.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+
+                                               Page
+
+            Marie Sampalit                       10
+            Region Around Manila Bay             29
+            Admiral Dewey                        39
+            Aguinaldo                            61
+            Marie, Her Mother, etc               82
+            Filipinos at Breakfast              100
+            End of the Boat-Battle              113
+            The Rescue                          126
+            Floating Down The Rapids            129
+            General Lawton and Staff            139
+
+
+
+
+
+TABLE OF CONTENTS
+
+
+
+        Chapters:                             Page
+
+        I.      Love Defeated                     9
+        II.     First Shot of A New War          25
+        III.    Avenged Her Lover's Death        41
+        IV.     The Interval                     57
+        V.      Filipino Uprising                69
+        VI.     As A Spy                         81
+        VII.    Off For Baler                    93
+        VIII.   The Gilmore Incident            105
+        IX.     The American Prisoners          113
+        X.      Death of General Lawton         131
+        XI.     North-bound                     141
+        XII.    Crossing the Sierra Madres      153
+        XIII.   Compensation                    167
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+LOVE DEFEATED
+
+
+Marie Sampalit and her fiancee, Rolando Dimiguez, were walking
+arm-in-arm along the sandy beach of Manila bay, just opposite old
+Fort Malate, talking of their wedding day which had been postponed
+because of the Filipino insurrection which was in progress.
+
+The tide was out. A long waved line of sea-shells and drift-wood
+marked the place to which it had risen the last time before it began
+to recede. They were unconsciously following this line of ocean
+debris. Occasionally Marie would stop to pick up a spotted shell
+which was more pretty than the rest. Finally, when they had gotten
+as far north as the semi-circular drive-way which extends around
+the southern and eastern sides of the walled-city, or Old Manila,
+as it is called, and had begun to veer toward it, Marie looked back
+and repeated a beautiful memory gem taught to her by a good friar
+when she was a pupil in one of the parochial schools of Manila:
+
+
+            "E'en as the rise of the tide is told,
+                By drift-wood on the beach,
+            So can our pen mark on the page
+                How high our thoughts can reach."
+
+
+They turned directly east until they reached the low stone-wall that
+prevents Manila bay from overflowing the city during the periods
+of high tides. Dimiguez helped Marie to step upon it; then they
+strolled eastward past the large stake which marked the place where
+the Spaniards had shot Dr. Jose Rizal, the brainiest patriot ever
+produced by the Malay race.
+
+When they came to the spot, Marie stopped and told Dimiguez how she
+had watched the shooting when it took place, and how bravely Rizal
+had met his fate.
+
+"If it hadn't been for this outrage committed by the Spaniards,"
+remarked Dimiguez, "this insurrection would not have lasted these two
+years, and we would have been married before now; but our people are
+determined to seek revenge for his death."
+
+Then they started on, changed their course to the northward, entered
+the walled-city by the south gate, walked past the old Spanish arsenal,
+and then passed out of the walled-city by the north gate. Here they
+crossed the Pasig river on the old "Bridge of Spain" (the large
+stone bridge near the mouth of the river, built over 300 years ago)
+and entered the Escolta, the main business street of Manila. After
+making their way slowly up the Escolta they meandered along San Miguel
+street until they finally turned and walked a short distance down a
+side street to a typical native shack, built of bamboo and thatched
+with Nipa palms, happily tucked away beneath the overhanging limbs
+of a large mango tree in a spacious yard,--the home of the Sampalits.
+
+Here Marie had been born just seventeen years before; in fact the next
+day, April 7, would be her seventeenth birthday. When she was born,
+her father instituted one of the accustomed Filipino dances which last
+from three to five days and nights, and at its conclusion she had been
+christened "Maria," subsequently changed by force of habit to "Marie."
+
+Late that evening, while they were seated side-by-side on a bamboo
+bench beside of her home, tapping the toes of their wooden-soled
+slippers on the hard ground, and indulging in a wandering lovers'
+conversation, Marie said to him (calling him affectionately by his
+first name), "Rolando, when did you first decide to postpone our
+wedding day?"
+
+"Well, I'll tell you how it was," answered he, meditatingly. "The
+thought of serving my country had been lingering on my mind all
+last summer--in fact, ever since the insurrection first broke out in
+the spring of 1896. You know I intended coming down to see you last
+Christmas, but I couldn't get away. That night I walked the floor
+all night in our home at Malolos, debating in my mind whether we
+had better get married in March, as we had planned, or if it would
+not be wiser and more manly for me to go to war, take chances on
+getting back alive and postpone our wedding day until after the war
+is over. Toward morning, I decided that it was my duty to become a
+soldier; so I called my father and mother, got an early breakfast,
+bade them goodby and started for Malabon, which was Aguinaldo's
+headquarters, and enlisted. He was glad to see me. You know, he and
+I attended school together for one year at Hongkong. Well, Aguinaldo
+at once commissioned me a spy and assigned me to very important duty."
+
+"My God!" interrupted Marie, "you are not on that duty now, are you,
+Rolando?"
+
+Dimiguez arose. "Marie," said he firmly, "I must be off."
+
+"But won't you tell me where you are going and what task lies before
+you?" pleaded Marie, as she threw both arms about his neck and began to
+sob, "I'll never tell a living soul, so help me God, but I must know!"
+
+"A spy never tells his plans to anyone, Marie," said Dimiguez
+slowly. "He takes his orders from his chief, plays his part; and
+if he gets caught, he refuses to speak and dies without a murmur,
+like a man. Good night, Marie, I must be off; duty lies before me."
+
+Marie cried herself to sleep.
+
+The next morning she started down town, as usual, for the market place,
+with her bamboo basket filled with bananas, sitting on her head,
+and a cigarette in her mouth. She had only gone a block when she met
+a neighbor girl, one of her chums of equal years to her own, who was
+a chamber-maid in the German consul's home on San Miguel Street.
+
+Her friend looked excited. "Have you heard the awful news, Marie?" said
+she.
+
+"No!" exclaimed Marie, "What is it?"
+
+"Why, Dimiguez was caught last night by Spanish guards inside the
+yard of the governor-general's summer palace up on the Malacanan,
+just as he was slipping out of the palace itself. How he got in there,
+nobody knows."
+
+Marie dropped her basket. "Heavens!" gasped she, "Did he do anything
+wrong?"
+
+"They found in his pocket diagrams of the interior of the palace,
+showing the entries to it, the room where the governor-general sleeps,
+and many other things; also your picture. See here! the morning paper
+gives a full account of it."
+
+Marie glanced at the head lines and then started on a vigorous run for
+the building in which the Spanish military court was sitting. Rushing
+in, past an armed guard, she began to plead for her lover's life. But
+he had already been tried, convicted and sentenced to death by
+strangulation in the old chute at Cavite. Dimiguez never moved a
+muscle when he saw Marie. Armed guards forced her abruptly out of
+the building and ordered her to leave.
+
+Inside of two hours, on the same day, April 7, the anniversary of
+Marie's birth, he was taken to the little town of Cavite, seven miles
+southwest of Manila, and was there placed in the lower end of a long
+chute built out into Manila Bay. This chute was just wide enough for
+a man to enter. Its sides, top and bottom were all built of heavy
+planks. The side planks lacked a few inches of connecting with the
+top, although of course the side posts ran clear up and the top was
+firmly bolted to them. The entrance to it was well elevated near the
+docks. The lower end protruded into the bay, so that it was visible
+about eighteen inches above the water during the period of low tide,
+and submerged several feet during high tide.
+
+Tides come in slowly at Cavite, each succeeding wave rising but a
+trifle higher than the others, until the usual height is reached. Thus,
+a prisoner placed in this chute, forced to the lower end and then
+fastened securely during low tide, can look out over the side planks
+at the hideous spectators, watch the tide as it begins to rise and
+see slow death approaching. It was in this chute that Marie's lover
+met his death.
+
+Marie saw the launch that carried him away as it left Manila. She
+rushed down to the Pasig river, loosened her little boat from the
+tree to which it was tied, jumped in, seized the oars and started in
+pursuit. The launch on which he was being carried had for its power
+a gasoline engine, and, of course, it soon left her far behind. When
+she first started, the swells caused by the launch rocked her little
+canoe quite roughly and impeded her progress. As she approached the
+mouth of the river, passed the monument of Magellan and came between
+the walled-city on the southern bank and the docks on the northern
+bank, a crowd of excited natives thronged the shore, and many of them
+recognized her. She heard some one cry out, "Vive Marie!" With might
+and main she strove forward.
+
+The launch made its seven-mile run to Cavite; the victim was placed
+in the chute; the tide had risen to the danger line; her lover,
+with his head thrown back, had just begun to gurgle the salt water,
+when Marie, in frantic agony, almost exhausted, rowed around the
+lower end of the chute and came near enough to the dying hero to
+be recognized by him. Straining ever muscle to keep his head above
+the water a second longer, he cried out in chocking tones that were
+interrupted by the merciless sea which was rapidly filling his mouth,
+"Goodby, Marie, God bless you. Avenge my death!"
+
+Hush! At this moment another tidal wave engulfed the apex of the
+chute. Not a sound could be heard save the slight flapping of the
+waves against the pier, and the dismal chant of three priests, who
+stood on the shore near by, and who had not been permitted to attend
+the young spy before his death. Marie trembled; she dropped the oars;
+her eyes fell; for a moment it seemed that her young heart stood still:
+then her face flushed; the tears stopped flowing; anguish gave vent
+to determined revenge; pent-up sorrows yielded to out-spoken threats;
+and in tones sufficiently audible to be heard ashore, she cried,
+"I'll do it."
+
+The Spaniard knows no pity. If Marie were to have stepped ashore
+immediately after her lover's strangulation, she might have come
+to grief. It is strange that she escaped punishment for having
+followed. She, therefore, rowed directly east and landed on the beach
+of the bay, about four miles south of Manila, just west of the little
+city of Paranaque.
+
+From sheer exhaustion, she needed food; therefore, she walked northward
+along the shore until she found a Mango tree heavily laden with
+fruit. After eating a few luscious mangoes, she crept into a clump
+of bamboo and had a good cry: tears so ease a woman's soul.
+
+From her position on the beach she could readily see the Spaniards
+as they took her dead lover from the chute when the tide had lowered
+toward evening. She saw them even strike his corpse, and she bit her
+finger nails as she watched them place him in a rough wooden box and
+haul him up through the streets of the village on an old two-wheeled
+cart drawn by a caribou.
+
+With the approach of sunset, things grew strangely quiet. The spring
+zephyr that had blown modestly during the day died away. There was no
+longer even a dimple in the blue surface of Manila Bay. Not a leaf was
+astir. It seemed to Marie that the only sound she could hear was the
+the throbbing of her own heart. To her the whole world seemed like an
+open sepulcher. Looking down she discovered that she was unconsciously
+sitting on a flowery terrace and that all about her was life. She
+pulled one of those exquisite white flowers with wide pink veins,
+peculiar alone to the Philippines, and pressed it to her lips.
+
+The sun was just setting beyond Corregidor. The island's long shadows
+seemed to extend completely across the bay to her feet. As the solar
+fires burned themselves out, the orange tint which they left behind
+against the reddened sky reminded Marie of the night before, when
+she and her lover had strolled along the shore of the bay about three
+miles farther north; and as the sun slowly nodded its evening farewell
+and buried its face in the pillow of night, she remembered how he, on
+the previous night, had called to her attention the lingering glow of
+its fading beams. Before her lay the Spanish fleet, it, too, casting
+shadows that first grew longer and longer and then dimmer and dimmer
+until they in turn had died away in the spectral phenomenon of night.
+
+Marie's thoughts turned toward home. What about her mother? She walked
+back to her little boat, pushed it out into the bay, and, stepping
+into it, sat down, took hold of the oars and started northward near
+the beach. Just opposite Fort Malate, she swung westward, and, passing
+outside of the break-water a mile from shore, she entered the Pasig
+river and hurried homeward. When she arrived, about nine o'clock,
+she found her mother on the verge of prostration; for that very day,
+strange to say, Marie's father, who was a colonel in the Filipino
+infantry, had been killed at San Francisco del Monte, six miles
+north-east of Manila, in a battle with Spanish troops.
+
+"Don't cry, mother," expostulated Marie, "from now on I intend to
+kill every foe of ours in these islands!"
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+FIRST SHOT OF A NEW WAR
+
+
+Three weeks passed by. Marie had gone down town late in April to
+do some shopping. While she was standing in the door of the old
+postoffice on the Escolta, she heard the shrill voice of a Filipino
+lad piping out: "Papers! Papers! All about the war with the United
+States. Dewey's comin'!" He had a bundle of newspapers under his right
+arm and was waving one in his left hand. Everybody rushed out of the
+bazaars and offices along the Escolta where they were transacting
+their business, and each one who could get near enough to the boy,
+eagerly bought a morning paper.
+
+The lad's papers were all gone but one. Marie Sampalit snatched it from
+his hands, and dropped into one of them a small coin. She stepped into
+the corridor of the post office, to escape the annoyance of the crowd,
+and read the large head lines:
+
+
+        "WAR BETWEEN THE UNITED STATES AND SPAIN
+
+        dewey en route to manila great naval
+        battle friday or saturday in manila bay
+
+        The Stone Wall Around the City will be
+        Razed to the Ground. Great Loss of Life."
+
+
+"Then, I'm off for Corregidor Island right away!" exclaimed
+Marie. "Dewey can't get into the Bay except by that route. That's
+where the fight will begin. Mother doesn't know this. I'll tell her
+I am going to take some supplies to the Spanish garrison. I will go
+at once!"
+
+She set out from Manila in a small casco, or flat-bottomed native boat,
+heavily laden with fresh fish, pine-apples, mangoes, bananas, tobacco
+and cigarettes--all intended for the Spanish garrison on Corregidor
+Island. Manila is situated on the eastern shore of Manila Bay. From
+there to the island it is nearly thirty miles. Her little boat was
+driven forward on its journey by an easterly wind that gently swelled
+the tiny sails.
+
+She reached the island at five o'clock that afternoon and was given
+a royal welcome by the Spanish soldiers. Marie gave them the morning
+paper containing the news of Dewey's prospective arrival. She asked
+permission to take part in the fight.
+
+Marie was a favorite with the Spanish garrison. Her genial disposition,
+added to her almost inconceivable daring, had won for her the
+friendship and admiration of all. The gunners had playfully taught
+her all about loading, firing and swabbing their cannon. She had also
+learned the art of good marksmanship, so that at a target practice
+she was an adept.
+
+Impatiently she awaited the arrival of the American fleet. She heard
+the Spaniards discuss among themselves the cowardice of the American
+soldiers, and saw them wager the Dewey would not come to Manila at all
+but that he would sail down around the Malay Peninsula and hasten home
+by way of Good Hope to save his vessels from certain destruction. All
+this sounded plausible to her and she grew restless and enthusiastic
+as the dull hours dragged away.
+
+Dewey was so long in coming from Hongkong and the garrison on the
+island had been kept at their guns ready for action for so many hours
+without rest that many of them were completely tired out by the last
+day of April, and asked for relief. It was hard to give it. Marie's
+opportunity had come. Her ability as an expert rifle shot was known
+alike to officers and enlisted men. She offered to serve. The Spanish
+commandant could not well refuse. He needed her services; besides,
+the Spaniards were just then doing all within their power to win the
+temporary friendship of the natives. Consequently, he promised to
+assign her to duty for the night.
+
+The sunset, as viewed from Corregidor Island on the evening of
+April 30, was most glorious. Not a cloud was in the sky; a dead calm
+prevailed, so that the sea was unusually smooth. As the sun sank to
+rest behind the shimmering horizon it caused the island to cast a
+long shadow over Manila bay as far as the eye could reach, but this
+soon disappeared.
+
+When the sun had sunk from view, Marie noticed that a comparatively
+new moon was visible in the sky, and she remarked to the Sergeant
+of the Guard, "It will not be very dark to-night. We can see the
+Americanos a long way off."
+
+"Yes," replied the Sergeant, "the only difficulty with the cowards is
+that they will not come near enough to be seen at all. They have had
+plenty of time to run from Hongkong to Manila and back again; still
+they have not been seen or heard of. I'll bet you a peso (Spanish
+dollar) that they have gone home and that all of this excitement has
+been for nothing. Dewey is getting old, Marie; he doesn't want to go
+to a watery grave so far from home. If he were young and ambitious,
+it would be different. Old men do not care much about real fighting,
+especially on the sea. It is different with old generals commanding
+land forces. They can sit away back in the rear of the battle-field,
+receive messages that come to them; plan certain movements based upon
+these reports; and while they do have considerable responsibility,
+still they are not in the actual fight. As for Dewey, nobody has
+ever heard of him. He is not a recognized naval commander. Besides,
+the old fellow, according to reports, is slow and easy going. If he
+should come to make us an unfriendly call tonight, mark my word, Marie,
+there will not be a sliver of his entire fleet left floating above the
+water yonder inside of thirty minutes after the first shot is fired."
+
+He had scarcely concluded speaking when the Officer of the Guard,
+Lieutenant Orlando, called out, "Sergeant of the Guard! Fall in the
+First Relief!" The Sergeant threw his arm over Marie's shoulder in an
+affectionate manner, smacked a hurried caress against her olive cheek,
+jumped up from the little bamboo bench on which they were sitting,
+rushed up to the guard house and cried out, "First Relief! Fall in!"
+
+Marie hastened after him. As the relief was forming in line, she seized
+a Mauser rifle that stood leaning against a huge rock, grabbed up a
+cartridge belt well filled with Mauser ammunition that was lying on
+the ground near by, hastily adjusted it to fit her waist measure,
+buckled it on and fell into the rear rank.
+
+"Count fours!" ordered the Sergeant. As is usual in military affairs,
+the front and rear rank men count in unison; that is, number one in
+the front rank and number one in the rear rank both count "one" at the
+same time; second file counts "two," etc. When it came to Marie she
+piped out simultaneously with the corporal who stood in front of her,
+"quatro." (four).
+
+As the guard was marched along the stony pathways on Corregidor Island
+and the various sentinels were relieved, Marie soon saw that there was
+not going to be a place for her. She tip-toed up to the corporal who
+was posting the relief and asked him where he was going to station her.
+
+"Never mind," said the corporal, "we have a place for you." And sure
+enough, they had.
+
+Every soldier or civilian who has ever been on this island will readily
+recall the rough, hard-beaten, winding path that led from the summit of
+the hill, in a south-westerly direction, down over precipices, around
+clumps of bamboo, to a beautiful fresh water spring which bubbled
+out of the coral rocks at a point just high enough to prevent it from
+being inundated or even infiltrated during the season of high tides.
+
+A few feet from this spring and elevated but slightly above it, is a
+massive, flat rock. Along the north and west sides of this rock is a
+vertical stone precipice some eight feet high, which from its upper
+edge inclines back gradually at an angle of about twenty degrees
+above a horizontal plane, toward the crest of the island.
+
+On this rock Spain firmly bolted one of her most modern cannon--a
+good seven-inch gun. It was so situated on a revolving casement that
+its shots could be made to sweep the whole Boca Grande channel, as
+the large entrance south of the island is called. Marie had often
+operated this gun. She had done splendid work with it on a floating
+target two miles distant. Its deadly roar was her delight. Oh! if
+she could but use it just once on an actual enemy instead of firing
+it at an indicated one!
+
+When the old guard had been relieved and the sentries were marched
+back to the guard-house to be dismissed, poor Marie, heavy hearted,
+marched along. Just as they approached the guard-house, the sergeant
+motioned to her to fall out and to come toward him. This she did.
+
+Into her ear he whispered the information that was to start her on her
+eventful military career. "Marie," said he, "the officer of the Guard
+informs me that we cannot use you in the infantry service tonight,
+but that you will be needed with the artillery."
+
+"Good!" exclaimed Marie, "Where shall I serve?"
+
+"At the new gun on the large rock near the spring," answered the
+Sergeant.
+
+"Thank heaven!" said Marie. "Dewey will surely come, and when I put
+a solid shot through the 'Olympia' just below the water line--the
+battle will be half over. Oh! I'm so anxious! May I go down there
+tonight and take charge of the gun at once?"
+
+The Sergeant told her to report to the headquarters of the artillery
+department where she would receive instructions.
+
+At last she found herself on actual duty. How her young heart throbbed
+as her black eyes peered forth into the darkness. Toward midnight,
+small clouds began to drift oceanward. For a few moments at a time
+they would obscure the quartered cheek of the young moon. Oh! if
+Dewey would but come. The hopes of a life-time were poised on that
+painful "if." Before her was the dream of glory; behind her, the
+dreary forgetfulness of the past. Hour after hour whiled away. The
+tiny lights in the natives' shacks along the opposite shore began to
+go out and grow fewer and fewer until the closing day had died safely
+away into the solemn night. As usual, "taps" were blown at ten o'clock
+and things on the island grew very quiet. Days--yes, weeks--seemed
+to crowd themselves into those long hours. Would he ever come?
+
+Presently she heard the sentry's shrill cry on the brow of the hill,
+"Twelve o'clock! All's well!" The echo of his repeated call had
+scarcely died away when Marie thought she saw something dark on the
+water near the center of the channel, perhaps three miles away. She
+whispered to a member of the artillery corps, who sat near her watching
+the shadow of his pipe on the rock near the base of the cannon. They
+both looked. Surely! it's Dewey! The artilleryman sent up a rocket as
+a warning. Marie took hurried aim. "Boom!" went her cannon, and from
+its mouth a seven-inch shot was hurled over the "Concord," between
+its main and mizzen masts. It went a trifle high and did no harm.
+
+"Bang!" went one of the port batteries on the "Raleigh" and before
+its flash was gone a shudder shot through every vein, every nerve
+and every fiber of Marie's body. Such a crash she had never heard
+before. "War is hell" to be sure. She sniffed the smoke from her own
+gun, and looked around to see what had happened. The stone precipice
+behind her was torn into fragments. A man's hand protruded from the
+debris. "My God!" she murmured. Yes, there was the evidence. The
+man who had sat by her side and who sent up the rocket, lay cold in
+death. His head was torn off and his body was mangled among the pieces
+of broken rock. The gunner on the "Raleigh" had done his work well;
+and Marie's dream of American cowardice, of their poor marksmanship
+and of her ability to sink Dewey's flag ship, were shattered in an
+instant. She had fired the FIRST gun of the war, but not the LAST!
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+AVENGED HER LOVER'S DEATH
+
+
+After Dewey's fleet had passed the island and entered the bay, proper,
+Marie crept up to the top of the cliff and awaited the results. As she
+sat there shivering with fright, day began to dawn. Presently she heard
+the Spanish batteries on Point Cavite fire a heavy shot--then a second
+one; and a few minutes later she saw flames of fire and smoke belching
+forth from the starboard sides of Dewey's entire squadron. Then the
+Spanish fleet, lying off of Point Cavite, commenced a united and
+simultaneous action.
+
+Shells rent the air; the men on both fleets cheered as they beheld
+the effect on the enemy of a well-directed shot; smoke-begrimed
+gunners, with the perspiration washing light-colored furrows down
+their manly cheeks, stood at their guns and worked like demons as they
+swabbed their cannon and crowded into them shot after shot. Hissing
+projectiles that missed the opposing ships and plunged into the bay,
+were throwing volumes of splashing foam into the air. Dewey's vessels
+were moving in a figure eight and using alternately the several guns
+on their port and on their starboard sides, while the Spanish ships
+moved about promiscuously among each other in an awkward fashion,
+over a small area, and fired only as an opportunity offered.
+
+"Thank God, I'm out of range of the demons," said Marie to a Spanish
+officer who had come to her side.
+
+Just then, there was a lull in the battle. Dewey's ships ceased firing
+and withdrew to the middle of the bay. No apparent damage had been
+sustained by the vessels of either command.
+
+"The old fellow is going to quit," said Marie to the Spanish officer
+who stood erect with his field glasses carefully trained on Dewey's
+squadron.
+
+"They're coming this way, Marie," said the officer.
+
+"My God! where will we go, if they come past the island and open
+fire on us again?" shouted Marie. "We haven't a mounted gun left to
+shoot with."
+
+The officer remained quiet. Presently he said, "They've stopped and
+are dividing up their ammunition. Evidently they are going to resume
+the fight."
+
+He guessed it right. In thirty minutes Dewey's vessels were heading
+straight for the Spanish fleet. His first shot set on fire the
+beautiful Spanish flag-ship, the "Reina Christina." Then her magazine
+blew up. She was hastily scuttled on the beach near Cavite and deserted
+amid great disorder by that portion of her crew which was able to
+leave. The dead and the dying were left to their fate. Magazines in
+several other Spanish ships soon blew up. In a few minutes most of them
+were on fire. Dewey's gunners were doing deadly execution. Hundreds
+of Spanish soldiers could be seen jumping from their burning vessels
+into the ocean.
+
+"Now what is he going to do?" said Marie, with some excitement, as
+she saw one of Dewey's ships, the "Concord," disengage herself from
+the rest of the fleet and head straight for a large Spanish gun-boat
+that was lying off to herself and whose sole business it seemed was
+to keep up a deadly fire on Dewey's flagship, the "Olympia." The
+Concord literally disembowled her.
+
+"The heartless wretches!" exclaimed Marie, as she watched another
+American ship, the "Petrel," leave the line of battle and make a rapid
+run right past the Spanish fleet for the village of Cavite. "I wonder
+what the villains are up to now." In a few minutes the Petrel returned,
+with six small vessels in tow as prizes. In addition, she was flying
+at her mast head this signal, "Have destroyed eight vessels."
+
+Dewey's ships moved over toward the city of Manila, took their
+positions in line and remained quiet.
+
+"What time is it?" asked Marie of the Spanish officer who stood
+near her.
+
+"Twelve-thirty," answered he, as he looked at his watch.
+
+Marie whiled away the afternoon watching the Spaniards on Corregidor
+island burying their dead comrades. She wanted to go home, but she
+feared to go past Dewey's fleet.
+
+That evening things became solemnly quiet; and the blazing sun, as its
+face reddened into nightly slumber beyond the watery horizon of the
+Pacific, bade farewell to a finished deed, which, in the history of
+naval warfare, has never been surpassed; while the pale-faced moon,
+moving slowly up her appointed path, looked calmly down with her
+quartered cheek in silent benediction on the blazing hulls of the
+Spanish ships as they slowly cremated their dead and dying.
+
+The next day the Spanish Commandante on Corregidor discovered that
+Dewey had blockaded the port of Manila, so he restrained Marie from
+starting home for nearly a week.
+
+Finally, she got permission to go. As she passed Dewey's fleet she
+was surprised to find everything so peaceful and to see dozens of
+native canoes hovering along the port-holes of his vessels, selling
+fruit and curios to his men.
+
+Marie reached home in the early evening, and found her old mother
+frantic because of her absence and the excitement that had taken place.
+
+During the next few weeks while Dewey was waiting for reinforcements
+from home, many strange things occurred on shore. The Filipinos
+captured or killed nearly all of the smaller Spanish garrisons
+distributed throughout the islands. On May 26, they secretly cut
+down the Spanish guards walking their beats along the western side of
+the little town of Cavite, and let in a horde of Tagalos well armed
+with bolos, who crept up near a large stone cathedral, built in 1643,
+in which the Spaniards, as a military necessity after their defeat by
+Dewey, were making their headquarters. These Filipinos made a mad rush
+through the back door of the building and captured all the Spaniards
+being quartered therein. This feat also gave them possession of another
+lot of Mauser and Remington rifles and a goodly store of ammunition,
+for which they had been yearning.
+
+Dewey had no men whom he could spare to send ashore; therefore, he had
+left these surrendered Spaniards to take care of themselves. Evidently
+he did not anticipate an attack upon the garrison at Cavite, or
+he might have landed enough marines from his battleships to have
+prevented it.
+
+When Marie heard about the capture of the Spanish garrison at Cavite
+by the Filipinos, she at once rowed over there to see what was going
+to be done with the prisoners. This was the first time she had been
+at Cavite since the day of her lover's tragic death. She found the
+Filipinos jubilant over their new fire-arms. But many of them had
+never before used a gun and they were very awkward with them, so
+that accidents were constantly occurring. The privileges of target
+practice given to Marie by the Spaniards, in times past, now found a
+new reward. She organized the Filipinos into squads for this training,
+arranged suitable targets for them, supervised the loading and cleaning
+of their guns, and by voluntary assent became the leader in a whole
+lot of nefarious mischief in the neighborhood.
+
+But what about her lover's dying request and the vow she registered
+in her aching soul as she left the scene of his death? By remaining
+away from the graves of our loved ones we may check memory and
+enthrone reason, thus more rapidly overcoming sorrow. By constantly
+resorting to places of grief we keep that grief, whatever may have
+been its cause, fresh on the tablets of our memories. The fact that
+Marie had not returned to Cavite, the scene of her sorrow, for about
+two months, helped her to forget it and to flirt with fate among the
+very troops who had caused it. Now that she had returned to Cavite,
+old visions began to haunt her. Shooting at wooden targets was not
+desperate enough to appease her nature; she longed for bloodshed.
+
+Between herself and a few Filipino leaders she concocted a scheme
+that would be hilarious, avenge the death of him whom she had
+briefly mourned, as well as the deaths of Rizal and thousands of
+other Filipinos who had been shot or strangled by the Spaniards,
+and satisfy the longings of her innermost nature. It was this: a
+pit twenty feet in diameter and ten feet deep was to be dug on the
+higher ground a few miles southwest of Cavite. Each morning twenty
+of the captured Spaniards were to be marched out to this pit and
+made to slide down a bamboo pole into it. The Filipino soldiers,
+armed with their newly-captured rifles, were then to stand around
+the brink of this pit and use these half-starved Spaniards for living
+targets. Marie gloated over her new enterprise. What sport! How she
+enjoyed it! The Filipino's marksmanship was poor and many of their
+unfortunate prisoners were shot over a dozen times before they were
+stilled in death. This bloody practice was kept up until over two
+hundred Spaniards had been slain.
+
+About this time rumors of what was being done reached the ears
+of General Anderson. He ordered it stopped, and sent food ashore,
+under American escorts, for the Spanish prisoners. These prisoners,
+before being led to the slaughter, were housed by the Filipinos
+in an unfinished portion of the old convent at Cavite, and in some
+large stone buildings without floors and with only a few windows,
+heavily barricaded with iron bars, formerly used by the natives for
+storage purposes for various cargoes of raw materials, preparatory
+to exportation. These buildings were dark, damp and infested with a
+multiplicity of insectivora.
+
+The Spaniards, imprisoned therein, were fed by the Filipinos on a
+very small ration of uncooked rice. This they had to pound into meal,
+and eat it out of their hands. Water, although plentiful, was denied
+them, except in small quantities. They had no beds, but slept on
+the bare ground. Many of them were practically nude. They had staid
+by their guns on the Spanish fleet until their ships began to sink;
+then they had jumped overboard and swam ashore, taking off most of
+their clothes before making the attempt. The Filipinos had little
+clothing to give them and no disposition to share what they did have.
+
+These half-starved wretches, pale, lean and ghostly looking, many
+of them sick with fever and other ailments, none of them with a
+cent of money, were a sickening sight to the American troops whom
+General Anderson sent ashore to investigate their circumstances
+and conditions. Of course the healthier ones were marched out and
+killed first. Some of them began to cry when the American officers,
+pushing the Filipino sentries aside, poked their vigorous manly faces
+through the openings of the massive doors to see who and what was on
+the inside; but most of them propped themselves up on one elbow and
+held out the other hand for something to eat. Others indicated by
+motions that they wanted paper and pencils, so as to write letters
+home, telling their loved ones in far-off Spain that they were still
+alive, and asking for money.
+
+As the Americans began to empty their haversacks and hand hard-tack
+and Boston baked beans to them, some of the prisoners seized them by
+the fingers and kissed the backs of their hands in grateful homage
+for their kindness. A few of the more ignorant ones, who had heard so
+much about the cruelty of the American soldiers, and who, upon sight
+of our officers, believing the end was near, had sought a kneeling
+attitude and begun to pray, gradually sank back into a reclining
+posture and held out their hands for a morsel of food.
+
+The Filipino guards sulked when they were displaced by the American
+sentries, and some of them had to be forced from their posts of
+fiendish duty at the point of the bayonet. They considered these
+Spaniards as reprisals, constituting their own private property, with
+whom they could do as they pleased without any justifiable interference
+on the part of anybody. Marie Sampalit slapped an American private
+who had been sent to displace a Filipino sentry whom she had just
+stationed at one of the prison doors. He promptly knocked her down with
+the butt of his rifle. What she said in reply he could not understand.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+THE INTERVAL
+
+
+After avenging her lover's death, Marie returned again to Manila
+where she remained at home until the Filipino uprising against the
+American troops in the spring of 1899. During this interval of nine
+months, she daily frequented the places of rendezvous of the American
+troops stationed in and around Manila. She also went to the officers'
+homes in the city where their wives and children were stopping. She
+did their washing, and cared for the children. Her congeniality made
+her a favorite. Some of the American ladies offered to bring her back
+to America with them for a house-hold servant.
+
+From them she learned to speak the English language nearly as fluently
+as Spanish. The American soldiers were kind and polite to her. She
+made considerable money by doing washing for them. It was noticeable
+that she was gradually improving the old bamboo home in Manila. In a
+few months she had come into possession of more money than she thought
+there was in the entire world. Most of it was American gold--largely
+in five dollar denominations. (This is what the United States used in
+paying the soldiers.) These she took to the Spanish bank in Manila
+and exchanged them for Mexican silver, which, until the United
+States began to issue special coins for the Philippine islands,
+was the standard medium of exchange in the archipelago.
+
+Marie began to dress better. Her penia cloth gave way to Chinese silks;
+her wooden hair combs to expensive ones inlaid with gold, bought at
+the Spanish bazar down town. Many little comforts were bought for her
+home. Still the washings kept growing larger. She and her mother could
+be seen back of their shack, in the shade, pounding American soldiers'
+white uniforms on large boulders from early morning till night.
+
+Aguinaldo, who had previously sold out his country and gone to
+Singapore, after commissioning Dimiguez, upon hearing that war
+was about to begin between the United States and Spain, made his
+way northward to Hongkong. After the battle of Manila Bay, Dewey
+despatched the revenue cutter, "McCulloch," to Hongkong to cable
+home the news of his splendid victory. On her return to Manila,
+she permitted Aguinaldo to come along.
+
+After a brief conversation with Admiral Dewey on board the "Olympia,"
+he went ashore at Cavite, his boyhood home, began to organize the
+Filipinos into a powerful army, captured 1500 Spanish soldiers who
+were holding out-lying posts, and hemmed in the city of Manila.
+
+On August 13, following, Dewey and General Merritt, by a union of
+their forces, captured the city of Manila which offered but slight
+resistance. Aguinaldo's native troops rushed forward with the Americans
+in the charge that was made by the land forces and they insisted on
+looting the city. General Merritt refused this and ordered them to
+withdraw beyond the city limits. This they did after considerable
+wrangling. Then the Americans established out-posts on every road and
+pathway leading to and from the city, completely around the town;
+and they were given instructions by the commanding officer not to
+allow any Filipino troops to enter the city.
+
+Aguinaldo discarded his uniform one evening, completely
+disguised himself as a Filipino fruit-vender, and made his way
+into Manila. Naturally, he slipped around to the home of his old
+friends, the Sampalits. He sat in a semi-darkened room, with all the
+hinged-windows to the shack tightly closed and stroked Marie's soft
+black hair with his left hand. As he engaged her and her mother in
+conversation in subdued tones, he little thought that in so short a
+time Marie would be associated with him in a series of bloody tragedies
+that would revolutionize the government of the islands forever.
+
+"Marie," said he, "I'm going to force the Americans to acknowledge
+the independence of the Philippine islands, or I shall not permit
+the rest of their army to land. Dewey tells me he has sent home for
+reinforcements. There is no use for us to let these troops land, if
+America instead of Spain is going to govern the islands. What we want
+is absolute independence with myself as president of the new Filipino
+Republic. If the Americans won't concede this to us, let's fight!"
+
+"That's what I say!" declared Marie. "Let's drive the foreign devils
+off the islands or slay them all. Here's father dead and--Dimiguez,
+too"--Marie's voice trembled--"I tell you it's too much. Let's kill
+every one of them!"
+
+"Yes; but say Marie, we must keep quiet about all this," cautioned
+Aguinaldo. "I'll tell you what I have in mind. We'll wait about four
+weeks and by that time if Dewey hasn't received definite instructions
+from Washington, and if he won't give me any satisfaction, I'm going
+to go to Malolos, proclaim myself Dictator of the Philippines, appoint
+a cabinet and a congress from among some of the bright young Filipinos
+here in Manila who have been educated abroad, draw up a Revolutionary
+form of government, and begin to administer the affairs of these
+islands just as I please.
+
+"We'll keep our present army in the field, and if the Americans do
+land we'll shut them up in Manila, so that they will have nothing at
+their command but the city to regulate. This won't amount to much as
+compared with the rest of the islands which I will dominate."
+
+"Are you sure the Americans won't land a powerful army, cut through
+your lines around Manila and drive you out of Malolos, or capture you
+and your officials at that place? It seems to me I would go farther
+inland--say to San Isidro," said Marie.
+
+Aguinaldo thought a moment, then replied: "That's true, in a sense,
+Marie; but I have got to be on or near the railroad where I can have
+easy and rapid access to Manila. Malolos is not far from here and
+it is situated on the railroad. It has some very large buildings in
+which our legislative sessions could be held. I think it the place
+for the undertaking.
+
+"To be on the safe side, I believe I will have our troops erect a
+series of fortifications between here and there along the railroad
+track, so that if the Americans do attempt to advance by that route
+I can easily stop them."
+
+"I think that would be a good scheme," said Marie. "Malolos is about
+twelve miles from Manila Bay; besides, the bay is shallow in the
+north end, so that heavy boats could not go up there. This will make
+it impossible for Dewey to shell the place with his fleet. We've got
+to watch out for that--no matter what we do. My! but those American
+ships can shoot! Did you hear about me shooting at 'em with that
+cannon on Corregidor island when they entered the bay? I mighty near
+got one of their vessels."
+
+"No," said Aguinaldo, "I have not heard very much about the firing
+off Corregidor, but as I came from Hongkong the other day on the
+"McCulloch" I noticed that the Spanish fortifications on the island
+had all been dismantled."
+
+"Why! they killed a man right at my feet, the very first shot," said
+Marie; "and then one of their boats drew nearer and fired several
+times more and they killed every Spaniard in the relief guard which
+was near by,--seven of them in all."
+
+"And I was terribly worried about Marie," interrupted her mother who
+had listened to the conversation with deepest interest. "She had been
+gone for a week, and I hadn't heard a word from her."
+
+"Oh! well, I don't pity the Spaniards any for what the Americans did
+to them," interjected Aguinaldo, with some emphasis.
+
+"Be careful," said old lady Sampalit, putting her finger on her lips,
+"don't speak too loud."
+
+Aguinaldo continued in a lower voice: "They killed your husband. They
+shot Rizal. They strangled Dimigeuz. They tortured to death several
+hundred of our young fellows in the dungeons. They have left ridges
+of dead wherever their armies have moved among us. I tell you they
+deserved all they got."
+
+Mrs. Sampalit and Marie had grown heavy hearted. Aguinaldo looked at
+his watch. It was after ten P. M.
+
+"I wonder," said Aguinaldo, hesitatingly, "how I shall be able to
+get back to our lines tonight."
+
+"Don't go!" said Marie, in an emphatic whisper, "stay over night!"
+
+"Yes, do!" entreated the old lady, "I'm nervous."
+
+"It might be best; it would surely be the safest thing to do," said
+Aguinaldo, in a meditating manner.
+
+"We sleep on bamboo beds," said Marie. "There stands mine. You may use
+it tonight, and I will sleep on the floor. I don't mind. Mother and
+I frequently lie down on the floor near the window, when the nights
+are sultry."
+
+The next morning Aguinaldo arose very early, made his way to the
+edge of the city and stealthily stole out threw the Americans' lines,
+never again to return to Manila until General Funston brought him back,
+two years later, a captive.
+
+He made his way to Malolos, a few weeks after this conversation,
+declared himself "Dictator of the Philippines," appointed a Filipino
+congress, set up a government of his own and began to run the general
+affairs in the interior of Luzon.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+FILIPINO UPRISING
+
+
+The close of the eventful year of 1898 was near at hand. General Otis
+had been made governor-general of the islands. He had received about
+15,000 troops from home. These had all been landed and were quartered
+in the city of Manila.
+
+Preparations had begun by the American troops for a great day of field
+sports to be held on the Luneta--a beautiful narrow park paralleling
+Manila bay and extending southward from the walled-city about four
+miles--on New Year's day, 1899.
+
+On the afternoon of January I, as planned, the exercises were
+begun. The afternoon program consisted of foot races, running high
+jumps, wheelbarrow race, fat man's race, running broad jump, high
+kicking, fancy club swinging, tumbling, shot-put, sack race, tugs of
+war, five boxing contests, base ball, foot ball, and pole vaulting.
+
+Situated on the Luneta, about a mile south of the walled city, and
+distant from Manila bay about 100 feet, is a large bandstand. This
+served as headquarters for the exercises. The day was perfect--clear,
+cool and calm.
+
+About 2:00 P.M. over 40,000 natives, soldiers (including jack-tars
+from Dewey's fleet, Spaniards and Americans) and foreign residents
+had assembled around this bandstand to hear the Address of Welcome and
+to witness the sports. When the speaker arose to deliver the address,
+for which he was afterward voted, and presented with, a medal by the
+Eight Army Corps, he said in part (verbatim report):
+
+"On behalf of these committeemen who have spared no efforts to make
+these Field Day Exercises a success, and this occasion one long to
+be remembered by those who have assembled here this afternoon, I bid
+you, one and all--officers, soldiers, sailors and civilians of every
+nationality--a hearty welcome."
+
+"Again to you, the members of Admiral Dewey's fleet, I feel obligated
+to extend a separate and special welcome; for without your chivalrous
+devotion to duty last May Day, yon shell-riven wrecks (part of unraised
+Spanish fleet visible above the bay) would not bespeak the down-fall
+of a sister nation, and we ourselves would not have been permitted
+to assemble here this afternoon. There is no braver man on land or
+sea than the American marine; and on behalf of the entire American
+army of occupation, I bid you a most cordial welcome."
+
+Touching upon the question of territorial expansion, the speaker said:
+
+"This was a war for humanity, not for conquest. But simply because
+it suddenly closed and left us in possession of large tracts of
+new territory, is no reason why these spoils of war should be given
+up. I hold this to be true Americanism: that wherever the old flag
+is established through sacrifice of American blood, whether it be on
+the barren sands of the desert, at the frigid extremes of the earth,
+or on the rich and fertile islands of the sea, there is should remain
+triumphant, shedding forth beams of liberty to the oppressed, shouts
+of defiance to the oppressor, and furnish protection and enlightenment
+to all who come beneath its streaming folds forever!" (applause).
+
+A chubby Filipino maiden, standing near the speaker's stand, and
+who had listened intently to every word of the address, because she
+now understood the English tongue, quietly elbowed her way through
+the dense crowd which was gradually becoming more compressed, until
+she reached a car drawn by two Chinese ponies on the old street car
+line running south from Manila to Fort Malate and back. Taking the
+car she rode up town to the Escolta. Going into the postoffice, she
+hastily wrote and mailed to Aguinaldo at Malolos a letter containing
+an account of what was said. It follows:
+
+
+"Manila, P. I., Jan. 1, 1899.
+
+
+My Dear General:
+
+Those wretched Americans are holding some kind of exercises on the
+Luneta this afternoon. I heard one of the speeches. It was awful
+bad. The fellow talked loud. He swung his hands in the air and the
+crowd seemed to get terribly excited over what he was saying.
+
+He told about that treaty of peace, and he said no power under the
+sun would haul down the American flag from over Manila.
+
+It made me angry. I am going right out to the Filipino trenches to
+see my Uncle (Colonel Miguel). He'll fix those fellows. I'll bet
+he'll haul down their flag before tomorrow morning.
+
+
+Goodby,
+
+Marie."
+
+
+
+The evening program on the Luneta, which followed the afternoon
+exercises, was largely literary in its nature. It consisted of music
+by the California band, singing by the famous Washington Male Quartet,
+fancy dancing, selected recitations, and stump speeches. In addition,
+Privates Green and Martin boxed four rounds, much to the satisfaction
+of the natives.
+
+The program had just been completed when the Master of Ceremonies
+received from the American general in charge a note telling
+him to announce the conclusion of the program at once and to
+order all soldiers to report immediately at their respective
+regimental headquarters;--trouble had been reported at the
+out-posts. Reinforcements were hastened to several of the out-post
+reserves, and it appeared that the expected insurrection was at hand.
+
+After the out-break by the Filipinos on New Year's night, it was
+evident to both sides that it was only a question of a short time when
+blood would be spilled in abundance. The Filipinos occupied all of the
+block-houses--some seventeen in number--around the city of Manila. This
+forced the Americans to stand in the open and do guard duty exposed.
+
+The Filipino troops were saucy. They couldn't understand why men should
+be armed with rifles and not be permitted to shoot. They tormented
+the American soldiers daily with hideous pranks. They grew bolder,
+and pushed their out-posts forward until they stood within a few feet
+of the American sentries.
+
+Marie went out and back through the American lines at will. She
+secretly kept the Filipino army thoroughly posted on the arrival of
+new troops from America. Occasionally she would take the train and
+go up to Malolos to see Aguinaldo. She was the best posted person
+in the Philippines as to what was going on in each of the hostile
+armies. Nobody suspected her. She was respected by the American
+troops. Everybody came to know her.
+
+Just before dusk, on the evening of February 4th, 1899, Marie
+and her mother left the city of Manila, in a cariole, drawn by a
+Chinese pony which they had recently purchased. They had in it all of
+their most precious household trinkets. As they passed Colonel John
+M. Stotsenberg, commanding the 1st Nebraska volunteers, stationed
+on McLeod's hill at the eastern edge of Manila, he recognized them,
+and called to Marie, "Where are you going?"
+
+"Out on a little trip," retorted Marie.
+
+"How soon will you be back?" asked he.
+
+"O, I can't tell," responded Marie. "Mother is getting so nervous
+that we thought best to go away for awhile."
+
+"Say, Marie," said the colonel, "do you know who the Filipino officer
+is in command of all those thousands of troops that are now assembling
+in the ravines between the hills along the far side of the river
+valley, yonder?"
+
+"No, I do not," she declared with an emphatic swing of her head.
+
+But she was lying. It was Colonel Miguel, her own uncle. She knew about
+it. He had secretly informed her that he was preparing to attack the
+city and burn it and that he was going to exterminate the American
+army of occupation and all foreign residents that fell into the hands
+of his mighty army. He told her that he had chosen the east side of
+the city as his main point of attack, so that Dewey could not reach
+his troops with the shells from his gun boats in case he tried to
+assist the American army, without elevating his guns and shooting
+completely over the city--a thing wholly impractical within itself,
+as Dewey could not determine whether his shells would be falling
+among the Filipino or the American troops. It was he who advised her
+to take her mother and flee to the hills for refuge.
+
+Colonel Stotsenberg then asked Marie if she knew anything about the
+proposed attack on the city by her people. This, she denied also. The
+colonel's face flushed. Pulling back the flap of his tent, he said
+emphatically: "Do you see that gun, Marie? Tell those fellows over
+there when you pass their lines that I said they could have trouble
+whenever they want it."
+
+Marie drove on.
+
+Inside the colonel's tent stood a large gun from the Utah battery,
+mounted, loaded, ready for action; its threatening nose was
+pointed directly at the line of little brown men assembled across
+the valley. The Filipinos were smarting for trouble. They wanted it
+badly. Wherever and whenever possible they improved every opportunity
+to bring it about. The trouble came. Colonel Stotsenberg that night
+used the cannon he had pointed out to Marie. A long pile of mangled
+forms lying at the base of the river hills on the opposite of the
+valley next morning told the results.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+AS A SPY
+
+
+Marie was well equipped by instinct and experience for a spy. The
+tragic nature of such work was exceptionally inviting to her. When
+a chance came to undertake it, she lost no time in embracing the
+opportunity.
+
+After passing out through the American lines, she drove on down the
+slope of the hill and crossed the San Juan River on the old stone
+bridge where the fighting was begun that night by young Grayson of
+the Nebraska regiment. After reaching the Filipinos' lines she at once
+reported to her uncle, Colonel Miguel, and had an extended interview
+with him.
+
+Secret plans were agreed upon whereby she was to become the colonel's
+chief scout. Two Filipino soldiers were sent to accompany her old
+mother to the little town of Angono on the eastern bank of Lake Laguna
+de Bay, near its northern end. A native family, quite familiar with
+the Sampalits and related to them, lived in this village. Marie stayed
+with the troops in the field. Her young brain danced at the thought
+of more bloodshed. She must be in the fight.
+
+Just what part Marie took in the attack made upon the Americans by
+the Filipinos on the night of February 4th, and in the fighting on
+February 5th, the world will never know. The two main figures in
+these operations were Colonel Miguel, in command of the main portion
+of the Filipino forces, and Colonel Stotsenberg, who commanded the
+1st Nebraska volunteers. Before the close of the war these men were
+both shot; consequently, there is no one left to tell the story,
+and history is silent on the point.
+
+After the fight of February 4 and 5, the entire line of block-houses
+and intrenchments circumscribing Manila, were in the hands of the
+Americans. From the Pasig river on the east, around the city to the
+bay on the north, this line was commanded by Major-General MacArthur;
+the corresponding semi-circle on the south, by Major-General Anderson.
+
+During the next seven weeks, fresh troops were constantly
+arriving. Each side was preparing for the long, inevitable conflict.
+
+At day break, on March 25, General MacArthur, leaving Hall's brigade
+in the trenches and placing those of Otis and Hale on the firing line,
+which was over seven miles in length, made a brilliant charge along
+the entire front on the Filipinos' breastworks about a mile and a
+half distant and constructed parallel to those of the Americans'.
+
+Before night he had cut the Filipino army into hopeless fragments;
+had advanced his own army over nine miles; had inflicted a terrible
+loss upon Aguinaldo's troops; had demonstrated to them the difference
+between a determined American advance and an irresolute Spanish one;
+and had taken up in earnest the invasion of Luzon, the capture of
+the Filipinos' temporary capital, Malolos, the overthrow of their
+provisional government, and the establishment of American sovereignty
+throughout the entire archipelago.
+
+That night, about eleven o'clock, a nervous Filipino woman came walking
+down along the American out-post reserves which, during actual war,
+are usually only from 100 to 200 feet in the rear of the sentries. She
+reached Company "G's" reserve of the 1st South Dakota Volunteers,
+where she was ordered to halt. She refused, but acted as though she
+did not understand. Drawing a large bamboo bonnet down over her face
+to conceal her identity, she mumbled something apparently to herself,
+and walked rapidly on. In a moment she was seized; her bonnet was
+torn off; her identity revealed: it was Marie.
+
+She had been counting the American out-posts and the reserves to see
+if the defeated Filipinos, with the reinforcements which they had
+received, would be warranted in making a night attack.
+
+She boldly denied her identification; fought, scratched,
+scrambled--making it necessary to employ two privates, a corporal
+and a sergeant to send her to the rear.
+
+When she was taken before Major William F. Allison, commanding the
+3rd battalion of the South Dakotas, who was acting as field-officer
+that night, he ordered her restrained until morning. A tired private
+was detailed to guard her. He gave her a rubber poncho, and insisted
+that she wrap herself up in it and lie down to sleep. Although she
+drew the poncho about her to keep herself warm (it grew very chilly
+before morning) she refused to sleep, and made repeated efforts to
+escape. Her teeth chattered and she seemed distressed--evidently
+through fear of what the morning might bring to her.
+
+The next day she was set free, after taking a solemn oath to return
+to Manila and not take any further part in the insurrection. She
+pleaded earnestly for her liberty, and voluntarily promised that
+after her return to Manila she would do washing free of charge for
+the American soldiers who were sick in quarters.
+
+After being liberated, Marie walked eastward, following an irregular
+sled-road; that is, a road-way used by the Filipinos for sledding
+their rice to market. This is done by means of a bamboo sled drawn
+over the dry ground by a caribou. She followed this road for over
+two miles until she came to the San Mateo river.
+
+Although given a few hardtack by her captors at the time of her
+release, she was getting hungry. As she approached the stream she
+noticed an old Filipino standing near his bamboo cabin which was neatly
+tucked away oh the slope of a deep ravine near by. Turning from her
+pathway which had now grown somewhat indistinct she approached the
+old gentleman.
+
+When quite close to him she said, "Buenos dias," (Good morning in
+Spanish.)
+
+"Magandang umaga," (Good morning, in Tagalo), muttered the old man.
+
+After a brief conversation during which Marie told him that she had
+been captured by the Americans, had been terribly misused and he had a
+miraculous escape, he invited her into his cabin where his aged wife
+gave her something to eat. This breakfast consisted of boiled rice,
+some fish which the old man had just brought from his set lines in
+the San Mateo river, and some bacon which he had found along the
+trail made by the American's pack train the day before.
+
+While the old couple were outside of their home--he breaking up
+some bamboo with which to re-kindle the fire, and she, cleaning the
+fish--Marie ransacked the house. She stole a large diamond ring which
+the old man had taken from the finger of a Spanish officer during
+the previous insurrection. She opened an old mahogany chest and took
+from it a rosary valued at several hundred dollars; also a gold lined
+cup which the old man, himself, had stolen from a Spanish priest,
+and some Spanish coins.
+
+After a hearty lunch, she started on.
+
+Crossing the river at the rapids, on the boulders which projected
+above the water, she quickened her steps and hurried along. Changing
+her course to the southward, she started for the northern end of Lake
+Laguna de Bay to see her mother.
+
+She had not gone far through a small clump of timber when she came
+upon the corpse of a Filipino soldier who had been shot in the previous
+day's engagement,--perhaps by a stray ball. Hastily stealing the cross
+which hung from a small cord about his neck, and a valueless ring from
+one of his fingers, she seized his Mauser rifle and his cartridge belt
+which was partly filled with ammunition, and then resumed her journey.
+
+A short distance ahead was a large opening--an old rice field
+well cleared. She had scarcely begun to cross it when she heard a
+noise. She turned and saw the bow-legged old man whom she had robbed,
+with a machete in his hand, coming after her as fast as he could. He
+had discovered that the rosary was missing, and upon looking around,
+that several other things were gone; therefore he at once started
+in pursuit of the fiend who had just enjoyed his hospitality. Marie
+was not disturbed. Raising to her shoulder the rifle which she had
+just found, she took deliberate aim and at the first shot laid him
+low in death.
+
+She reached the small native village of Angono, where her mother was
+stopping, about four o'clock in the afternoon of March 26th.
+
+The old lady was wonderfully elated to receive the new jewels which
+Marie had stolen. She put on the rosary and danced about in the native
+hut like a young child on Christmas morning, when it sees the gorged
+stocking fastened to its bed.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+OFF FOR BALER
+
+
+That night Marie had a good rest. The next morning, fired with ambition
+and discontent, she lit her accustomed cigarette and started for
+Manila. Instead of going overland, she went in a row boat via the
+Pasig river which drains the lake into Manila bay and which flows
+through the city of Manila situated at its mouth.
+
+While stealthily prowling around through Manila during the next few
+days, Marie accidentally discovered that plans were being carried
+out by the Americans to relieve the remnant of the old Spanish
+garrison of fifty men stationed at the little town of Baler, near
+the eastern coast of Luzon. This garrison was of course surrendered
+to the American forces with the remainder of the Spanish army on
+August 13, 1898, but as all lines of communication with them had been
+destroyed by the Filipinos they had never been officially notified
+of the capitulation. Scouting parties brought in the information that
+they were being besieged by a horde of blood-thirsty Filipinos which
+outnumbered them ten to one, and that it was only a question of time
+before all would be exterminated.
+
+Accordingly, Admiral Dewey and General Otis decided that something
+must be done at once to relieve them. A rescuing party was formed and
+placed aboard the "Yorktown," which carried them around the southern
+point of Luzon and then northward to the mouth of the Baler river.
+
+Marie, nerved by the thought of a new exploit, forgot her oath not
+to take up arms against the Americans again during the insurrection,
+and hastily departed overland for Baler to notify the besieging
+Filipinos of what was to take place, and to help them as best she
+could to resist the advance of the rescuing party.
+
+Although Baler is situated on the Baler river, near the eastern coast
+of Luzon, and Manila is on the west side of the island Baler is,
+nevertheless, almost directly north of Manila. This is caused by the
+deep indention of Manila bay, on the extreme eastern side of which
+Manila is situated, and by the abrupt inclination to the westward of
+the eastern coast line of Luzon directly above a point straight east
+of Manila.
+
+In starting on her journey Marie left Manila by a little Filipino
+foot-path which enters the city in the northeastern part near the
+San Sebastian church. She followed it to Block-house No. 4, which is
+situated about three miles north and a trifle east of Manila. At that
+point she took a road which veered off perceptibly to the east for a
+short distance and which was made by the Americans' commissary train
+on the morning that the advance was begun toward Malolos, March 25,
+preceding.
+
+She had gone but a quarter of a mile when her attention was
+attracted to a board used as the head-stone for a grave only a few
+feet distant from her pathway. She walked over to in and found these
+words inscribed thereon:
+
+
+                       "R. I. P. D. O. M.
+
+                         Wat Erbuf Falo
+
+              Born -- (?) Died, February 12, 1899.
+
+
+        To those who bring flowers to this lonely grave,
+           Some facts on its headstone we wish to engrave;
+        If this mound could speak no doubt it would tell
+           Bill Sherman was right when he said, 'War is Hell.'
+        He charged on two pickets whose names are below;
+           They took him for niggers,--poor wronged buffalo.
+        As to the way he met death, everybody knows how;
+           As to whom he belonged we don't caribou.
+
+                Signed: Barney and Barkley, Co. "M," 1st. Col. Vols."
+
+
+
+It was now April 2nd, and Marie had ahead of her about ninety miles
+overland to be made on foot or else on horse-back; and it was necessary
+for her to hurry along, as the rescuing party was scheduled to reach
+the mouth of Baler river April 10th, or 12th.
+
+Her course led past the little shack on the bank of the San Mateo
+river, where she had robbed the elderly couple who had been so kind
+to her and near where she later had shot the old man when he was
+pursuing her to regain possession of his stolen property.
+
+She found it deserted; but in a little bamboo corral nearby she found
+three Chinese ponies. Evidently they had made their escape from the
+scene of battle and had drifted into this yard for refuge. There was
+a small stack of rice straw just outside the corral. From this Marie
+soon made a stoutly-twisted rope which she hastily arranged in the
+form of a bridle. Placing it over the head of the largest pony she
+mounted him and rode off.
+
+She got ten miles beyond this last stopping place before sunset. That
+night she stopped at a small inland village. As she lay down to sleep
+on the bamboo floor in the hut of a Tagalo family whose acquaintance
+she had readily formed, recollections of the place which she had
+passed during the afternoon where she had previously robbed the old
+couple immediately after she was released upon oath by the Americans,
+suggested to her the thought that she was violating her oath; that she
+was now out in a country where she might be betrayed at any moment by
+her own people, or else be captured by a squad of American infantry
+or cavalry; therefore, she decided that on the following day she
+would destroy her identity.
+
+Upon retiring the previous night Marie coiled up for a pillow her head
+of long black hair. "I hate to give it up," thought she, "but what
+will the Americans do to me if they capture me another time? Oh! well,
+after the war is over it will soon grow out again."
+
+The next morning, after a scanty breakfast of bananas and rice, and
+a pineapple which Marie salted heavily before she ate it, she went to
+a native barber and had her long hair cut close to the scalp, except
+for a little tuft on top which she had him brush up for a pompadour.
+
+Before cutting off her hair the barber tied a piece of hemp very
+tightly around it, just back of her neck. After he had detached it,
+he held it in front of Marie and asked her what she wished done with
+it. She took it in her own hands.
+
+The barber kept on trimming her shortened hair. Marie stopped talking
+and seemed to be in deep meditation.
+
+Presently the barber said. "That's all."
+
+Marie arose from the rough mahogany slab on which she had been sitting,
+handed him a puesta (twenty cents, Mexican), looked out of the window
+and said, "I'll tell you what I'll do: I'll trade you my hair for
+that quilas (two-wheeled cart) standing there."
+
+"All right"; said the barber, "My pony is dead, and the war has so
+devasted the country, and money has become so scarce, that I can't
+afford to buy another one."
+
+"The harness hanging on it goes with the cart," said Marie.
+
+"Oh no!" exclaimed the barber, "my wife borrowed that, and I must
+return it."
+
+"It doesn't make any difference to whom it belongs," said Marie,
+emphatically, "you traded me the cart, and everything that was in it
+goes with the trade. How do you suppose I could hitch my pony into
+the cart without a harness?"
+
+Just then she pulled a bolo out from under her apron. The barber said
+no more.
+
+Marie hitched her pony into the cart and started on toward Baler.
+
+That day she followed a good road leading toward the mountains near
+the eastern coast of Luzon. By night her pony had made twenty miles.
+
+She had already reached the foot-hills. It was impossible for her
+to make head-way any longer with the cart. She would soon be across
+the mountains and be in the region to be approached by the American
+relief party. What was to be done?
+
+A happy thought came to Marie. She clasped her hands and muttered to
+herself, "I'll trade the cart for a suit of men's clothes and trade
+the harness for a sombrero," (bamboo hat.)
+
+Since the middle of the afternoon she had been driving parallel to a
+stream that wound its way, nearby, from the mountains across the plains
+to the sea. Villages along the banks were numerous. At night fall she
+was still in Tagalo territory. It was her own tribe. She soon found a
+place to stay over night. Her pony was turned loose in a vacant yard,
+with an old bamboo fence around it, and given some young rice.
+
+That evening while smoking cigarettes, and while inflaming the minds
+of the villagers with startling stories about the atrocities, of the
+American soldiers, Marie finally succeeded in making the trade which
+she had planned during the afternoon.
+
+Next morning, April 5, she rode on. Before her lay sixty miles of
+unknown territory to be covered during the next four days, if she
+were to reach Baler in time to warn the besieging Filipinos of the
+contemplated attack by the Americans.
+
+A half mile out from the village, Marie came to an abrupt turn in the
+road. Near by was a dense cluster of banana trees. She dismounted,
+and while her pony was nibbling young rice she went into the thicket
+and changed her attire. Then she tied a good-sized stone up in her
+old clothes and threw them into the river. As she stood on the bank
+watching them sink, she saw her shadow in the water. How changed she
+looked! The sombrero was such a relief in keeping the hot sun off
+her head.
+
+"Now, I'll not be recognized," thought she. "How nice it is to be
+dressed like a man. From now on I mean to play a man's part and be
+a full-fledged soldier."
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+THE GILMORE INCIDENT
+
+
+Marie reached her destination late in the evening of April 9th,
+and she at once notified the officers commanding the Filipinos who
+were besieging Baler, what to expect. Knowing that with so small a
+force, if the Americans undertook to relieve the Spanish garrison,
+it would necessarily have to be done by way of the Baler river--as
+the town of Baler where the Spanish garrison was located is some two
+miles up the river from where it empties into the Pacific ocean, and
+the American troops were too greatly outnumbered by the Filipinos to
+make a land expedition safe,--she suggested to them the advisability
+of fortifying the river at specific intervals along either bank and
+of taking the precaution to cover the fortifications with freshly-cut
+brush so that the Americans could not locate them for the purpose of
+bombarding them in case they saw fit to load some of the smaller cannon
+on cascoes and make their way up the river for an attack in that way.
+
+The Filipinos took her suggestions, and the entrenchments and places
+for the sentries were quickly, yet very wisely, arranged. It was
+during the dry season and the river was very low at the time. This
+made it possible to dig ditches on the sand bars which extended far
+out into the stream; and by throwing into the river the loose sand
+taken therefrom, to conceal these entrenchments by strewing over them
+some fresh-cut limbs and old under brush which had the appearance of
+having drifted to their lodgment.
+
+The Yorktown arrived off the mouth of the Baler river, April 11, as
+scheduled. Ensign Stanley went ashore, under a flag of truce, where,
+to his surprise, he was cordially received by the Filipino officers;
+but their exceptionally good behavior and the twinkle of their eyes
+told only too plainly to the ensign that something was wrong. He
+therefore returned to the Yorktown without having accomplished anything
+in particular.
+
+The next morning, at four o'clock, Lieutenant Gilmore and sixteen
+brave associates left the Yorktown in a row boat, and entered the
+mouth of the river. Ensign Stanley and Quartermaster Lysac were put
+ashore to reconnoiter. In a few minutes daylight broke forth and
+those left in the boat were discovered by the Filipino sentry who
+was walking his beat along the shore. He gave the alarm. Lieutenant
+Gilmore and his party could easily have pulled out to sea and gotten
+away, but humanity forbade it. What would become of the two scouts
+who went ashore? Their comrades in the boat could not desert them,
+so they rowed up the river into the very jaws of impending danger.
+
+Presently out of a concealed trench hundreds of armed Filipinos
+opened a deadly fire on Gilmore and his comrades, at only fifty yards
+distance. The water at this point was shallow. The boat got stuck in
+the mud. There was nothing to do but to fight. In a moment Morrisy
+fell dead, having been shot through the head; Dillon followed;
+then McDonald, then Nygard;--Marie was doing deadly work with her
+Mauser rifle.
+
+The Americans returned the fire as best they could; but what was
+the use. They could see nothing to fire at, so perfectly had the
+Filipinos screened their trenches; besides, the Filipinos were using
+smokeless powder.
+
+Four of Gilmore's men were already dead, two were mortally wounded
+and begging their comrades to shoot them before they fell into the
+hands of the Filipinos, and two more were slightly wounded. Most
+of the oars had been badly shattered by the enemy's rifle balls. In
+this moment of desperation, Ellsworth, Woodbury and Edwards jumped
+overboard and tried to push the boat out to mid-stream. It was no use;
+the tide was coming in and the current was so strong that they could
+not compete against it.
+
+Lieutenant Gilmore was firing his revolver. He decided to change and
+use one of the dead men's rifles. As he picked it up he noticed the
+lock had been struck by a Remington ball and the clip had been jammed
+in. He handed it to an apprentice lad, named Venville, to be fixed.
+
+The boy had scarcely begun to examine the gun, when a bullet struck
+him in the fleshy part of the neck. He had never been under fire
+before. Looking up calmly, he said, "Mr. Gilmore, I'm hit."
+
+In a moment another bullet struck him in the chest and came out of
+his arm pit. With his attention riveted on his task, he remarked,
+"I'm hit again, Mr. Gilmore."
+
+Only a moment later another ball grazed the side of his head and cut
+a painful wound in his scalp. "Mr. Gilmore, they've hit me again,"
+he muttered, while he kept on working at the gun, with blood running
+down all over him.
+
+In a few minutes a fourth ball passed through the lad's ankle, one of
+the most painful parts of the body in which to get shot. This time,
+with a slight tremble in his voice, he said, "Mr. Gilmore, I'm hit
+once more; but I've fixed your gun, Sir."
+
+Just at this moment the Filipinos saw that the Americans' fire had
+practically ceased. Throwing back from off their trench the limbs and
+underbrush that had concealed them, the Filipinos, armed with guns,
+spears, bolos and clubs, made a bold dash for the boat and captured
+the entire crew.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+THE AMERICAN PRISONERS
+
+
+Those of the Americans who were alive and able to help themselves
+were ordered to go ashore on the sand bar, where the Filipinos robbed
+them of their personal effects and then lined them up preparatory
+to shooting them all down in a body. Gilmore, being an officer,
+protested against having his hands tied. He claimed, according to
+the accepted rules of warfare, that on account of his rank he had
+a right to die honorably with his hands free. The Filipinos have
+great superstitions about "rank" in military affairs. Marie knew the
+significance of Gilmore's request; she respected it.
+
+The Filipinos had loaded their rifles, cocked them, raised the same
+to their shoulders, had taken aim, and Marie was about to give the
+fatal command, "Fire!", when a shout from the bank stopped her and
+for a moment engaged the attention of both the Americans and the
+Filipinos. It came from a Filipino officer, running down to the
+shore. He ordered them to stop. One second longer would have been
+too late.
+
+This Tagalo officer ordered the Americans to get back into their boat
+and to row across to the opposite shore. After bailing the water out
+of the boat and plugging up the holes in it made by the enemy's rifle
+balls, they obeyed his command.
+
+When they went ashore, Lieutenant Gilmore asked permission to bury
+his dead comrades. This privilege was emphatically denied. What was
+done with their bodies by the Filipinos is hard to tell, but in all
+probability, as was customary with the natives, they cut them into
+fragments and threw them away.
+
+The ones who were mortally wounded, but who were still alive, were
+placed under a tree by Gilmore and his comrades, and left to die. The
+Lieutenant asked that a native doctor be summoned to give them aid,
+but it was not done. What their fate was Eternity alone will reveal.
+
+Gilmore and his comrades picked up the lesser wounded and carried
+them, and together the whole procession was marched inland about a
+mile to the Filipino Commandante's headquarters.
+
+Here they were questioned at length. Gilmore asked permission to
+write a note to the commander of the Yorktown telling him of their
+fate. Permission was granted, but the note was never delivered. The
+two scouts who went ashore, returned to the Yorktown in the afternoon
+and reported that they had heard heavy firing up the river.
+
+After waiting several days for news of some kind for them, and finally
+concluding that they were either captured or killed, the crew of
+the Yorktown, heavy-hearted over their failure and their sacrifice,
+steamed back to Manila.
+
+During the afternoon of the same day that the battle took place,
+the American prisoners were ordered to march to an old bamboo church
+in the northern outskirts of the little town of Baler, a mile and
+a half farther on. By this time the wounded men were suffering
+terribly. Little Venville's ankle had swollen badly. From his four
+wounds he had bled so much that he had grown faint. Therefore, he
+and several of the others had to be carried.
+
+En route to their new destination, the Americans passed in sight of
+the old stone church being used as a fortress by the Spanish garrison
+whom they had originally set out to relieve. The Americans had gone
+to the Philippines to fight the Spaniards. They were now sacrificing
+their lives to save them.
+
+At the bamboo church, an old Filipino with a kindly face and a manner
+that elevated him above his fellow tribesmen, came in to see them. He
+examined the wounded and then disappeared. Presently he returned with
+some large leaves that resembled rhubarb, under his arm. Out of the
+big stems of these native herbs he squeezed a milky secretion which he
+permitted to drop into the gaping wounds of the Americans. The torture
+of the wounded occasioned by this liquid was damnable. The men grew
+deathly pale. They rolled and screamed and begged to be shot. But
+it did not last long. In ten minutes the torture had ceased, the men
+became quiet, the swelling around their wounds was gradually reduced,
+and their temperatures soon lowered. The herb doctor evidently knew
+his business.
+
+The next day the Filipinos received orders from Aguinaldo, who,
+with his appointed congress, was now at San Isidro, to march the
+captured Americans to his headquarters. Accordingly, the trip
+was undertaken. But the apprentice lad, Venville, was unable to
+go along. Obeying the stubborn orders of the rapacious Filipinos
+his comrades left him lying on the floor of the old rickety bamboo
+church,--wounded--uncared for--suffering--hungry--thirsty--dying. A
+year later the assistance of the entire naval organization in the
+Philippines was given to the task of trying to ascertain from the
+Filipinos in the neighborhood of Baler some information concerning
+the lad's whereabouts or his burial place, but no trace of him,
+dead or alive, could ever be found.
+
+
+                An aged mother, ill and bowed,
+                  Keeps asking, "Where's my boy?"
+                But zephyrs from the Orient
+                  Refuse to bring the joy.
+
+
+Amid great privations the marching column crossed the mountains and
+the fertile plains on the opposite side, to the city of San Isidro. It
+was heralded in advance that the Americans were coming through the
+country. Obeying their greatest national instinct--curiosity--the
+natives assembled by thousands in the villages along the road. Every
+one of them kept crowding forward to get to touch the Americans to see
+what their skins felt like. Others were looking for the long feathers
+in their hair, which they had heard so much about. It was all the
+Filipino guards could do to restrain their own people. The latter,
+like monkeys, jabbered incessantly. Gilmore's men hurled back at them
+defiant epithets. They realized that involuntarily they had become
+the chief actors in a new moving circus.
+
+Again, when they reached San Isidro, a great throng of curious natives
+had come to town to see them. These fellows were very hostile to the
+Americans. It was all the native guard could do to keep the Filipinos
+from doing violence to them. Gilmore was again questioned at length
+and then he was separated from his comrades and all were hurried off
+to jail.
+
+In a few days it was rumored that the American army was approaching the
+city. Aguinaldo and his associates hurriedly prepared to leave. Orders
+were given to march the prisoners overland north and then westward
+across another range of high mountains to Arancay, on the western
+coast of Luzon,--a distance of 100 miles.
+
+This time the crowd of prisoners was greatly increased. At San
+Isidro there were added 600 Spaniards; a small tribe of mountain
+Negritos whom Aguinaldo had originally sent to fight the Americans,
+but who, being armed only with spears and bolos, soon got tired of
+seeing their number decrease so rapidly before American riflemen,
+and refused to fight, and who were later imprisoned and terribly
+misused by Aguinaldo's selected guards; and eighteen Americans in
+addition to Gilmore's party (total twenty-six Americans), who had
+been captured in as many different ways around Manila by the crafty,
+cunning Filipinos. Among them was Frank Stone, of the U. S. Signal
+Corps, captured by some "amigos" (friendly natives) on the railroad
+track near Manila, while out strolling one Sunday afternoon; Private
+Curran, of the 16th U.S. Infantry who was grabbed within fifty feet
+of his own outpost, gagged and dragged into captivity; also a civilian
+who had gone to the Philippines to sell liquor.
+
+This fellow was captured by the Filipinos in the outskirts of Manila
+while he was searching for a small boatload of stolen beer. He was the
+life of the expedition. He took his captivity as a joke, told stories
+to keep the prisoners good natured, and painted on ever boulder that
+he passed the seemingly sacrilegious words, "Drink Blank's beer on
+the road to H----." It was, however, this harmless practice that later
+on enabled the American relief party to follow the prisoners' trail.
+
+After reaching the western shore of Luzon, the party was marched
+northward along the beach, another 100 miles, to the city of
+Vigan. Here they were imprisoned for three months longer. The sudden
+presence of an American war-ship in the harbor, off Vigan, caused the
+natives to abandon that city and start inland with their prisoners
+for some mountain fastness. The Americans were separated from the
+rest of the prisoners whom they never saw again.
+
+High up in the mountains of northern Luzon, two of the American boys
+were taken sick with fever and fell down, exhausted. The Filipino
+lieutenant who had charge of the prisoners, ordered them to go on;
+they could not. He threatened to shoot them. Gilmore interceded for
+them without avail. The Americans refused to leave their Anglo-Saxon
+comrades and prepared to fight. At this moment the Filipino officer
+himself was suddenly taken ill, and by the time he was able to advance,
+the sick Americans were able to go along.
+
+A few days later they struggled over the crest of the divide and came
+upon the headwaters of a beautiful mountain torrent dancing down the
+rocky ledges in its onward course to the sea. At a widened place in
+the canon, the Filipinos withdrew from the Americans, and with guns
+in hand took their positions on the rocks round-about and above them.
+
+"Prepare to die," said Gilmore to his companions; "they are going to
+shoot us." Calling the Filipino lieutenant to his side Gilmore asked
+him why he did not shoot them on the opposite side of the mountains,
+and not have made them make all of that hard climb for nothing.
+
+The native officer said in reply: "My orders were to shoot all of
+you when I got you up in the mountains, where, in all probability,
+your bodies would be destroyed by wild animals and no trace of them
+ever be found by your countrymen; but a few nights ago when you showed
+me that crucifix tattooed on your chest while you were a midshipman
+in America, I decided not to carry out my order, but to let you all
+go free. I may be punished for disobedience of orders; but we are
+both bound together by the great Catholic church, and my conscience
+forbids that I should kill you."
+
+Gilmore replied: "You might as well shoot us as to set us free away
+up here in the mountains in our weakened condition with nothing to
+defend ourselves with against the savages whose territory we will have
+to cross in order to get to the sea. Can't you spare us at least two
+rifles and some ammunition? If you will do this, I will give you a
+letter which, should you fall into the hands of the Americans, will
+make you safe and bring you ample reward."
+
+The Filipino looked meditatingly at the ground for several moments,
+then he calmly said, "I shall not dare to do it. An American relief
+party, seeking your liberation, is close on our heels. They will
+protect and care for you. Goodby!"
+
+Gilmore did not believe him.
+
+Under cover of the night the Filipinos disappeared. In the morning,
+after nine long, tedious months of captivity resulting from Marie
+Sampalit's depredations,--sick, nearly starved, practically nude, with
+nothing but two battle axes and a bolo for both weapons of defense
+and for tools--the Americans at last found themselves free men in
+the wilds of northern Luzon, with positive death left behind, and
+with possible life and all of its happy associations still before them.
+
+Their first day of liberty was spent in preparing bamboo rafts on
+which to float down the tortuous, winding river to the sea. The next
+night they all slept well; and on the following morning, just after
+they had gotten up and begun to saunter around, everybody present was
+suddenly shocked by the shrill yell of a strong American voice. They
+all looked up, and while their hearts for a moment seemingly stopped
+beating and fairly rose in their throats, the liberated prisoners
+beheld the blue shirts and khaki trousers of Colonel Hare's rescue
+party that for several weeks had been on their trail.
+
+What rejoicing! The bony, ill-clad prisoners fell on the strong bosoms
+of their rescuers and wept.
+
+Colonel Hare's father, Judge Hare, of Washington, D.C., knew Gilmore
+personally. He had seen the military reports of his captivity among
+the natives. When his son bade him goodby as he started for the
+Philippines, Judge Hare said, "My boy, God bless you; find Gilmore
+and bring him home!" Colonel Hare had remained true to his trust.
+
+The party could not retrace their steps over the mountains, owing to
+the weakened condition of the prisoners and the lack of food. Their
+only chance for self-preservation and a possible return to civilization
+lay in carrying out Gilmore's designs to build bamboo rafts and float
+down the river to the sea. This was done. In going over rapids and
+water-falls, many rafts were destroyed and new ones had to be built.
+
+Two of the boys got the measles. The raft on which one of them,
+Private Day, was being transported, got smashed on the rocks and he
+was thrown into the water. He took cold and died the next day. His
+comrades took his body with them and did not bury it until they finally
+reached the little town of Ambulug, at the mouth of the stream they
+had been following, on the northern coast of Luzon. There, amid a
+simple but impressive ceremony, it was buried in the church-yard of
+the cathedral to await the resurrection morn.
+
+At Ambulug the Americans secured ox-carts drawn by caribous and drove
+along the beach to the city of Aparri, at the mouth of the Cagayan
+river. Here they were met by a detachment of American Marines who
+took them aboard a war-ship, lying out to sea, which carried them
+around the northwest promontory of Luzon to the city of Vigan on the
+western coast, at which place they had been imprisoned for so long.
+
+Here they met General Young who shook hands with each of them;
+congratulated the rescued and complimented the rescuers.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+DEATH OF GENERAL LAWTON.
+
+
+After the battle of Baler, Marie and a few native soldiers hastened
+westward in advance of the prisoners, to San Isidro to notify Aguinaldo
+who had moved his headquarters to that place, that the Americans were
+advancing northward in great numbers and that nothing could impede
+their progress. This information had previously been conveyed to the
+Filipino general from other sources, so that Marie found him in his
+so-called congress packed up and ready to move,--a thing they were
+forced to do a few days after the American prisoners arrived. She
+accompanied them for several long, tedious months, acting as cook for
+the expedition and serving in other capacities--none of them seeming
+to her to be ample reward for all she had done.
+
+Early in the coming fall, Marie, tired of Aguinaldo's game of
+hide-and-go-seek, and anxious to find out about her mother and to get
+into more fighting, if there be a chance, made her way back to Manila.
+
+But her conscience bothered her. She remembered that broken oath and
+many other acts of wanton treachery that would shock the civilized
+world. She feared that her own life would soon be sought either by
+the Americans or by the Filipinos. Accordingly she suggested to her
+mother that they again go to her aunt's in the little town of Angono
+at the north end of Lake Laguna de Bay, where she had left her mother
+stationed when last they had parted. Her mother, growing old and
+nervous through accumulated years, past grievances, hard work and the
+strain of the present conflict, favored the plan; and so they departed
+on December 2nd, taking the same road over McLeod's Hill and on down
+over the Santa Mesa bridge that they had traveled on February 4th.
+
+Before leaving Manila she learned through the private Filipino Junta
+which was secretly assisting in the war by accumulating funds for
+its prosecution and by distributing among the native troops the
+inflammatory literature which was being promiscuously sent out by
+the people in the United States who opposed the war, that a secret
+reward of $10,000. had been offered for the death of General Lawton.
+
+About the middle of December, 1899, the General had returned to
+Manila from another telling campaign northward, when he learned that
+the Filipinos were assembling in large numbers under one of their
+fearless leaders, General Geronemo, on the San Mateo river, but a
+few miles out of Manila, for the purpose of making one more attempt
+to break through the American lines guarding that city.
+
+On December 17, Marie heard that another attack was to be made on
+Manila, so she left her mother at Angono and made her way to the
+Filipinos' camp along the San Mateo river, only a few miles south of
+where she had crossed it at the rapids the morning after she had been
+liberated under oath by Major Allison.
+
+The next day, she was in secret consultation with Geronemo, and she
+disclosed to him all the information she had concerning the defenses
+of Manila.
+
+That evening, Filipino scouts, dressed in female attire, brought to
+General Geronemo the news that the Americans, under General Lawton,
+who was supposed to be away up in the northern part of Luzon, had
+anticipated his movements and were assembling in the woods on the
+opposite side of the valley in large numbers, possibly for a night
+attack.
+
+Marie told Geronemo what she had learned while in Manila concerning
+the reward that had been secretly offered for the killing of General
+Lawton. He knew all about it and confirmed the offer. She told him all
+about her training as a marksman with the Spanish on Corregidor island
+and of her subsequent experience, and said she knew General Lawton
+well; that she could single him out, and in case he led his troops,
+as he usually did in battle, she was sure she could capture the prize.
+
+A place of unusual safety and concealment was selected along the
+Filipinos' lines, directly in front of the center of the probable point
+of attack by the Americans, for Marie, and for a Filipino lieutenant
+and a corporal, both of whom were also good shots.
+
+Geronemo had instructed them that Marie was to have the first three
+shots at the general, in case he appeared on the scene of battle. If
+she failed to hit him, the lieutenant was then to try it. After he
+had taken three shots, if he, too, failed, the corporal was to be
+given a chance.
+
+The next morning, December 19, the American line of battle came out
+of the woods on the opposite side of the valley, ready to charge on
+the Filipinos' position. The morning was bright and clear, so that
+General Lawton, with his tall figure, resplendent uniform and large
+white helmet, could easily be discerned by the entire Filipino command.
+
+"I'll fix him," whispered Marie, "just wait till the firing begins,
+so that I can shoot without attracting attention to our position."
+
+In a moment, the Filipinos opened fire on the Americans all along
+the line. The latter sought cover. General Lawton remained erect. He
+made an ideal target. Marie took careful aim. "Bang!" went her rifle,
+and at that very moment this peerless leader of men, this hero of
+several wars, was shot through the heart and fell dead in the arms
+of his aide. His only words were, "I'm shot."
+
+"See that! What did I tell you?" snapped out Marie, "I told you I'd
+get him! Now for my dinero." (money).
+
+The Americans were so angered because of the sudden death of their
+beloved commander that they made a mad rush forward, without orders,
+and swept the Filipino army from the field.
+
+Marie returned to Manila where she claimed the reward for having shot
+the general. The lieutenant who was with her claimed that he did it,
+and by promising half of the bounty to the corporal for swearing to
+the lie, he proved it. Meager reports of the affair state that only
+$7000 of the money was actually paid over. Like Aguinaldo who crept
+into a cave northwest of Manila and sold out his country during the
+insurrection of 1896, and then could not collect his fee, so Marie,
+too, found herself deprived of the compensation for her bloody deed.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+NORTH-BOUND
+
+
+The controversy over the distribution of the fund in Manila for the
+death in any form of General Lawton permitted the unholy scheme to
+simmer its way into publicity. The United States authorities employed
+secret detectives to investigate the matter and if possible to locate
+the persons who claimed to be responsible for the act. Marie soon
+found herself under surveillance and she quickly left the city.
+
+Making her way north on horse back along the same route she had taken
+when on her way to Baler about a year before, she came to the city
+of San Miguel where one of the hardest battles of the war had been
+fought. The troops engaged in this fight had become so disorganized
+that all formation by regiments, companies, etc., had been broken
+up. Unfortunately, one of the Americans' dead privates could not be
+identified. He was buried where he fell, and a board tombstone was
+placed at the head of his grave, on which was carved this lonely word,
+
+
+                            "UNKNOWN".
+
+
+As Marie passed over the old field, she saw this grave and read the
+solemn word on its headstone. "Alas!" she muttered, "I wonder if the
+same sad fate will some day overtake me."
+
+The body of this "unknown" soldier was exhumed by the government a few
+months later and brought back to the United States for burial. Upon
+its arrival the following pathetic poem appeared in "Leslie's Weekly";
+
+
+                JUST AN "UNKNOWN"
+
+                After the fight was over,
+                  They found him stark and dead,
+                Where all the bamboo thicket
+                  Was splashed and stained and red.
+                No name was missed at roll call,
+                  Not one among them knew
+                The slender, boyish figure
+                  Arrayed in army blue.
+
+                Among our fallen soldiers
+                  They brought him o'er the deep,
+                And with the nation's heroes
+                  They laid him down to sleep.
+                A starry flag above him,
+                  And on the simple stone
+                That marked his final bivouac,
+                  The single word, "Unknown."
+
+                Perchance a mother watches,
+                  Her eyes with weeping dim,
+                Or sweetheart waits the postman
+                  In vain for news of him.
+                While snow of winter freezes,
+                  And April violets thrust
+                Sweet blossoms through the grasses
+                  Above his nameless dust.
+
+                But when the last great trumpet
+                  Shall sound the reveille,
+                And all the blue battalions
+                  March up from land and sea,
+                He shall awake to glory--
+                  Who sleeps unknown to fame,
+                And with Columbia's bravest
+                  Will answer to his name.
+
+
+Her personal safety demanded that she continue her journey northward,
+without delay; also her inclination to rejoin Aguinaldo and his
+troops--although his exact whereabouts were unknown--invited her in
+this direction.
+
+At San Isidro, from which place Aguinaldo had been driven, she
+saw some American soldiers administering the water cure to some
+Filipinos in order to make them reveal the whereabouts of their wily
+general. Marie was angry. She yearned to shoot, but she was no longer
+on the aggressive; she was now a fugitive from justice. At this
+place she inspected the old Filipino prison and on its walls found
+the names of Gilmore and his party, whom she had helped to capture at
+Baler, who had been imprisoned there, and who were still alive when
+Aguinaldo was driven from the city of San Isidro by the approach of
+the Americans. She determined to take her revenge on them for this
+water cure punishment, if she ever found them. But the opportunity
+never came. So journeying on toward the northern part of Luzon she had
+many experiences, and she came in contact with tribes whom she had
+never seen before and whose dialect was foreign to her. Many things
+combined to retard her progress. Often she grew very weary and would
+have turned back, except for fear.
+
+Following up the valley of the Pampanga river and thence on northward
+along the Barat, she passed through the province of Nueva Ecija,
+crossed the Caraballo mountains which form its northern boundary,
+and then entered the province of Nueva Vizcaya, where she came upon
+the head-waters of the Rio Magat river.
+
+In crossing the Caraballo mountains she made her way through a deep
+gorge at night. It was now about the middle of February. A full moon
+shone at its best. The weather was ideal. Journeying was abnormally
+pleasant. Under favorable conditions, during times of peace, the trip
+she was taking would have been a delightful outing. Just now things
+were different. Small garrisons of American soldiers had crowded
+forward and were occupying the largest cities along her route. As yet
+she had not gotten beyond them. "A guilty conscience needs no accuser";
+everywhere that she went she imagined herself to be under suspicion.
+
+Far up in the Caraballos she came across a little mountain torrent
+which leaped down over the mountain side from one rocky ledge to
+another at quite regular intervals in a series of waterfalls until it
+beat itself into a turbulent spray in the bed of the chasm below. The
+laughing moon filtered its beaming rays through the thin sheet of
+shimmering water as it danced down its course from precipice to
+precipice, and seemingly converted it into a great silvery stair-way
+connecting earth with heaven. Marie's heart throbbed with emotion. The
+dashing of the falling water on the rocks below in the bed of the canon
+made a hollow sound as its echoes reverberated through the gorge above.
+
+A half mile farther up, the valley widened somewhat; and finding here
+some grass for her pony to forage on, she stopped for the night. The
+flimsy saddle was removed from her horse and converted into a crude
+pillow, in true cowboy style. Marie was uneasy. This was the first
+night in all her adventures that she had been absolutely alone,
+separated from both friends and foes, with no house to shelter her
+weary head, with the cloudless canopy of the silent heavens arched
+above her, the silvery moonbeams dancing in her face, and with
+no voice, save the echoes of her own, to answer back the whispers
+of night.
+
+It is often only in such a silent nook as this, with no one present
+but God and self, that humanity asserts itself and the tenderest
+portions of the human soul become paramount and give rise to
+sacred thoughts. Even the savage cannot escape it, for he, too,
+feels his responsibility to something outside of self. No doubt the
+self-conscious criminal would be the most susceptible to it.
+
+What a night for Marie! Solitude gave rise to fear; fear, to conscious
+criminality; a sense of wrong-doing, to grief. Would morning never
+come? Every time she fell into a doze her sleep was disturbed by dreams
+of the past. Recollections of her dying benefactor in the woods by
+the San Mateo river, of Gilmore's comrades bleeding by his side, and
+of Lawton in the arms of his aide, filled her soul with remorse and
+suggested to her with an unspeakable vividness that in all probability
+she would pay the penalty on both sides of the grave. Awakening from
+one awful dream, she would, after listening to the stillness of the
+night for a time, lapse into another. Again she would suddenly awake
+and begin to fumble her rosary and repeat selections from a Catholic
+prayer book. Would she dare to turn back? Behind her was certain death;
+before her, the possibility of life. She resolved to go on.
+
+The night whiled away. Her pony ate his fill and lay down to
+rest. Beaded dew drops collected themselves in close proximity upon
+the grasses and foliage about her feet. The cool mountain air from
+without and fear from within caused her to shiver a great deal. Day
+finally came; Marie rode on.
+
+Following the Magat river she finally reached the city of Bayombong
+with a population of 20,000 people. Here she learned from the natives
+that Aguinaldo and a loyal remnant of his appointed congress had
+passed through the city ahead of her, en route northward.
+
+At Bayombong she was advised to follow down the Magat river for
+twenty miles, then to bear to the northeast along the pathway made by
+Aguinaldo and his followers in their recent retreat. This she did,
+crossing another range of mountains near Fort Del Pilar, which had
+been erected by the Filipinos to circumvent as well as to prevent the
+progress of the Americans, should they attempt to follow them. On
+the farther side of this slope she came upon the headwaters of the
+Rio Grande de Cagayan river, which she followed on to the north for
+several weeks, enjoying the hospitality of the natives along the
+course, until at last she came upon the beautiful city of Ilagan at
+the confluence of the Cagayan and Pinacanalan rivers.
+
+It was now late in April. Marie was tired and needed rest. At Ilagan
+she was cordially received by the curious natives who were eager to
+learn some news concerning the war which was being conducted several
+hundred miles further south. Marie grew cheerful. There were no
+Americans in the city, and nobody knew of any within the valley. She
+felt that at last she had successfully eluded her supposed pursuers and
+that she was safe. Ilagan is the capital of Isabella province. It has
+a population of approximately 60,000 people. Marie's natural ability,
+information gathered in the school of experience, knowledge of the
+details of the war, and her willingness to talk (quite a number at
+Ilagan could speak Spanish) made of her a sort of responsive idol
+for the entire populace.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+CROSSING THE SIERRA MADRES.
+
+
+She remained at Ilagan until the middle of June, when it began to be
+rumored that the Americans were preparing to invade the Cagayan valley,
+not only soldiers from the south but with the "mosquito fleet" coming
+up the river from its mouth at the extreme northern end of the island
+of Luzon. Nobody in the city seemed to know just where Aguinaldo had
+gone. Part of his advance guard had arrived in the city some three
+months before, but he had not come, and his soldiers had soon departed
+for the southeast, following the valley of the Pinacanalan river.
+
+Tired of her surroundings and impatient to join Aguinaldo, Marie
+departed by the same route that his soldiers had taken. From an
+old native living all alone in a bamboo shack on the bank of the Rio
+Masagan river, which empties into the Pinacanalan about eighteen miles
+southeast of Ilagan, she learned that Aguinaldo and his troops had
+started up the valley of the Masagan. This stream rises high up near
+the summit of the Sierra Madre mountains which parallel the eastern
+coast of northern Luzon for nearly five hundred miles, and are inland
+from the coast from ten to thirty miles.
+
+Marie had with her three trusted natives from Ilagan. She did not want
+to spend another night alone in the mountains. After proceeding up
+the Masagan for thirty-five miles to a place where its valley narrows
+itself to a gorge, its bed was so strewn with huge boulders that it
+became impossible to travel any longer on horseback; therefore, one
+of the natives was sent back with the horses, and Marie and the two
+others continued the ascent on foot, taking with them such equipment
+and provisions as they could conveniently carry.
+
+After many hardships they succeeded in crossing the range in safety
+and soon found themselves descending the other side. A Filipino
+scouting party was met at the evening of the first day's tramp down
+the Pacific slope. They were well supplied with food--thing Marie and
+her companions greatly needed. From them it was learned that Aguinaldo
+and his body guard and quite a complement of Filipino soldiers were
+secreted at the little town of Palanan on a small stream by the same
+name, about ten miles back from the coast and lying directly east
+of them on the journey which they were pursuing. This party escorted
+them to Filipino headquarters, which they reached July 10, 1900.
+
+Marie was cordially welcomed by Aguinaldo, who restored her to a
+position on his staff and secured from her the identical information
+which he desired relative to the movement of the American troops, and
+the very information, strange to say, which led to his own discovery
+and capture by General Funston of the American forces in March of
+the following year.
+
+Aguinaldo learned from Marie that from the Filipinos' standpoint, the
+war around Manila had been a dismal failure. He decided, therefore,
+to send one of his trusted generals south by practically the same
+route over which Marie had come, with information to the Filipino
+troops east and south of Manila to move all their available forces
+north with the quickest possible despatch and to place them under his
+immediate command so that he might not only render himself immune from
+capture, but take the initiative and oppose the American campaign in
+the valley of the Cagayan river.
+
+In December, 1900, about three months before his capture by General
+Funston, Aguinaldo, having learned that the Americans were making their
+way in great numbers into the valley of the Cagayan, asked Marie to
+take up duty as a spy again; to recross the Sierra Madre mountains;
+visit the American lines; ascertain their number of soldiers on duty
+in the valley on the opposite side of the mountains and then to bring
+this information to him, so that when reinforcements should arrive
+he would know better how to undertake the campaign.
+
+To this, Marie willingly assented, but she insisted that she could
+not make the trip alone over the rugged Sierra Madre mountains;
+that she had nearly famished crossing them the first time. Aguinaldo
+therefor fitted out a little expedition consisting of eight Filipinos,
+in addition to Marie, and a pack-train of fourteen ponies to accompany
+her over the divide. Nine of the animals were for riding purposes;
+the other five were to pack the supplies,--three of them for the
+outward trip, two for the incoming. In addition to the rice which
+they took along, they were instructed to forage as much as possible.
+
+On December 9, the party started out on their perilous undertaking. A
+point far up on the mountain slope, near a refreshing mineral spring,
+having been reached on December 17, the party halted and established
+a sub-base for their return trip. It was evident to them that they
+had struck the wrong trail and were going to be compelled to send
+Marie back through a different gorge from the one by which she and
+her associates had come over a few months before.
+
+Here the party divided into two relays--one to accompany Marie close
+to the top of the mountains, the other to remain where it was until
+her guides returned. At this temporary base three Filipinos and two
+pack-horses were left. The Filipinos thus left behind were instructed
+to hunt and trap all they could till their comrades returned.
+
+The on-going squad, consisting of Marie and five native soldiers, took
+with them their six riding ponies and three of the pack-horses. They
+departed from their comrades early in the morning, December 18. By
+night of the second day they had gotten so near the crest they could
+plainly discern that in one long march Marie could cross the divide
+and get a safe distance down the slope on the opposite side. Coming to
+an old stone church they dismounted and established themselves for the
+night. It was December 19,--the anniversary of Lawton's death. Marie
+remarked about it.
+
+This old church had partly fallen down. Vines and mosses had so
+interlaced themselves in climbing over its rocky walls and across its
+openings that they had to be cut away by the unwelcome intruders before
+they could gain an entrance. The stone cross on the front gable was
+still in place; but the old mahogany door had long since been torn
+from its hinges by the mountain storms, and it lay in a state of
+decay on the ground. An earthquake had destroyed part of the roof,
+and had caused the west wall to become inclined and to crumble.
+
+Within, one end of the old altar was still found to be intact. The
+priest's pulpit chair had become ivy-mantled, and one handle had rotted
+from its fastenings and had fallen to the floor. Statues of the Saints
+had pitched from their moorings in the alcoves along the walls and were
+lying face-downward or standing on their heads amid the debris below.
+
+What hands had built this old church, none could tell. It seemed
+certain that no human being had entered it for over a century. The
+mountain tribes who had lifted into place the huge chalk stones
+that composed its massive walls, under the devout leadership of some
+pious monk, for a place of worship, had long since perished from the
+earth. The mountain game which rendered possible their habitation in
+this altitude had vanished. Everything and everybody had evidently
+given way before some fierce invasion of one of their southern tribes.
+
+Marie was busy cleaning off the trash from the massive rock that lay
+at the entrance to the door-way. "1765," said she; "come, see the
+date chiseled in the rock! I wonder what has become of the tribe that
+built it?"
+
+A soldier who had made his entrance by one of the window openings,
+was busily engaged in prying up a huge flat stone just back of the
+altar. He had it loosened; he called for help to remove it. When the
+stone had been overturned and had fallen back onto its aged neighbors,
+some soft damp earth beneath it was slowly scraped away.
+
+"Listen!" said the native who on bended knees was doing the
+sacrilegious work, "Did you hear that grating noise?"
+
+He scraped again with his bolo turned edgewise, and gripping the back
+of it firmly with both hands. "Do you hear it?" said he. "It's here!"
+
+In a few minutes a metallic box was pried out of the earth wherein
+it had lain unmolested for many years.
+
+"Can you read the inscription on it?" asked Marie.
+
+Carefully the sediment and rust shales were removed. The grooves in
+the letters and figures of the inscription were carefully cleaned
+out with a knife. It read
+
+
+                             FATHER
+                            JUADANEZ
+                              1768.
+
+
+"The old father has been dead a long time," said the fellow who was
+doing the details of the work.
+
+"I wonder," said Marie, "if we really ought to disturb his bones."
+
+"Do you suppose they put any valuables in the little chest when they
+sealed it up?" asked another.
+
+"It has always been customary to put in the sacred urn," said Marie.
+
+"Cut it open!" commanded a corporal.
+
+"I can't," said the robber; "we'll have to build a fire and melt
+it open."
+
+This they did; and in it they found the dust of his bones and a number
+of valuables including the Patricia's gold-lined cup which Marie took
+and hung on her belt.
+
+That night a terrible storm swept over the mountains. Marie and her
+companions crept into the old church for refuge. The ponies had been
+given some rice and then set free to forage as best they could. They
+were stampeded by the violence of the wind and rain.
+
+The morning broke cool and clear. Everybody was astir at day-break. The
+ponies were gone, but plenty of rice remained. Marie soon saw a way
+out of the difficulty. She left three of her men at the old church to
+await the return of the two who were to accompany her until she reached
+some plan for speedy descent on the opposite side of the mountains.
+
+The advance party started out early on foot, taking with them such
+a supply of rice and bananas as they could carry. Only three miles
+farther up they entered a canon whose rocky walls, at places almost
+perpendicular and seeming to form pillars for the sky, were so close
+together at their base that it would have been impossible to have used
+the ponies for travel, even though they had not retreated in the storm.
+
+Good progress was made, and by sun-down, December 20, they had reached
+the upper rivulets of what afterwards proved to be the north fork of
+the Rio Masagan, instead of the south fork which she had previously
+followed. The beautiful valleys below them were plainly visible as
+the sun sank to rest over the distant hills. A small native village
+could be seen on the bank of the stream a few miles ahead. The party
+bivouacked for the night.
+
+Early the next morning, after a light lunch of cold rice, Marie was
+off on her important mission.
+
+Her two escorts made their way back to the old church, where after
+another night's rest, the five undertook their return journey to
+the sub-base at the spring far down the mountain side. When they
+reached this camp they found their ponies all returned to it; and
+their comrades, thinking they had all been captured or slain by the
+Americans, were hastily preparing to retreat. The entire party, except
+Marie, got back to Aguinaldo's camp at Palanan, on Christmas Day.
+
+Marie, was therefore, left to arrange for her own return, after her
+spy work had been completed. She contemplated securing help from
+the natives at Ilagan, among whom she had previously lived for a
+few months.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+COMPENSATION
+
+
+On the evening of December 24, 1900,--one of those dark nights in
+the Philippines when the air seems so dense that you can almost
+take hold of it with your hands--when the heavy clouds blanket the
+earth so closely that the terrible thunders seem to shake the earth
+in its orbit, with the deep-toned diapason of their melody--when
+the lightening bugs flutter from twig to twig, revealing their
+lanterned wings--when the human heart beats with a conscious thump
+in anticipation of something awful--when those who are out alone
+whistle to give themselves courage--when the zigzag openings rent
+through the clouds by the vicious lightning flashes almost reveal
+Eternity;--Christmas Eve, that sacred occasion which we all celebrate
+and shall continue to celebrate till the end of time, to commemorate
+the birth of our Christ,--a sharp-eyed, dare-devil Filipino crept
+slowly out of the city of Ilagan along a foot-path toward the
+Americans' camp about a mile north of that city.
+
+When so near to the Americans that their out-posts were plainly visible
+during the flashes of lightning, the Filipino spy crept into a bamboo
+thicket not over fifty feet from an American sentry. After lying there
+for a half hour, waiting for the storm to come, the native grew a
+trifle bolder and arose to his knees. That moment the sharp eyes of
+the sentry caught him.
+
+"Corporal of the Guard!" called the sentry in a loud voice.
+
+The corporal, being suspicious that something unusual was taking place,
+in responding to the call took with him two armed privates.
+
+Approaching the sentry, with light steps and in a crouching attitude,
+the corporal said in a heavy whisper, "What's the matter, Jack?"
+
+The sentry was standing with gun in hand, loaded, cocked, and with
+bayonet fixed. Keeping his eye centered on the exact spot where he had
+last seen the slowly gravitating figure before him, the guard said
+in an undertone that denoted grave alarm, "Do you see that thicket
+just to the left of that big mango tree?"
+
+"Yes;" said the corporal in a whisper, "What's the trouble?"
+
+"There's a man in there," said the sentry. "I saw him quite plainly at
+first--and I think he's got a gun in his hand. You better watch out,
+boys. He's still there."
+
+The corporal and the two privates fixed the bayonets on their
+Krag-Jorgensons, filled the magazines, slipped a shell into the
+barrel of each rifle, cocked them, crouched close to the ground,
+some ten feet apart, and began to move forward, a step at a time,
+between the flashes of lightening. Each time it would flash, they
+would peer into the thicket. Each step brought them nearer.
+
+"There he lies!," said one of the privates in a quick out-spoken voice.
+
+"Amigo," (a friend) said the stretched-out form, as three guns were
+raised in unison with the anxious muzzles pointing directly at him.
+
+"Este no quere combate" (you don't desire to fight), said the corporal,
+in crude Spanish.
+
+"Mucho amigo" (very friendly), came the reply.
+
+"Vamose aque!" (come here), commanded the corporal.
+
+With his eyes fixed in theirs, the Filipino raised himself slowly up
+and came toward the three Americans who stood but twelve feet away.
+
+"Take him by the arms," said the corporal to the two privates who were
+with him, "while I look behind that rice-dyke to see if he had a gun."
+
+"Here's what the rascal was up to," said the corporal, holding a
+Mauser above his head. "Good thing you saw him when you did, Jack."
+
+The storm was coming nearer; the first gust of wind had just struck
+them. It blew back the Filipino's little checkered frock. The corporal
+saw a glitter.
+
+"Watch out! boys, he's got a machete under his coat," said the
+corporal.
+
+He was searched for more weapons and then marched inside the American
+lines and taken directly to headquarters. A drum-head court was
+convened at once and the prisoner led in.
+
+With hands clinched, muscles taut, eyes piercing at the court, he
+listened to the reading of the charge:
+
+"Caught acting as a spy for the enemy in violation of the Articles
+of War; armed, with intent to take the life of an American sentry
+on guard!"
+
+After the testimony had been taken, the prisoner was given a chance
+to speak, but he absolutely refused to do so, even though addressed
+in several different languages and dialects.
+
+"He spoke Spanish to us as we captured him," interjected the corporal.
+
+"GUILTY!"
+
+said the lieutenant-colonel who was presiding, in a firm military
+tone. "The court fixes the penalty at death, and sentences the prisoner
+to be shot at sun-rise."
+
+"Remove him, Sergeant, and detail a firing squad to execute the order
+of the court!"
+
+As the prisoner was led away, the lieutenant-colonel dropped his
+chin in the palms of his hands as he rested his elbows on his knees,
+and muttered in a semi-regretful way: "I hate to do it; but in the
+past we have always been so chicken-hearted about punishing these
+blood-thirsty natives that they have now come to regard our kindness
+as cowardice. I can't help but feel that it will bring the war to a
+close quicker if we deal with them hereafter with a good firm hand."
+
+"I wonder what province the young fellow came from," said a major
+who was sitting near.
+
+"I really don't know," replied the lieutenant-colonel: "his face shows
+him to be a Tagalo. Certain it is that he didn't come from Isabella
+province in which we are now campaigning. I wouldn't be surprised if
+Aguinaldo were near here and if he had sent this young dare-devil to
+cut down our sentry, so as to make an attack upon us tonight during
+the storm."
+
+Toward morning the storm subsided. At day-break a comparatively shallow
+grave was hastily dug near the edge of a little bamboo thicket on
+a slightly elevated piece of ground. As the flickering rays of the
+tropical sun began to shoot above the pale, ashen-gray hue of the
+eastern horizon, the prisoner was led to the foot of his prospective
+tomb. The firing squad took its place in line.
+
+The guns had been carefully loaded in advance for their deadly work;
+all but one contained blank cartridges. As usual, after loading, the
+guns were intermixed, so that no man might know which one contained
+the deadly bullet.
+
+"Ready!" commanded the sergeant who had charge of the squad,--the
+corporal having taken his usual place in line with his men.
+
+"Click," went the hammers of the rifles in unison, as they were
+brought to a full cock.
+
+"Aim!" came the next command in a firmer tone. The soldiers brought
+their rifles to their shoulders. Every barrel was pointed at the
+chest of the prisoner, who now for the first time, began to tremble
+and turn a sickly yellow.
+
+"Fire!" commanded the sergeant.
+
+"Bang!" went the united roar of the guns; and as the light powder smoke
+cleared away and the echoes reverberated through the woods of northern
+Luzon, the firing squad stepped forward to view their heroic dead.
+
+A private jumped into the grave and turned the corpse over onto
+its back.
+
+That night Frank W. Pugh, of the regular army, a member of this
+unfortunate firing squad, who died later at Fort Worth, Texas, of
+fever contracted in the Philippines, sitting in his little dog-tent,
+meditating, wrote in his diary, which is now preserved in the archives
+at Washington with other relics of the war, the following appropriate
+poem:
+
+
+                A CHRISTMAS COURT-MARTIAL
+
+                "The night was dark and threatening rain,
+                  No stars were in the sky;
+                We caught him hiding in the pines--
+                  A Filipino spy.
+                A slender youth with coal black eyes,
+                  Brim full of frightened tears;
+                We turned him over to the guard,
+                  I fear with callous jeers.
+
+                Next morning it was Christmas day,
+                  The sun was shining hot,
+                A drum-head court had said, "The spy,
+                  Is sentenced to be shot."
+                Erect before the officers,
+                  He still disdained to speak,
+                Although a single crystal drop,
+                  Empearled his olive cheek.
+
+                Upon a long and hurried march,
+                  In light array, you see,
+                We could not take the boy along,
+                  So stood him near a tree;
+                Told off the little firing squad,
+                  And ordered it in line.
+                One gun was loaded in the lot--
+                  I hope it was not mine.
+
+                Birds in the branches overhead
+                  Sang softly in the heat.
+                The grave, a trench of steaming sand,
+                  Gaped yellow at his feet;
+                He faced us with a dauntless air,
+                  Although his lips were white;--
+                Our grim old Sergeant turned away,
+                  He could not stand the sight.
+
+                A flash, a roar, a cloud of smoke,
+                  And headlong to the ground
+                He fell face downward in the grave,
+                  And died without a sound.
+                We turned him over on his back,
+                  And DEATH the TRUTH confessed,
+                For through his open jacket peeped
+                  A Woman's tender breast."
+
+
+
+Marie Sampalit had earned her doom. After her grave had been filled,
+the soldier boys placed at its head a cartridge-box lid on which they
+inscribed the pitiful word,
+
+                            "UNKNOWN."
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Woman with a Stone Heart, by
+Oscar William Coursey
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WOMAN WITH A STONE HEART ***
+
+***** This file should be named 24705.txt or 24705.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/7/0/24705/
+
+Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net/ (This book was
+produced from scanned images of public domain material
+from the Google Print project.)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/old/20080227-24705.zip b/old/20080227-24705.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d8210af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/20080227-24705.zip
diff --git a/old/24705-h/20080227-24705-h.htm b/old/24705-h/20080227-24705-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e8e5e9c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/24705-h/20080227-24705-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,3347 @@
+
+<!DOCTYPE html
+PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd">
+
+<!-- This HTML file has been automatically generated from an XML source, using XSLT. If you find any mistakes, please edit the XML source. -->
+<html lang="en">
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1">
+
+<title>The Woman with a Stone Heart: A Romance of the Philippine War</title>
+<link rel="schema.DC" href="http://dublincore.org/documents/1998/09/dces/">
+<meta name="author" content="Oscar William Coursey (1873&#8211;&nbsp;)">
+<meta name="DC.Creator" content="Oscar William Coursey (1873&#8211;&nbsp;)">
+<meta name="DC.Title" content="The Woman with a Stone Heart: A Romance of the Philippine War">
+<meta name="DC.Date" content="#####">
+<meta name="DC.Language" content="en"><style type="text/css">
+/* Standard CSS stylesheet */
+
+
+
+body
+{
+font: 100%/1.2em "Times New Roman", Times, serif;
+margin: 1.58em 16%;
+text-align: left;
+}
+
+.titlePage
+{
+border: #DDDDDD 2px solid;
+margin: 3em 0% 7em 0%;
+padding: 5em 10% 6em 10%;
+}
+
+h1.docTitle
+{
+font-size:1.6em;
+line-height:2em;
+}
+
+h2.byline
+{
+font-size:1.1em;
+font-weight:normal;
+line-height:1.44em;
+}
+
+span.docAuthor
+{
+font-size:1.2em;
+font-weight:bold;
+}
+
+h2.docImprint
+{
+font-size:1.2em;
+font-weight:normal;
+}
+
+.transcribernote
+{
+background-color:#DDE;
+border:black 1px dotted;
+color:#000;
+font-family:sans-serif;
+font-size:80%;
+margin:2em 5%;
+padding:1em;
+}
+
+.div0
+{
+padding-top: 5.6em;
+}
+
+.div1
+{
+padding-top: 4.8em;
+}
+
+.index
+{
+font-size: 80%;
+}
+
+.div2
+{
+padding-top: 3.6em;
+}
+
+.div3, .div4, .div5
+{
+padding-top: 2.4em;
+}
+
+.footnotes .body,
+.footnotes .div1
+{
+padding: 0;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6
+{
+clear: both;
+font-style: normal;
+text-transform: none;
+}
+
+h3
+{
+font-size:1.2em;
+line-height:1.2em;
+}
+
+h3.label
+{
+font-size:1em;
+line-height:1.2em;
+margin-bottom:0;
+}
+
+h4
+{
+font-size:1em;
+line-height:1.2em;
+}
+
+h4.lghead
+{
+margin-left:10%;
+margin-right:10%;
+
+}
+
+.alignleft
+{
+text-align:left;
+}
+
+.alignright
+{
+text-align:right;
+}
+
+.alignblock
+{
+text-align:justify;
+}
+
+p.tb, hr.tb
+{
+margin-top: 1.6em;
+margin-bottom: 1.6em;
+margin-left: auto;
+margin-right: auto;
+text-align: center;
+}
+
+p.poetry
+{
+margin:0 10% 1.58em;
+}
+
+p.line
+{
+margin:0 10%;
+}
+
+p.argument, p.note, p.tocArgument
+{
+font-size:0.9em;
+line-height:1.2em;
+text-indent:0;
+}
+
+p.argument, p.tocArgument
+{
+margin:1.58em 10%;
+}
+
+p.tocChapter
+{
+margin:1.58em 0%;
+}
+
+p.tocSection
+{
+margin:0.7em 5%;
+}
+
+
+div.epigraph
+{
+font-size:0.9em;
+line-height:1.2em;
+width: 60%;
+margin-left: auto;
+}
+
+.epigraph .bibl
+{
+text-align: right;
+}
+
+.epigraph .poem
+{
+margin-left: 0;
+}
+
+.epigraph .line
+{
+margin-left: 0;
+text-indent: 0;
+}
+
+.trailer
+{
+clear: both;
+padding-top: 2.4em;
+padding-bottom: 1.6em;
+}
+
+.floatLeft
+{
+float:left;
+margin:10px 10px 10px 0;
+}
+
+.floatRight
+{
+float:right;
+margin:10px 0 10px 10px;
+}
+
+p.figureHead
+{
+font-size:100%;
+text-align:center;
+}
+
+.figure p
+{
+font-size:80%;
+margin-top:0;
+text-align:center;
+}
+
+p.smallprint,li.smallprint
+{
+color:#666666;
+font-size:80%;
+}
+
+span.parnum
+{
+font-weight: bold;
+}
+
+.leftnote
+{
+font-size:0.8em;
+height:0;
+left:1%;
+line-height:1.2em;
+position:absolute;
+text-indent:0;
+width:14%;
+}
+
+.pagenum
+{
+display:inline;
+font-size:70%;
+font-style:normal;
+margin:0;
+padding:0;
+position:absolute;
+right:1%;
+text-align:right;
+}
+
+a.noteref
+{
+font-size: 80%;
+text-decoration: none;
+vertical-align: 0.25em;
+}
+
+
+.red
+{
+color: red;
+}
+
+.displayfootnote
+{
+display: none;
+}
+
+div.footnotes
+{
+margin-top: 1em;
+padding: 0;
+}
+
+hr.fnsep
+{
+margin-left: 0;
+margin-right: 0;
+text-align: left;
+width: 25%;
+}
+
+p.footnote
+{
+font-size: 80%;
+margin-bottom: 0.5em;
+margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+p.footnote .label
+{
+float: left;
+text-align:left;
+width:2em;
+}
+
+.footnotes td, .footnotes th, .footnotes .tablecaption
+{
+font-size: 80%;
+}
+
+
+.poem
+{
+margin-left:5%;
+position:relative;
+text-align:left;
+width:90%;
+}
+
+.poem h4
+{
+font-weight:normal;
+margin-left:5em;
+}
+
+.poem .linenum
+{
+color:#777;
+font-size:90%;
+left:-2.5em;
+margin:0;
+position:absolute;
+text-align:center;
+text-indent:0;
+top:auto;
+width:1.75em;
+}
+
+.versenum
+{
+font-weight:bold;
+}
+
+/* right aligned page number in table of contents */
+.tocPagenum, .flushright
+{
+position: absolute;
+right: 16%;
+top: auto;
+}
+
+.footnotes .line
+{
+font-size:80%;
+margin:0 5%;
+}
+
+.poem .i0
+{
+display:block;
+margin-left:2em;
+}
+
+.poem .i1
+{
+display:block;
+margin-left:3em;
+}
+
+.poem .i2
+{
+display:block;
+margin-left:4em;
+}
+
+.poem .i3
+{
+display:block;
+margin-left:5em;
+}
+
+.poem .i4
+{
+display:block;
+margin-left:6em;
+}
+
+.poem .i5
+{
+display:block;
+margin-left:7em;
+}
+
+.poem .i6
+{
+display:block;
+margin-left:8em;
+}
+
+.poem .i7
+{
+display:block;
+margin-left:9em;
+}
+
+.poem .i8
+{
+display:block;
+margin-left:10em;
+}
+
+.poem .i9
+{
+display:block;
+margin-left:11em;
+}
+
+span.corr
+{
+border-bottom:1px dotted red;
+}
+
+span.abbr
+{
+border-bottom:1px dotted gray;
+}
+
+span.measure
+{
+border-bottom:1px dotted green;
+}
+
+.letterspaced
+{
+letter-spacing:0.2em;
+}
+
+.smallcaps
+{
+font-variant:small-caps;
+}
+
+
+.caps
+{
+text-transform:uppercase;
+}
+
+.fraktur
+{
+font-family: 'Walbaum-Fraktur';
+}
+
+hr
+{
+clear:both;
+height:1px;
+margin-left:auto;
+margin-right:auto;
+margin-top:1em;
+text-align:center;
+width:45%;
+}
+
+h2.docImprint,h1.docTitle,h2.byline,h2.docTitle,.aligncenter,div.figure
+{
+text-align:center;
+}
+
+h1,h2
+{
+font-size:1.44em;
+line-height:1.5em;
+}
+
+h1.label,h2.label
+{
+font-size:1.2em;
+line-height:1.2em;
+margin-bottom:0;
+}
+
+h5,h6
+{
+font-size:1em;
+font-style:italic;
+line-height:1em;
+}
+
+p,p.initial
+{
+text-indent:0;
+}
+
+p.firstlinecaps:first-line
+{
+text-transform: uppercase;
+}
+
+p.dropcap:first-letter
+{
+float: left;
+clear: left;
+margin: 0em 0.05em 0 0;
+padding: 0px;
+line-height: 0.8em;
+font-size: 420%;
+vertical-align:super;
+}
+
+.poem
+{
+padding: .5em 0% .5em 0%;
+}
+
+p.quote,div.blockquote,div.argument
+{
+font-size:0.9em;
+line-height:1.2em;
+margin:1.58em 5%;
+}
+
+.pagenum a, a.noteref:hover, a.hidden:hover, a.hidden
+{
+text-decoration:none;
+}
+
+
+ul { list-style-type: disc; }
+ol { list-style-type: decimal; }
+ol.AL { list-style-type: lower-alpha; }
+ol.AU { list-style-type: upper-alpha; }
+ol.RU { list-style-type: upper-roman; }
+ol.RL { list-style-type: lower-roman; }
+.lsoff { list-style-type: none; }
+
+.castlist, .castitem { list-style-type: none; }
+
+
+
+
+
+/* Supplement CSS stylesheet "style/arctic.css.xml
+" */
+
+
+
+body
+{
+background: #FFFFFF;
+font-family: "Times New Roman", Times, serif;
+}
+
+body, a.hidden
+{
+color: black;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6
+{
+color: #001FA4;
+font-family: Verdana, Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;
+}
+
+p.byline
+{
+font-style: italic;
+margin-bottom: 2em;
+}
+
+.figureHead, .noteref, span.leftnote, p.legend, .versenum, .stage
+{
+color: #001FA4;
+}
+
+.rightnote, .pagenum, .linenum, .pagenum a
+{
+color: #AAAAAA;
+}
+
+a.hidden:hover, a.noteref:hover
+{
+color: red;
+}
+
+p.dropcap:first-letter
+{
+color: #001FA4;
+font-weight: bold;
+}
+
+
+
+</style></head>
+<body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+Project Gutenberg's The Woman with a Stone Heart, by Oscar William Coursey
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Woman with a Stone Heart
+       A Romance of the Philippine War
+
+Author: Oscar William Coursey
+
+Release Date: February 27, 2008 [EBook #24705]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WOMAN WITH A STONE HEART ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net/ (This book was
+produced from scanned images of public domain material
+from the Google Print project.)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+
+<div class="front"><div class="titlePage">
+<h1 class="docTitle">The Woman with a Stone Heart</h1>
+<h2 class="docTitle">A Romance of the Philippine War.</h2>
+<h2 class="byline">By
+<br>
+<span class="docAuthor">O. W. Coursey</span>, (U. S. Vols.)
+<br>
+Author of
+<br>
+&#8220;History and Geography of the Philippine Islands.&#8221; <br>
+&#8220;Who&#8217;s Who In South Dakota.&#8221; <br>
+&#8220;Biography of General Beadle.&#8221; <br>
+&#8220;School Law Digest.&#8221;
+</h2>
+<h2 class="docImprint">All of these books are published and for sale by <br>
+THE EDUCATOR SUPPLY COMPANY <br>
+Mitchell, South Dakota
+</h2>
+</div><div class="div1"><span class="pagenum">
+[<a href="#d0e226">Contents</a>]
+</span><p class="aligncenter">Copyrighted 1914
+
+</p>
+<p class="aligncenter">By O. W. Coursey
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</p>
+<p class="aligncenter">The Woman with a Stone Heart
+
+
+
+</p>
+</div>
+<div class="div1"><span class="pagenum">
+[<a href="#d0e226">Contents</a>]
+</span><h2 class="normal">Introduction</h2>
+<p>To those whose love of adventure would cause them to plunge head-long into an abyss of vain glory, hoping at life&#8217;s sunset
+to reap a harvest contrary to the seed that were sown, let me suggest that you pause first to read the story of &#8220;The Woman
+With a Stone Heart,&#8221; Marie Sampalit, dare-devil of the Philippines.
+</p>
+<hr class="tb"><p>
+
+</p>
+<p>Perhaps we might profitably meditate for a few moments on the musings of Whittier:
+
+</p>
+<div class="&#xA; poem&#xA; ">
+<p class="line" style=""><span>&#8220;The tissue of the life to be
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>We weave in colors all our own,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>And in the field of destiny
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>We&#8217;ll reap as we have sown.&#8221;</span></p>
+</div>
+<p>&#8212;<span class="smallcaps">The Author.</span>
+
+
+</p>
+</div>
+<div class="div1"><span class="pagenum">
+[<a href="#d0e226">Contents</a>]
+</span><h2 class="normal">Dedication</h2>
+<p>To Her, who, as a bride of only eighteen months, stood broken-hearted on the depot platform and bade me a tearful farewell
+as our train of soldier boys started to war; who later, while I was Ten Thousand miles away from home on soldier duty in the
+Philippine Islands, became a Mother; and who, unfortunately, three months thereafter, was called upon to lay our first-born,
+Oliver D. Coursey, into his snow-lined baby tomb amid the bleak silence of a cold winter&#8217;s night, with no strong arm to bear
+her up in those awful hours of anguish and despair,
+</p>
+<hr class="tb"><p>
+
+</p>
+<p>My Soldier Wife, Julia,
+
+</p>
+<p>this book is most affectionately dedicated.
+
+</p>
+<div class="&#xA; poem&#xA; ">
+<p class="line" style=""><span>&#8220;Only a baby&#8217;s grave,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>Yet often we go and sit
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>By the little stone,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>And thank God to own,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>We are nearer heaven for it.&#8221;</span></p>
+</div>
+<p>&#8212;<span class="smallcaps">O. W. Coursey.</span>
+
+
+
+</p>
+</div>
+<div class="div1"><span class="pagenum">
+[<a href="#d0e226">Contents</a>]
+</span><h2 class="normal">List of Illustrations</h2>
+<ol class="lsoff">
+<li>&nbsp; <span class="tocPagenum">Page</span>
+
+</li>
+<li>Marie Sampalit <span class="tocPagenum">10</span></li>
+<li>Region Around Manila Bay <span class="tocPagenum">29</span></li>
+<li>Admiral Dewey <span class="tocPagenum">39</span></li>
+<li>Aguinaldo <span class="tocPagenum">61</span></li>
+<li>Marie, Her Mother, etc <span class="tocPagenum">82</span></li>
+<li>Filipinos at Breakfast <span class="tocPagenum">100</span></li>
+<li>End of the Boat-Battle <span class="tocPagenum">113</span></li>
+<li>The Rescue <span class="tocPagenum">126</span></li>
+<li>Floating Down The Rapids <span class="tocPagenum">129</span></li>
+<li>General Lawton and Staff <span class="tocPagenum">139</span></li>
+</ol></div>
+<div id="d0e226" class="div1"><span class="pagenum">
+[<a href="#d0e226">Contents</a>]
+</span><h2 class="normal">Table of Contents</h2>
+<ol class="lsoff">
+<li>Chapters: <span class="tocPagenum">Page</span>
+
+</li>
+<li>I. <a href="#d0e328">Love Defeated</a> <span class="tocPagenum">9</span></li>
+<li>II. <a href="#d0e434">First Shot of A New War</a> <span class="tocPagenum">25</span></li>
+<li>III. <a href="#d0e540">Avenged Her Lover&#8217;s Death</a> <span class="tocPagenum">41</span></li>
+<li>IV. <a href="#d0e627">The Interval</a> <span class="tocPagenum">57</span></li>
+<li>V. <a href="#d0e712">Filipino Uprising</a> <span class="tocPagenum">69</span></li>
+<li>VI. <a href="#d0e804">As A Spy</a> <span class="tocPagenum">81</span></li>
+<li>VII. <a href="#d0e882">Off For Baler</a> <span class="tocPagenum">93</span></li>
+<li>VIII. <a href="#d0e999">The Gilmore Incident</a> <span class="tocPagenum">105</span></li>
+<li>IX. <a href="#d0e1045">The American Prisoners</a> <span class="tocPagenum">113</span></li>
+<li>X. <a href="#d0e1155">Death of General Lawton</a> <span class="tocPagenum">131</span></li>
+<li>XI. <a href="#d0e1208">North-bound</a> <span class="tocPagenum">141</span></li>
+<li>XII. <a href="#d0e1335">Crossing the Sierra Madres</a> <span class="tocPagenum">153</span></li>
+<li>XIII. <a href="#d0e1441">Compensation</a> <span class="tocPagenum">167</span></li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+</div><a id="d0e326"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e326">10</a>]</span><div class="body">
+<div id="d0e328" class="div1"><span class="pagenum">
+[<a href="#d0e226">Contents</a>]
+</span><h2 class="label">Chapter I.</h2>
+<h2 class="normal">Love Defeated</h2><a id="d0e333"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e333">11</a>]</span><p>Marie Sampalit and her fiancee, Rolando Dimiguez, were walking arm-in-arm along the sandy beach of Manila bay, just opposite
+old Fort Malate, talking of their wedding day which had been postponed because of the Filipino insurrection which was in progress.
+
+</p>
+<p>The tide was out. A long waved line of sea-shells and drift-wood marked the place to which it had risen the last time before
+it began to recede. They were unconsciously following this line of ocean debris. Occasionally Marie would stop to pick up
+a spotted shell which was more pretty than the rest. Finally, when they had gotten as far north as the semi-circular drive-way
+which extends around the southern and eastern sides of the walled-city, or Old Manila, as it is called, and had begun to veer
+toward it, Marie looked back and repeated a beautiful memory gem taught to her by a good friar <a id="d0e338"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e338">12</a>]</span>when she was a pupil in one of the parochial schools of Manila:
+
+</p>
+<div class="&#xA; poem&#xA; ">
+<p class="line" style=""><span>&#8220;E&#8217;en as the rise of the tide is told,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>By drift-wood on the beach,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>So can our pen mark on the page
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>How high our thoughts can reach.&#8221;</span></p>
+</div>
+<p>They turned directly east until they reached the low stone-wall that prevents Manila bay from overflowing the city during
+the periods of high tides. Dimiguez helped Marie to step upon it; then they strolled eastward past the large stake which marked
+the place where the Spaniards had shot Dr. Jose Rizal, the brainiest patriot ever produced by the Malay race.
+
+</p>
+<p>When they came to the spot, Marie stopped and told Dimiguez how she had watched the shooting when it took place, and how bravely
+Rizal had met his fate.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;If it hadn&#8217;t been for this outrage committed by the Spaniards,&#8221; remarked Dimiguez, &#8220;this insurrection would not have lasted
+these two years, and we would have been married before now; but our people are determined <a id="d0e355"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e355">13</a>]</span>to seek revenge for his death.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>Then they started on, changed their course to the northward, entered the walled-city by the south gate, walked past the old
+Spanish arsenal, and then passed out of the walled-city by the north gate. Here they crossed the Pasig river on the old &#8220;Bridge
+of Spain&#8221; (the large stone bridge near the mouth of the river, built over 300 years ago) and entered the Escolta, the main
+business street of Manila. After making their way slowly up the Escolta they meandered along San Miguel street until they
+finally turned and walked a short distance down a side street to a typical native shack, built of bamboo and thatched with
+Nipa palms, happily tucked away beneath the overhanging limbs of a large mango tree in a spacious yard,&#8212;the home of the Sampalits.
+
+</p>
+<p>Here Marie had been born just seventeen years before; in fact the next day, April 7, would be her seventeenth birthday. When
+she was born, her father instituted one of the accustomed Filipino dances which last <a id="d0e361"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e361">14</a>]</span>from three to five days and nights, and at its conclusion she had been christened &#8220;Maria,&#8221; subsequently changed by force of
+habit to &#8220;Marie.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>Late that evening, while they were seated side-by-side on a bamboo bench beside of her home, tapping the toes of their wooden-soled
+slippers on the hard ground, and indulging in a wandering lovers&#8217; conversation, Marie said to him (calling him affectionately
+by his first name), &#8220;Rolando, when did you first decide to postpone our wedding day?&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Well, I&#8217;ll tell you how it was,&#8221; answered he, meditatingly. &#8220;The thought of serving my country had been lingering on my mind
+all last summer&#8212;in fact, ever since the insurrection first broke out in the spring of 1896. You know I intended coming down
+to see you last Christmas, but I couldn&#8217;t get away. That night I walked the floor all night in our home at Malolos, debating
+in my mind whether we had better get married in March, as we had planned, or if it would not <a id="d0e367"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e367">15</a>]</span>be wiser and more manly for me to go to war, take chances on getting back alive and postpone our wedding day until after the
+war is over. Toward morning, I decided that it was my duty to become a soldier; so I called my father and mother, got an early
+breakfast, bade them goodby and started for Malabon, which was Aguinaldo&#8217;s headquarters, and enlisted. He was glad to see
+me. You know, he and I attended school together for one year at Hongkong. Well, Aguinaldo at once commissioned me a spy and
+assigned me to very important duty.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;My God!&#8221; interrupted Marie, &#8220;you are not on that duty now, are you, Rolando?&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>Dimiguez arose. &#8220;Marie,&#8221; said he firmly, &#8220;I must be off.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;But won&#8217;t you tell me where you are going and what task lies before you?&#8221; pleaded Marie, as she threw both arms about his
+neck and began to sob, &#8220;I&#8217;ll never tell a living soul, so help me God, but I must know!&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;A spy never tells his plans to anyone, Marie,&#8221; said Dimiguez slowly. &#8220;He takes <a id="d0e377"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e377">16</a>]</span>his orders from his chief, plays his part; and if he gets caught, he refuses to speak and dies without a murmur, like a man.
+Good night, Marie, I must be off; duty lies before me.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie cried herself to sleep.
+
+</p>
+<p>The next morning she started down town, as usual, for the market place, with her bamboo basket filled with bananas, sitting
+on her head, and a cigarette in her mouth. She had only gone a block when she met a neighbor girl, one of her chums of equal
+years to her own, who was a chamber-maid in the German consul&#8217;s home on San Miguel Street.
+
+</p>
+<p>Her friend looked excited. &#8220;Have you heard the awful news, Marie?&#8221; said she.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;No!&#8221; exclaimed Marie, &#8220;What is it?&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Why, Dimiguez was caught last night by Spanish guards inside the yard of the governor-general&#8217;s summer palace up on the Malacanan,
+just as he was slipping out of the palace itself. How he got in there, nobody knows.&#8221;
+<a id="d0e389"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e389">17</a>]</span></p>
+<p>Marie dropped her basket. &#8220;Heavens!&#8221; gasped she, &#8220;Did he do anything wrong?&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;They found in his pocket diagrams of the interior of the palace, showing the entries to it, the room where the governor-general
+sleeps, and many other things; also your picture. See here! the morning paper gives a full account of it.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie glanced at the head lines and then started on a vigorous run for the building in which the Spanish military court was
+sitting. Rushing in, past an armed guard, she began to plead for her lover&#8217;s life. But he had already been tried, convicted
+and sentenced to death by strangulation in the old chute at Cavite. Dimiguez never moved a muscle when he saw Marie. Armed
+guards forced her abruptly out of the building and ordered her to leave.
+
+</p>
+<p>Inside of two hours, on the same day, April 7, the anniversary of Marie&#8217;s birth, he was taken to the little town of Cavite,
+seven miles southwest of Manila, and was there placed in the lower end of a long chute built <a id="d0e398"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e398">18</a>]</span>out into Manila Bay. This chute was just wide enough for a man to enter. Its sides, top and bottom were all built of heavy
+planks. The side planks lacked a few inches of connecting with the top, although of course the side posts ran clear up and
+the top was firmly bolted to them. The entrance to it was well elevated near the docks. The lower end protruded into the bay,
+so that it was visible about eighteen inches above the water during the period of low tide, and submerged several feet during
+high tide.
+
+</p>
+<p>Tides come in slowly at Cavite, each succeeding wave rising but a trifle higher than the others, until the usual height is
+reached. Thus, a prisoner placed in this chute, forced to the lower end and then fastened securely during low tide, can look
+out over the side planks at the hideous spectators, watch the tide as it begins to rise and see slow death approaching. It
+was in this chute that Marie&#8217;s lover met his death.
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie saw the launch that carried him away as it left Manila. She rushed down <a id="d0e404"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e404">19</a>]</span>to the Pasig river, loosened her little boat from the tree to which it was tied, jumped in, seized the oars and started in
+pursuit. The launch on which he was being carried had for its power a gasoline engine, and, of course, it soon left her far
+behind. When she first started, the swells caused by the launch rocked her little canoe quite roughly and impeded her progress.
+As she approached the mouth of the river, passed the monument of Magellan and came between the walled-city on the southern
+bank and the docks on the northern bank, a crowd of excited natives thronged the shore, and many of them recognized her. She
+heard some one cry out, &#8220;Vive Marie!&#8221; With might and main she strove forward.
+
+</p>
+<p>The launch made its seven-mile run to Cavite; the victim was placed in the chute; the tide had risen to the danger line; her
+lover, with his head thrown back, had just begun to gurgle the salt water, when Marie, in frantic agony, almost exhausted,
+rowed around the lower end of the chute and came <a id="d0e408"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e408">20</a>]</span>near enough to the dying hero to be recognized by him. Straining ever muscle to keep his head above the water a second longer,
+he cried out in chocking tones that were interrupted by the merciless sea which was rapidly filling his mouth, &#8220;Goodby, Marie,
+God bless you. Avenge my death!&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>Hush! At this moment another tidal wave engulfed the apex of the chute. Not a sound could be heard save the slight flapping
+of the waves against the pier, and the dismal chant of three priests, who stood on the shore near by, and who had not been
+permitted to attend the young spy before his death. Marie trembled; she dropped the oars; her eyes fell; for a moment it seemed
+that her young heart stood still: then her face flushed; the tears stopped flowing; anguish gave vent to determined revenge;
+pent-up sorrows yielded to out-spoken threats; and in tones sufficiently audible to be heard ashore, she cried, &#8220;I&#8217;ll do it.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>The Spaniard knows no pity. If Marie were to have stepped ashore immediately <a id="d0e414"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e414">21</a>]</span>after her lover&#8217;s strangulation, she might have come to grief. It is strange that she escaped punishment for having followed.
+She, therefore, rowed directly east and landed on the beach of the bay, about four miles south of Manila, just west of the
+little city of Paranaque.
+
+</p>
+<p>From sheer exhaustion, she needed food; therefore, she walked northward along the shore until she found a Mango tree heavily
+laden with fruit. After eating a few luscious mangoes, she crept into a clump of bamboo and had a good cry: tears so ease
+a woman&#8217;s soul.
+
+</p>
+<p>From her position on the beach she could readily see the Spaniards as they took her dead lover from the chute when the tide
+had lowered toward evening. She saw them even strike his corpse, and she bit her finger nails as she watched them place him
+in a rough wooden box and haul him up through the streets of the village on an old two-wheeled cart drawn by a caribou.
+
+</p>
+<p>With the approach of sunset, things <a id="d0e422"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e422">22</a>]</span>grew strangely quiet. The spring zephyr that had blown modestly during the day died away. There was no longer even a dimple
+in the blue surface of Manila Bay. Not a leaf was astir. It seemed to Marie that the only sound she could hear was the the
+throbbing of her own heart. To her the whole world seemed like an open sepulcher. Looking down she discovered that she was
+unconsciously sitting on a flowery terrace and that all about her was life. She pulled one of those exquisite white flowers
+with wide pink veins, peculiar alone to the Philippines, and pressed it to her lips.
+
+</p>
+<p>The sun was just setting beyond Corregidor. The island&#8217;s long shadows seemed to extend completely across the bay to her feet.
+As the solar fires burned themselves out, the orange tint which they left behind against the reddened sky reminded Marie of
+the night before, when she and her lover had strolled along the shore of the bay about three miles farther north; and as the
+sun slowly nodded its evening farewell and buried <a id="d0e426"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e426">23</a>]</span>its face in the pillow of night, she remembered how he, on the previous night, had called to her attention the lingering glow
+of its fading beams. Before her lay the Spanish fleet, it, too, casting shadows that first grew longer and longer and then
+dimmer and dimmer until they in turn had died away in the spectral phenomenon of night.
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie&#8217;s thoughts turned toward home. What about her mother? She walked back to her little boat, pushed it out into the bay,
+and, stepping into it, sat down, took hold of the oars and started northward near the beach. Just opposite Fort Malate, she
+swung westward, and, passing outside of the break-water a mile from shore, she entered the Pasig river and hurried homeward.
+When she arrived, about nine o&#8217;clock, she found her mother on the verge of prostration; for that very day, strange to say,
+Marie&#8217;s father, who was a colonel in the Filipino infantry, had been killed at San Francisco del Monte, six miles north-east
+of Manila, in a battle with Spanish troops.
+<a id="d0e430"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e430">24</a>]</span></p>
+<p>&#8220;Don&#8217;t cry, mother,&#8221; expostulated Marie, &#8220;from now on I intend to kill every foe of ours in these islands!&#8221;
+
+
+
+<a id="d0e433"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e433">25</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+<div id="d0e434" class="div1"><span class="pagenum">
+[<a href="#d0e226">Contents</a>]
+</span><h2 class="label">Chapter II.</h2>
+<h2 class="normal">First Shot of A New War</h2><a id="d0e439"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e439">27</a>]</span><p>Three weeks passed by. Marie had gone down town late in April to do some shopping. While she was standing in the door of the
+old postoffice on the Escolta, she heard the shrill voice of a Filipino lad piping out: &#8220;Papers! Papers! All about the war
+with the United States. Dewey&#8217;s comin&#8217;!&#8221; He had a bundle of newspapers under his right arm and was waving one in his left
+hand. Everybody rushed out of the bazaars and offices along the Escolta where they were transacting their business, and each
+one who could get near enough to the boy, eagerly bought a morning paper.
+
+</p>
+<p>The lad&#8217;s papers were all gone but one. Marie Sampalit snatched it from his hands, and dropped into one of them a small coin.
+She stepped into the corridor of the post office, to escape the annoyance of the crowd, and read the large head lines:
+
+<a id="d0e444"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e444">28</a>]</span>
+</p>
+<div class="blockquote">
+<div class="body">
+<div class="div1">
+<h2 class="normal">&#8220;WAR BETWEEN THE UNITED
+STATES AND SPAIN
+</h2>
+<hr class="tb">
+<p><span class="smallcaps">dewey en route to manila great naval battle friday or saturday in manila bay</span>
+</p>
+<hr class="tb"><p>
+
+</p>
+<p>The Stone Wall Around the City will be Razed to the Ground. Great Loss of Life.&#8221;</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div><p>
+
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Then, I&#8217;m off for Corregidor Island right away!&#8221; exclaimed Marie. &#8220;Dewey can&#8217;t get into the Bay except by that route. That&#8217;s
+where the fight will begin. Mother doesn&#8217;t know this. I&#8217;ll tell her I am going to take some supplies to the Spanish garrison.
+I will go at once!&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>She set out from Manila in a small casco, or flat-bottomed native boat, heavily laden <a id="d0e466"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e466">29</a>]</span>with fresh fish, pine-apples, mangoes, bananas, tobacco and cigarettes&#8212;all intended for the Spanish garrison on Corregidor
+Island. Manila is situated on the eastern shore of Manila Bay. From there to the island it is nearly thirty miles. Her little
+boat was driven forward on its journey by an easterly wind that gently swelled the tiny sails.
+
+</p>
+<p>She reached the island at five o&#8217;clock that afternoon and was given a royal welcome by the Spanish soldiers. Marie gave them
+the morning paper containing the news of Dewey&#8217;s prospective arrival. She asked permission to take part in the fight.
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie was a favorite with the Spanish garrison. Her genial disposition, added to her almost inconceivable daring, had won
+for her the friendship and admiration of all. The gunners had playfully taught her all about loading, firing and swabbing
+their cannon. She had also learned the art of good marksmanship, so that at a target practice she was an adept.
+
+</p>
+<p>Impatiently she awaited the arrival of <a id="d0e474"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e474">30</a>]</span>the American fleet. She heard the Spaniards discuss among themselves the cowardice of the American soldiers, and saw them
+wager the Dewey would not come to Manila at all but that he would sail down around the Malay Peninsula and hasten home by
+way of Good Hope to save his vessels from certain destruction. All this sounded plausible to her and she grew restless and
+enthusiastic as the dull hours dragged away.
+
+</p>
+<p>Dewey was so long in coming from Hongkong and the garrison on the island had been kept at their guns ready for action for
+so many hours without rest that many of them were completely tired out by the last day of April, and asked for relief. It
+was hard to give it. Marie&#8217;s opportunity had come. Her ability as an expert rifle shot was known alike to officers and enlisted
+men. She offered to serve. The Spanish commandant could not well refuse. He needed her services; besides, the Spaniards were
+just then doing all within their power to win the temporary friendship of the natives. <a id="d0e478"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e478">31</a>]</span>Consequently, he promised to assign her to duty for the night.
+
+</p>
+<p>The sunset, as viewed from Corregidor Island on the evening of April 30, was most glorious. Not a cloud was in the sky; a
+dead calm prevailed, so that the sea was unusually smooth. As the sun sank to rest behind the shimmering horizon it caused
+the island to cast a long shadow over Manila bay as far as the eye could reach, but this soon disappeared.
+
+</p>
+<p>When the sun had sunk from view, Marie noticed that a comparatively new moon was visible in the sky, and she remarked to the
+Sergeant of the Guard, &#8220;It will not be very dark to-night. We can see the Americanos a long way off.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Yes,&#8221; replied the Sergeant, &#8220;the only difficulty with the cowards is that they will not come near enough to be seen at all.
+They have had plenty of time to run from Hongkong to Manila and back <span id="d0e486" class="corr" title="Source: agin">again</span>; still they have not been seen or heard of. I&#8217;ll bet you a peso (Spanish dollar) that they have gone home <a id="d0e489"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e489">32</a>]</span>and that all of this excitement has been for nothing. Dewey is getting old, Marie; he doesn&#8217;t want to go to a watery grave
+so far from home. If he were young and ambitious, it would be different. Old men do not care much about real fighting, especially
+on the sea. It is different with old generals commanding land forces. They can sit away back in the rear of the battle-field,
+receive messages that come to them; plan certain movements based upon these reports; and while they do have considerable responsibility,
+still they are not in the actual fight. As for Dewey, nobody has ever heard of him. He is not a recognized naval commander.
+Besides, the old fellow, according to reports, is slow and easy going. If he should come to make us an unfriendly call tonight,
+mark my word, Marie, there will not be a sliver of his entire fleet left floating above the water yonder inside of thirty
+minutes after the first shot is fired.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>He had scarcely concluded speaking when the Officer of the Guard, Lieutenant <a id="d0e493"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e493">33</a>]</span>Orlando, called out, &#8220;Sergeant of the Guard! Fall in the First Relief!&#8221; The Sergeant threw his arm over Marie&#8217;s shoulder in
+an affectionate manner, smacked a hurried caress against her olive cheek, jumped up from the little bamboo bench on which
+they were sitting, rushed up to the guard house and cried out, &#8220;First Relief! Fall in!&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie hastened after him. As the relief was forming in line, she seized a Mauser rifle that stood leaning against a huge rock,
+grabbed up a cartridge belt well filled with Mauser ammunition that was lying on the ground near by, hastily adjusted it to
+fit her waist measure, buckled it on and fell into the rear rank.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Count fours!&#8221; ordered the Sergeant. As is usual in military affairs, the front and rear rank men count in unison; that is,
+number one in the front rank and number one in the rear rank both count &#8220;one&#8221; at the same time; second file counts &#8220;two,&#8221;
+etc. When it came to Marie she piped out simultaneously <a id="d0e499"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e499">34</a>]</span>with the corporal who stood in front of her, &#8220;quatro.&#8221; (four).
+
+</p>
+<p>As the guard was marched along the stony pathways on Corregidor Island and the various sentinels were relieved, Marie soon
+saw that there was not going to be a place for her. She tip-toed up to the corporal who was posting the relief and asked him
+where he was going to station her.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Never mind,&#8221; said the corporal, &#8220;we have a place for you.&#8221; And sure enough, they had.
+
+</p>
+<p>Every soldier or civilian who has ever been on this island will readily recall the rough, hard-beaten, winding path that led
+from the summit of the hill, in a south-westerly direction, down over precipices, around clumps of bamboo, to a beautiful
+fresh water spring which bubbled out of the coral rocks at a point just high enough to prevent it from being inundated or
+even infiltrated during the season of high tides.
+
+</p>
+<p>A few feet from this spring and elevated but slightly above it, is a massive, flat <a id="d0e509"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e509">35</a>]</span>rock. Along the north and west sides of this rock is a vertical stone precipice some eight feet high, which from its upper
+edge inclines back gradually at an angle of about twenty degrees above a horizontal plane, toward the crest of the island.
+
+</p>
+<p>On this rock Spain firmly bolted one of her most modern cannon&#8212;a good seven-inch gun. It was so situated on a revolving casement
+that its shots could be made to sweep the whole Boca Grande channel, as the large entrance south of the island is called.
+Marie had often operated this gun. She had done splendid work with it on a floating target two miles distant. Its deadly roar
+was her delight. Oh! if she could but use it just once on an actual enemy instead of firing it at an indicated one!
+
+</p>
+<p>When the old guard had been relieved and the sentries were marched back to the guard-house to be dismissed, poor Marie, heavy
+hearted, marched along. Just as they approached the guard-house, the sergeant <a id="d0e515"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e515">36</a>]</span>motioned to her to fall out and to come toward him. This she did.
+
+</p>
+<p>Into her ear he whispered the information that was to start her on her eventful military career. &#8220;Marie,&#8221; said he, &#8220;the officer
+of the Guard informs me that we cannot use you in the infantry service tonight, but that you will be needed with the artillery.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Good!&#8221; exclaimed Marie, &#8220;Where shall I serve?&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;At the new gun on the large rock near the spring,&#8221; answered the Sergeant.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Thank heaven!&#8221; said Marie. &#8220;Dewey will surely come, and when I put a solid shot through the &#8217;Olympia&#8217; just below the water
+line&#8212;the battle will be half over. Oh! I&#8217;m so anxious! May I go down there tonight and take charge of the gun at once?&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>The Sergeant told her to report to the headquarters of the artillery department where she would receive instructions.
+
+</p>
+<p>At last she found herself on actual duty. How her young heart throbbed as her black eyes peered forth into the darkness. Toward
+<a id="d0e529"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e529">37</a>]</span>midnight, small clouds began to drift oceanward. For a few moments at a time they would obscure the quartered cheek of the
+young moon. Oh! if Dewey would but come. The hopes of a life-time were poised on that painful &#8220;if.&#8221; Before her was the dream
+of glory; behind her, the dreary forgetfulness of the past. Hour after hour whiled away. The tiny lights in the natives&#8217; shacks
+along the opposite shore began to go out and grow fewer and fewer until the closing day had died safely away into the solemn
+night. As usual, &#8220;taps&#8221; were blown at ten o&#8217;clock and things on the island grew very quiet. Days&#8212;yes, weeks&#8212;seemed to crowd
+themselves into those long hours. Would he ever come?
+
+</p>
+<p>Presently she heard the sentry&#8217;s shrill cry on the brow of the hill, &#8220;Twelve o&#8217;clock! All&#8217;s well!&#8221; The echo of his repeated
+call had scarcely died away when Marie thought she saw something dark on the water near the center of the channel, perhaps
+three miles away. She whispered to a member of the <a id="d0e533"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e533">38</a>]</span>artillery corps, who sat near her watching the shadow of his pipe on the rock near the base of the cannon. They both looked.
+Surely! it&#8217;s Dewey! The artilleryman sent up a rocket as a warning. Marie took hurried aim. &#8220;Boom!&#8221; went her cannon, and from
+its mouth a seven-inch shot was hurled over the &#8220;Concord,&#8221; between its main and mizzen masts. It went a trifle high and did
+no harm.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Bang!&#8221; went one of the port batteries on the &#8220;Raleigh&#8221; and before its flash was gone a shudder shot through every vein, every
+nerve and every fiber of Marie&#8217;s body. Such a crash she had never heard before. &#8220;War is hell&#8221; to be sure. She sniffed the
+smoke from her own gun, and looked around to see what had happened. The stone precipice behind her was torn into fragments.
+A man&#8217;s hand protruded from the debris. &#8220;My God!&#8221; she murmured. Yes, there was the evidence. The man who had sat by her side
+and who sent up the rocket, lay cold in death. His head was torn off and his body <a id="d0e537"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e537">39</a>]</span>was mangled among the pieces of broken rock. The gunner on the &#8220;Raleigh&#8221; had done his work well; and Marie&#8217;s dream of American
+cowardice, of their poor marksmanship and of her ability to sink Dewey&#8217;s flag ship, were shattered in an instant. She had
+fired the FIRST gun of the war, but not the LAST!
+
+
+
+<a id="d0e539"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e539">41</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+<div id="d0e540" class="div1"><span class="pagenum">
+[<a href="#d0e226">Contents</a>]
+</span><h2 class="label">Chapter III.</h2>
+<h2 class="normal">Avenged Her Lover&#8217;s Death</h2><a id="d0e545"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e545">43</a>]</span><p>After Dewey&#8217;s fleet had passed the island and entered the bay, proper, Marie crept up to the top of the cliff and awaited
+the results. As she sat there shivering with fright, day began to dawn. Presently she heard the Spanish batteries on Point
+Cavite fire a heavy shot&#8212;then a second one; and a few minutes later she saw flames of fire and smoke belching forth from the
+starboard sides of Dewey&#8217;s entire squadron. Then the Spanish fleet, lying off of Point Cavite, commenced a united and simultaneous
+action.
+
+</p>
+<p>Shells rent the air; the men on both fleets cheered as they beheld the effect on the enemy of a well-directed shot; smoke-begrimed
+gunners, with the perspiration washing light-colored furrows down their manly cheeks, stood at their guns and worked like
+demons as they swabbed their cannon and crowded into them shot after shot. Hissing <a id="d0e550"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e550">44</a>]</span>projectiles that missed the opposing ships and plunged into the bay, were throwing volumes of splashing foam into the air.
+Dewey&#8217;s vessels were moving in a figure eight and using alternately the several guns on their port and on their starboard
+sides, while the Spanish ships moved about promiscuously among each other in an awkward fashion, over a small area, and fired
+only as an opportunity offered.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Thank God, I&#8217;m out of range of the demons,&#8221; said Marie to a Spanish officer who had come to her side.
+
+</p>
+<p>Just then, there was a lull in the battle. Dewey&#8217;s ships ceased firing and withdrew to the middle of the bay. No apparent
+damage had been sustained by the vessels of either command.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;The old fellow is going to quit,&#8221; said Marie to the Spanish officer who stood erect with his field glasses carefully trained
+on Dewey&#8217;s squadron.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;They&#8217;re coming this way, Marie,&#8221; said the officer.
+<a id="d0e560"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e560">45</a>]</span></p>
+<p>&#8220;My God! where will we go, if they come past the island and open fire on us again?&#8221; shouted Marie. &#8220;We haven&#8217;t a mounted gun
+left to shoot with.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>The officer remained quiet. Presently he said, &#8220;They&#8217;ve stopped and are dividing up their ammunition. Evidently they are going
+to resume the fight.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>He guessed it right. In thirty minutes Dewey&#8217;s vessels were heading straight for the Spanish fleet. His first shot set on
+fire the beautiful Spanish flag-ship, the &#8220;Reina Christina.&#8221; Then her magazine blew up. She was hastily scuttled on the beach
+near Cavite and deserted amid great disorder by that portion of her crew which was able to leave. The dead and the dying were
+left to their fate. Magazines in several other Spanish ships soon blew up. In a few minutes most of them were on fire. Dewey&#8217;s
+gunners were doing deadly execution. Hundreds of Spanish soldiers could be seen jumping from their burning vessels into the
+ocean.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Now what is he going to do?&#8221; said Marie, <a id="d0e569"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e569">46</a>]</span>with some excitement, as she saw one of Dewey&#8217;s ships, the &#8220;Concord,&#8221; disengage herself from the rest of the fleet and head
+straight for a large Spanish gun-boat that was lying off to herself and whose sole business it seemed was to keep up a deadly
+fire on Dewey&#8217;s flagship, the &#8220;Olympia.&#8221; The Concord literally disembowled her.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;The heartless wretches!&#8221; exclaimed Marie, as she watched another American ship, the &#8220;Petrel,&#8221; leave the line of battle and
+make a rapid run right past the Spanish fleet for the village of Cavite. &#8220;I wonder what the villains are up to now.&#8221; In a
+few minutes the Petrel returned, with six small vessels in tow as prizes. In addition, she was flying at her mast head this
+signal, &#8220;Have destroyed eight vessels.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>Dewey&#8217;s ships moved over toward the city of Manila, took their positions in line and remained quiet.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;What time is it?&#8221; asked Marie of the Spanish officer who stood near her.
+<a id="d0e577"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e577">47</a>]</span></p>
+<p>&#8220;Twelve-thirty,&#8221; answered he, as he looked at his watch.
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie whiled away the afternoon watching the Spaniards on Corregidor island burying their dead comrades. She wanted to go
+home, but she feared to go past Dewey&#8217;s fleet.
+
+</p>
+<p>That evening things became solemnly quiet; and the blazing sun, as its face reddened into nightly slumber beyond the watery
+horizon of the Pacific, bade farewell to a finished deed, which, in the history of naval warfare, has never been surpassed;
+while the pale-faced moon, moving slowly up her appointed path, looked calmly down with her quartered cheek in silent benediction
+on the blazing hulls of the Spanish ships as they slowly cremated their dead and dying.
+
+</p>
+<p>The next day the Spanish Commandante on Corregidor discovered that Dewey had blockaded the port of Manila, so he restrained
+Marie from starting home for nearly a week.
+
+</p>
+<p>Finally, she got permission to go. As <a id="d0e588"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e588">48</a>]</span>she passed Dewey&#8217;s fleet she was surprised to find everything so peaceful and to see dozens of native canoes hovering along
+the port-holes of his vessels, selling fruit and curios to his men.
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie reached home in the early evening, and found her old mother frantic because of her absence and the excitement that had
+taken place.
+
+</p>
+<p>During the next few weeks while Dewey was waiting for reinforcements from home, many strange things occurred on shore. The
+Filipinos captured or killed nearly all of the smaller Spanish garrisons distributed throughout the islands. On May 26, they
+secretly cut down the Spanish guards walking their beats along the western side of the little town of Cavite, and let in a
+horde of Tagalos well armed with bolos, who crept up near a large stone cathedral, built in 1643, in which the Spaniards,
+as a military necessity after their defeat by Dewey, were making their headquarters. These Filipinos made a mad rush through
+the back door of <a id="d0e594"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e594">49</a>]</span>the building and captured all the Spaniards being quartered therein. This feat also gave them possession of another lot of
+Mauser and Remington rifles and a goodly store of ammunition, for which they had been yearning.
+
+</p>
+<p>Dewey had no men whom he could spare to send ashore; therefore, he had left these surrendered Spaniards to take care of themselves.
+Evidently he did not anticipate an attack upon the garrison at Cavite, or he might have landed enough marines from his battleships
+to have prevented it.
+
+</p>
+<p>When Marie heard about the capture of the Spanish garrison at Cavite by the Filipinos, she at once rowed over there to see
+what was going to be done with the prisoners. This was the first time she had been at Cavite since the day of her lover&#8217;s
+tragic death. She found the Filipinos jubilant over their new fire-arms. But many of them had never before used a gun and
+they were very awkward with them, so that accidents were constantly occurring. The privileges of target <a id="d0e600"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e600">50</a>]</span>practice given to Marie by the Spaniards, in times past, now found a new reward. She organized the Filipinos into squads for
+this training, arranged suitable targets for them, supervised the loading and cleaning of their guns, and by voluntary assent
+became the leader in a whole lot of nefarious mischief in the neighborhood.
+
+</p>
+<p>But what about her lover&#8217;s dying request and the vow she registered in her aching soul as she left the scene of his death?
+By remaining away from the graves of our loved ones we may check memory and enthrone reason, thus more rapidly overcoming
+sorrow. By constantly resorting to places of grief we keep that grief, whatever may have been its cause, fresh on the tablets
+of our memories. The fact that Marie had not returned to Cavite, the scene of her sorrow, for about two months, helped her
+to forget it and to flirt with fate among the very troops who had caused it. Now that she had returned to Cavite, old visions
+began to haunt her. Shooting at wooden targets was not desperate <a id="d0e604"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e604">51</a>]</span>enough to appease her nature; she longed for bloodshed.
+
+</p>
+<p>Between herself and a few Filipino leaders she concocted a scheme that would be hilarious, avenge the death of him whom she
+had briefly mourned, as well as the deaths of Rizal and thousands of other Filipinos who had been shot or strangled by the
+Spaniards, and satisfy the longings of her innermost nature. It was this: a pit twenty feet in diameter and ten feet deep
+was to be dug on the higher ground a few miles southwest of Cavite. Each morning twenty of the captured Spaniards were to
+be marched out to this pit and made to slide down a bamboo pole into it. The Filipino soldiers, armed with their newly-captured
+rifles, were then to stand around the brink of this pit and use these half-starved Spaniards for living targets. Marie gloated
+over her new enterprise. What sport! How she enjoyed it! The Filipino&#8217;s marksmanship was poor and many of their unfortunate
+prisoners were shot over a dozen times before they were <a id="d0e608"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e608">52</a>]</span>stilled in death. This bloody practice was kept up until over two hundred Spaniards had been slain.
+
+</p>
+<p>About this time rumors of what was being done reached the ears of General Anderson. He ordered it stopped, and sent food ashore,
+under American escorts, for the Spanish prisoners. These prisoners, before being led to the slaughter, were housed by the
+Filipinos in an unfinished portion of the old convent at Cavite, and in some large stone buildings without floors and with
+only a few windows, heavily barricaded with iron bars, formerly used by the natives for storage purposes for various cargoes
+of raw materials, preparatory to exportation. These buildings were dark, damp and infested with a multiplicity of insectivora.
+
+</p>
+<p>The Spaniards, imprisoned therein, were fed by the Filipinos on a very small ration of uncooked rice. This they had to pound
+into meal, and eat it out of their hands. Water, although plentiful, was denied them, except in small quantities. They had
+no beds, <a id="d0e614"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e614">53</a>]</span>but slept on the bare ground. Many of them were practically nude. They had staid by their guns on the Spanish fleet until
+their ships began to sink; then they had jumped overboard and swam ashore, taking off most of their clothes before making
+the attempt. The Filipinos had little clothing to give them and no disposition to share what they did have.
+
+</p>
+<p>These half-starved wretches, pale, lean and ghostly looking, many of them sick with fever and other ailments, none of them
+with a cent of money, were a sickening sight to the American troops whom General Anderson sent ashore to investigate their
+circumstances and conditions. Of course the healthier ones were marched out and killed first. Some of them began to cry when
+the American officers, pushing the Filipino sentries aside, poked their vigorous manly faces through the openings of the massive
+doors to see who and what was on the inside; but most of them propped themselves up on one elbow and held out the other hand
+for something <a id="d0e618"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e618">54</a>]</span>to eat. Others indicated by motions that they wanted paper and pencils, so as to write letters home, telling their loved ones
+in far-off Spain that they were still alive, and asking for money.
+
+</p>
+<p>As the Americans began to empty their haversacks and hand hard-tack and Boston baked beans to them, some of the prisoners
+seized them by the fingers and kissed the backs of their hands in grateful homage for their kindness. A few of the more ignorant
+ones, who had heard so much about the cruelty of the American soldiers, and who, upon sight of our officers, believing the
+end was near, had sought a kneeling attitude and begun to pray, gradually sank back into a reclining posture and held out
+their hands for a morsel of food.
+
+</p>
+<p>The Filipino guards sulked when they were displaced by the American sentries, and some of them had to be forced from their
+posts of fiendish duty at the point of the bayonet. They considered these Spaniards as reprisals, constituting their own private
+<a id="d0e624"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e624">55</a>]</span>property, with whom they could do as they pleased without any justifiable interference on the part of anybody. Marie Sampalit
+slapped an American private who had been sent to displace a Filipino sentry whom she had just stationed at one of the prison
+doors. He promptly knocked her down with the butt of his rifle. What she said in reply he could not understand.
+
+
+<a id="d0e626"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e626">57</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+<div id="d0e627" class="div1"><span class="pagenum">
+[<a href="#d0e226">Contents</a>]
+</span><h2 class="label">Chapter IV.</h2>
+<h2 class="normal">The Interval</h2><a id="d0e632"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e632">59</a>]</span><p>After avenging her lover&#8217;s death, Marie returned again to Manila where she remained at home until the Filipino uprising against
+the American troops in the spring of 1899. During this interval of nine months, she daily frequented the places of rendezvous
+of the American troops stationed in and around Manila. She also went to the officers&#8217; homes in the city where their wives
+and children were stopping. She did their washing, and cared for the children. Her congeniality made her a favorite. Some
+of the American ladies offered to bring her back to America with them for a house-hold servant.
+
+</p>
+<p>From them she learned to speak the English language nearly as fluently as Spanish. The American soldiers were kind and polite
+to her. She made considerable money by doing washing for them. It was noticeable that she was gradually improving the <a id="d0e637"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e637">60</a>]</span>old bamboo home in Manila. In a few months she had come into possession of more money than she thought there was in the entire
+world. Most of it was American gold&#8212;largely in five dollar denominations. (This is what the United States used in paying the
+soldiers.) These she took to the Spanish bank in Manila and exchanged them for Mexican silver, which, until the United States
+began to issue special coins for the Philippine islands, was the standard medium of exchange in the archipelago.
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie began to dress better. Her penia cloth gave way to Chinese silks; her wooden hair combs to expensive ones inlaid with
+gold, bought at the Spanish bazar down town. Many little comforts were bought for her home. Still the washings kept growing
+larger. She and her mother could be seen back of their shack, in the shade, pounding American soldiers&#8217; white uniforms on
+large boulders from early morning till night.
+
+</p>
+<p>Aguinaldo, who had previously sold out his country and gone to Singapore, after <a id="d0e643"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e643">61</a>]</span>commissioning Dimiguez, upon hearing that war was about to begin between the United States and Spain, made his way northward
+to Hongkong. After the battle of Manila Bay, Dewey despatched the revenue cutter, &#8220;McCulloch,&#8221; to Hongkong to cable home the
+news of his splendid victory. On her return to Manila, she permitted Aguinaldo to come along.
+
+</p>
+<p>After a brief conversation with Admiral Dewey on board the &#8220;Olympia,&#8221; he went ashore at Cavite, his boyhood home, began to
+organize the Filipinos into a powerful army, captured 1500 Spanish soldiers who were holding out-lying posts, and hemmed in
+the city of Manila.
+
+</p>
+<p>On August 13, following, Dewey and General Merritt, by a union of their forces, captured the city of Manila which offered
+but slight resistance. Aguinaldo&#8217;s native troops rushed forward with the Americans in the charge that was made by the land
+forces and they insisted on looting the city. General Merritt refused this and ordered them to <a id="d0e649"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e649">62</a>]</span>withdraw beyond the city limits. This they did after considerable wrangling. Then the Americans established out-posts on every
+road and pathway leading to and from the city, completely around the town; and they were given instructions by the commanding
+officer not to allow any Filipino troops to enter the city.
+
+</p>
+<p>Aguinaldo discarded his uniform one evening, completely disguised himself as a Filipino fruit-vender, and made his way into
+Manila. Naturally, he slipped around to the home of his old friends, the Sampalits. He sat in a semi-darkened room, with all
+the hinged-windows to the shack tightly closed and stroked Marie&#8217;s soft black hair with his left hand. As he engaged her and
+her mother in conversation in subdued tones, he little thought that in so short a time Marie would be associated with him
+in a series of bloody tragedies that would revolutionize the government of the islands forever.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Marie,&#8221; said he, &#8220;I&#8217;m going to force the Americans to acknowledge the independence <a id="d0e655"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e655">63</a>]</span>of the Philippine islands, or I shall not permit the rest of their army to land. Dewey tells me he has sent home for reinforcements.
+There is no use for us to let these troops land, if America instead of Spain is going to govern the islands. What we want
+is absolute independence with myself as president of the new Filipino Republic. If the Americans won&#8217;t concede this to us,
+let&#8217;s fight!&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;That&#8217;s what I say!&#8221; declared Marie. &#8220;Let&#8217;s drive the foreign devils off the islands or slay them all. Here&#8217;s father dead
+and&#8212;Dimiguez, too&#8221;&#8212;<span id="d0e659" class="corr" title="Source: Maries">Marie&#8217;s</span> voice trembled&#8212;&#8220;I tell you it&#8217;s too much. Let&#8217;s kill every one of them!&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Yes; but say Marie, we must keep quiet about all this,&#8221; cautioned Aguinaldo. &#8220;I&#8217;ll tell you what I have in mind. We&#8217;ll wait
+about four weeks and by that time if Dewey hasn&#8217;t received definite instructions from Washington, and if he won&#8217;t give me
+any satisfaction, I&#8217;m going to go to Malolos, proclaim myself Dictator of the Philippines, appoint a cabinet and a congress
+from among some of the <a id="d0e664"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e664">64</a>]</span>bright young Filipinos here in Manila who have been educated abroad, draw up a Revolutionary form of government, and begin
+to administer the affairs of these islands just as I please.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;We&#8217;ll keep our present army in the field, and if the Americans do land we&#8217;ll shut them up in Manila, so that they will have
+nothing at their command but the city to regulate. This won&#8217;t amount to much as compared with the rest of the islands which
+I will dominate.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Are you sure the Americans won&#8217;t land a powerful army, cut through your lines around Manila and drive you out of Malolos,
+or capture you and your officials at that place? It seems to me I would go farther inland&#8212;say to San Isidro,&#8221; said Marie.
+
+</p>
+<p>Aguinaldo thought a moment, then replied: &#8220;That&#8217;s true, in a sense, Marie; but I have got to be on or near the railroad where
+I can have easy and rapid access to Manila. Malolos is not far from here and it is situated on the railroad. It has some very
+large <a id="d0e672"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e672">65</a>]</span>buildings in which our legislative sessions could be held. I think it the place for the undertaking.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;To be on the safe side, I believe I will have our troops erect a series of fortifications between here and there along the
+railroad track, so that if the Americans do attempt to advance by that route I can easily stop them.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;I think that would be a good scheme,&#8221; said Marie. &#8220;Malolos is about twelve miles from Manila Bay; besides, the bay is shallow
+in the north end, so that heavy boats could not go up there. This will make it impossible for Dewey to shell the place with
+his fleet. We&#8217;ve got to watch out for that&#8212;no matter what we do. My! but those American ships can shoot! Did you hear about
+me shooting at &#8217;em with that cannon on Corregidor island when they entered the bay? I mighty near got one of their vessels.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;No,&#8221; said Aguinaldo, &#8220;I have not heard very much about the firing off Corregidor, <a id="d0e680"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e680">66</a>]</span>but as I came from Hongkong the other day on the &#8220;McCulloch&#8221; I noticed that the Spanish fortifications on the island had all
+been dismantled.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Why! they killed a man right at my feet, the very first shot,&#8221; said Marie; &#8220;and then one of their boats drew nearer and fired
+several times more and they killed every Spaniard in the relief guard which was near by,&#8212;seven of them in all.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;And I was terribly worried about Marie,&#8221; interrupted her mother who had listened to the conversation with deepest interest.
+&#8220;She had been gone for a week, and I hadn&#8217;t heard a word from her.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Oh! well, I don&#8217;t pity the Spaniards any for what the Americans did to them,&#8221; interjected Aguinaldo, with some emphasis.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Be careful,&#8221; said old lady Sampalit, putting her finger on her lips, &#8220;don&#8217;t speak too loud.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>Aguinaldo continued in a lower voice: &#8220;They killed your husband. They shot Rizal. They strangled Dimigeuz. They tortured to
+<a id="d0e692"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e692">67</a>]</span>death several hundred of our young fellows in the dungeons. They have left ridges of dead wherever their armies have moved
+among us. I tell you they deserved all they got.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>Mrs. Sampalit and Marie had grown heavy hearted. Aguinaldo looked at his watch. It was after ten P. M.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;I wonder,&#8221; said Aguinaldo, hesitatingly, &#8220;how I shall be able to get back to our lines tonight.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Don&#8217;t go!&#8221; said Marie, in an emphatic whisper, &#8220;stay over night!&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Yes, do!&#8221; entreated the old lady, &#8220;I&#8217;m nervous.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;It might be best; it would surely be the safest thing to do,&#8221; said Aguinaldo, in a meditating manner.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;We sleep on bamboo beds,&#8221; said Marie. &#8220;There stands mine. You may use it tonight, and I will sleep on the floor. I don&#8217;t
+mind. Mother and I frequently lie down on the floor near the window, when the nights are sultry.&#8221;
+<a id="d0e706"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e706">68</a>]</span></p>
+<p>The next morning Aguinaldo arose very early, made his way to the edge of the city and stealthily stole out threw the Americans&#8217;
+lines, never again to return to Manila until General Funston brought him back, two years later, a captive.
+
+</p>
+<p>He made his way to Malolos, a few weeks after this conversation, declared himself &#8220;Dictator of the Philippines,&#8221; appointed
+a Filipino congress, set up a government of his own and began to run the general affairs in the interior of Luzon.
+
+
+
+<a id="d0e711"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e711">69</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+<div id="d0e712" class="div1"><span class="pagenum">
+[<a href="#d0e226">Contents</a>]
+</span><h2 class="label">Chapter V.</h2>
+<h2 class="normal">Filipino Uprising</h2><a id="d0e717"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e717">71</a>]</span><p>The close of the eventful year of 1898 was near at hand. General Otis had been made governor-general of the islands. He had
+received about 15,000 troops from home. These had all been landed and were quartered in the city of Manila.
+
+</p>
+<p>Preparations had begun by the American troops for a great day of field sports to be held on the Luneta&#8212;a beautiful narrow
+park paralleling Manila bay and extending southward from the walled-city about four miles&#8212;on New Year&#8217;s day, 1899.
+
+</p>
+<p>On the afternoon of January I, as planned, the exercises were begun. The afternoon program consisted of foot races, running
+high jumps, wheelbarrow race, fat man&#8217;s race, running broad jump, high kicking, fancy club swinging, tumbling, shot-put, sack
+race, tugs of war, five boxing contests, base ball, foot ball, and pole vaulting.
+<a id="d0e724"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e724">72</a>]</span></p>
+<p>Situated on the Luneta, about a mile south of the walled city, and distant from Manila bay about 100 feet, is a large bandstand.
+This served as headquarters for the exercises. The day was perfect&#8212;clear, cool and calm.
+
+</p>
+<p>About 2:00 P.M. over 40,000 natives, soldiers (including jack-tars from Dewey&#8217;s fleet, Spaniards and Americans) and foreign
+residents had assembled around this bandstand to hear the Address of Welcome and to witness the sports. When the speaker arose
+to deliver the address, for which he was afterward voted, and presented with, a medal by the Eight Army Corps, he said in
+part (verbatim report):
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;On behalf of these committeemen who have spared no efforts to make these Field Day Exercises a success, and this occasion
+one long to be remembered by those who have assembled here this afternoon, I bid you, one and all&#8212;officers, soldiers, sailors
+and civilians of every nationality&#8212;a hearty welcome.&#8221;
+<a id="d0e731"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e731">73</a>]</span></p>
+<p>&#8220;Again to you, the members of Admiral Dewey&#8217;s fleet, I feel obligated to extend a separate and special welcome; for without
+your chivalrous devotion to duty last May Day, yon shell-riven wrecks (part of unraised Spanish fleet visible above the bay)
+would not bespeak the down-fall of a sister nation, and we ourselves would not have been permitted to assemble here this afternoon.
+There is no braver man on land or sea than the American marine; and on behalf of the entire American army of occupation, I
+bid you a most cordial welcome.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>Touching upon the question of territorial expansion, the speaker said:
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;This was a war for humanity, not for conquest. But simply because it suddenly closed and left us in possession of large tracts
+of new territory, is no reason why these spoils of war should be given up. I hold this to be true Americanism: that wherever
+the old flag is established through sacrifice of American blood, whether it be on the barren sands of the desert, at the frigid
+extremes of the <a id="d0e738"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e738">74</a>]</span>earth, or on the rich and fertile islands of the sea, there is should remain triumphant, shedding forth beams of liberty to
+the oppressed, shouts of defiance to the oppressor, and furnish protection and enlightenment to all who come beneath its streaming
+folds forever!&#8221; (applause).
+
+</p>
+<p>A chubby Filipino maiden, standing near the speaker&#8217;s stand, and who had listened intently to every word of the address, because
+she now understood the English tongue, quietly elbowed her way through the dense crowd which was gradually becoming more compressed,
+until she reached a car drawn by two Chinese ponies on the old street car line running south from Manila to Fort Malate and
+back. Taking the car she rode up town to the Escolta. Going into the postoffice, she hastily wrote and mailed to Aguinaldo
+at Malolos a letter containing an account of what was said. It follows:
+
+<a id="d0e742"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e742">75</a>]</span>
+</p>
+<div class="blockquote">
+<div class="body">
+<div class="div1">
+<p>&#8220;Manila, P. I., Jan. 1, 1899.
+
+
+</p>
+<p>My Dear General:
+
+</p>
+<p>Those wretched Americans are holding some kind of exercises on the Luneta this afternoon. I heard one of the speeches. It
+was awful bad. The fellow talked loud. He swung his hands in the air and the crowd seemed to get terribly excited over what
+he was saying.
+
+</p>
+<p>He told about that treaty of peace, and he said no power under the sun would haul down the American flag from over Manila.
+
+</p>
+<p>It made me angry. I am going right out to the Filipino trenches to see my Uncle (Colonel Miguel). He&#8217;ll fix those fellows.
+I&#8217;ll bet he&#8217;ll haul down their flag before tomorrow morning.
+
+
+</p>
+<p>Goodby,
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie.&#8221;</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div><p>
+
+
+</p>
+<p>The evening program on the Luneta, which followed the afternoon exercises, was largely literary in its nature. It consisted
+of <a id="d0e765"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e765">76</a>]</span>music by the California band, singing by the famous Washington Male Quartet, fancy dancing, selected recitations, and stump
+speeches. In addition, Privates Green and Martin boxed four rounds, much to the satisfaction of the natives.
+
+</p>
+<p>The program had just been completed when the Master of Ceremonies received from the American general in charge a note telling
+him to announce the conclusion of the program at once and to order all soldiers to report immediately at their respective
+regimental headquarters;&#8212;trouble had been reported at the out-posts. Reinforcements were hastened to several of the out-post
+reserves, and it appeared that the expected insurrection was at hand.
+
+</p>
+<p>After the out-break by the Filipinos on New Year&#8217;s night, it was evident to both sides that it was only a question of a short
+time when blood would be spilled in abundance. The Filipinos occupied all of the block-houses&#8212;some seventeen in number&#8212;around
+the city of Manila. This forced the <a id="d0e771"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e771">77</a>]</span>Americans to stand in the open and do guard duty exposed.
+
+</p>
+<p>The Filipino troops were saucy. They couldn&#8217;t understand why men should be armed with rifles and not be permitted to shoot.
+They tormented the American soldiers daily with hideous pranks. They grew bolder, and pushed their out-posts forward until
+they stood within a few feet of the American sentries.
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie went out and back through the American lines at will. She secretly kept the Filipino army thoroughly posted on the arrival
+of new troops from America. Occasionally she would take the train and go up to Malolos to see Aguinaldo. She was the best
+posted person in the Philippines as to what was going on in each of the hostile armies. Nobody suspected her. She was respected
+by the American troops. Everybody came to know her.
+
+</p>
+<p>Just before dusk, on the evening of February 4th, 1899, Marie and her mother left the city of Manila, in a cariole, drawn
+by a <a id="d0e779"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e779">78</a>]</span>Chinese pony which they had recently purchased. They had in it all of their most precious household trinkets. As they passed
+Colonel John M. Stotsenberg, commanding the 1st Nebraska volunteers, stationed on McLeod&#8217;s hill at the eastern edge of Manila,
+he recognized them, and called to Marie, &#8220;Where are you going?&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Out on a little trip,&#8221; retorted Marie.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;How soon will you be back?&#8221; asked he.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;O, I can&#8217;t tell,&#8221; responded Marie. &#8220;Mother is getting so nervous that we thought best to go away for awhile.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Say, Marie,&#8221; said the colonel, &#8220;do you know who the Filipino officer is in command of all those thousands of troops that
+are now assembling in the ravines between the hills along the far side of the river valley, yonder?&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;No, I do not,&#8221; she declared with an emphatic swing of her head.
+
+</p>
+<p>But she was lying. It was Colonel Miguel, her own uncle. She knew about it. He had secretly <a id="d0e793"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e793">79</a>]</span>informed her that he was preparing to attack the city and burn it and that he was going to exterminate the American army of
+occupation and all foreign residents that fell into the hands of his mighty army. He told her that he had chosen the east
+side of the city as his main point of attack, so that Dewey could not reach his troops with the shells from his gun boats
+in case he tried to assist the American army, without elevating his guns and shooting completely over the city&#8212;a thing wholly
+impractical within itself, as Dewey could not determine whether his shells would be falling among the Filipino or the American
+troops. It was he who advised her to take her mother and flee to the hills for refuge.
+
+</p>
+<p>Colonel Stotsenberg then asked Marie if she knew anything about the proposed attack on the city by her people. This, she denied
+also. The colonel&#8217;s face flushed. Pulling back the flap of his tent, he said emphatically: &#8220;Do you see that gun, Marie? Tell
+those fellows over there when you pass their <a id="d0e797"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e797">80</a>]</span>lines that I said they could have trouble whenever they want it.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie drove on.
+
+</p>
+<p>Inside the colonel&#8217;s tent stood a large gun from the Utah battery, mounted, loaded, ready for action; its threatening nose
+was pointed directly at the line of little brown men assembled across the valley. The Filipinos were smarting for trouble.
+They wanted it badly. Wherever and whenever possible they improved every opportunity to bring it about. The trouble came.
+Colonel Stotsenberg that night used the cannon he had pointed out to Marie. A long pile of mangled forms lying at the base
+of the river hills on the opposite of the valley next morning told the results.
+
+
+
+<a id="d0e803"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e803">81</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+<div id="d0e804" class="div1"><span class="pagenum">
+[<a href="#d0e226">Contents</a>]
+</span><h2 class="label">Chapter VI.</h2>
+<h2 class="normal">As A Spy</h2><a id="d0e809"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e809">83</a>]</span><p>Marie was well equipped by instinct and experience for a spy. The tragic nature of such work was exceptionally inviting to
+her. When a chance came to undertake it, she lost no time in embracing the opportunity.
+
+</p>
+<p>After passing out through the American lines, she drove on down the slope of the hill and crossed the San Juan River on the
+old stone bridge where the fighting was begun that night by young Grayson of the Nebraska regiment. After reaching the Filipinos&#8217;
+lines she at once reported to her uncle, Colonel Miguel, and had an extended interview with him.
+
+</p>
+<p>Secret plans were agreed upon whereby she was to become the colonel&#8217;s chief scout. Two Filipino soldiers were sent to accompany
+her old mother to the little town of Angono on the eastern bank of Lake Laguna de Bay, near its northern end. A native family,
+<a id="d0e816"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e816">84</a>]</span>quite familiar with the Sampalits and related to them, lived in this village. Marie stayed with the troops in the field. Her
+young brain danced at the thought of more bloodshed. She must be in the fight.
+
+</p>
+<p>Just what part Marie took in the attack made upon the Americans by the Filipinos on the night of February 4th, and in the
+fighting on February 5th, the world will never know. The two main figures in these operations were Colonel Miguel, in command
+of the main portion of the Filipino forces, and Colonel Stotsenberg, who commanded the 1st Nebraska volunteers. Before the
+close of the war these men were both shot; consequently, there is no one left to tell the story, and history is silent on
+the point.
+
+</p>
+<p>After the fight of February 4 and 5, the entire line of block-houses and intrenchments circumscribing Manila, were in the
+hands of the Americans. From the Pasig river on the east, around the city to the bay on the north, this line was commanded
+by Major-General MacArthur; the corresponding <a id="d0e822"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e822">85</a>]</span>semi-circle on the south, by Major-General Anderson.
+
+</p>
+<p>During the next seven weeks, fresh troops were constantly arriving. Each side was preparing for the long, inevitable conflict.
+
+</p>
+<p>At day break, on March 25, General MacArthur, leaving Hall&#8217;s brigade in the trenches and placing those of Otis and Hale on
+the firing line, which was over seven miles in length, made a brilliant charge along the entire front on the Filipinos&#8217; breastworks
+about a mile and a half distant and constructed parallel to those of the Americans&#8217;.
+
+</p>
+<p>Before night he had cut the Filipino army into hopeless fragments; had advanced his own army over nine miles; had inflicted
+a terrible loss upon Aguinaldo&#8217;s troops; had demonstrated to them the difference between a determined American advance and
+an irresolute Spanish one; and had taken up in earnest the invasion of Luzon, the capture of the Filipinos&#8217; temporary capital,
+Malolos, the overthrow of their provisional government, <a id="d0e830"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e830">86</a>]</span>and the establishment of American sovereignty throughout the entire archipelago.
+
+</p>
+<p>That night, about eleven o&#8217;clock, a nervous Filipino woman came walking down along the American out-post reserves which, during
+actual war, are usually only from 100 to 200 feet in the rear of the sentries. She reached Company &#8220;G&#8217;s&#8221; reserve of the 1st
+South Dakota Volunteers, where she was ordered to halt. She refused, but acted as though she did not understand. Drawing a
+large bamboo bonnet down over her face to conceal her identity, she mumbled something apparently to herself, and walked rapidly
+on. In a moment she was seized; her bonnet was torn off; her identity revealed: it was Marie.
+
+</p>
+<p>She had been counting the American out-posts and the reserves to see if the defeated Filipinos, with the reinforcements which
+they had received, would be warranted in making a night attack.
+
+</p>
+<p>She boldly denied her identification; fought, scratched, scrambled&#8212;making it necessary <a id="d0e838"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e838">87</a>]</span>to employ two privates, a corporal and a sergeant to send her to the rear.
+
+</p>
+<p>When she was taken before Major William F. Allison, commanding the 3rd battalion of the South Dakotas, who was acting as field-officer
+that night, he ordered her restrained until morning. A tired private was detailed to guard her. He gave her a rubber poncho,
+and insisted that she wrap herself up in it and lie down to sleep. Although she drew the poncho about her to keep herself
+warm (it grew very chilly before morning) she refused to sleep, and made repeated efforts to escape. Her teeth chattered and
+she seemed distressed&#8212;evidently through fear of what the morning might bring to her.
+
+</p>
+<p>The next day she was set free, after taking a solemn oath to return to Manila and not take any further part in the insurrection.
+She pleaded earnestly for her liberty, and voluntarily promised that after her return to Manila she would do washing free
+of charge for the American soldiers who were sick in quarters.
+<a id="d0e844"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e844">88</a>]</span></p>
+<p>After being liberated, Marie walked eastward, following an irregular sled-road; that is, a road-way used by the Filipinos
+for sledding their rice to market. This is done by means of a bamboo sled drawn over the dry ground by a caribou. She followed
+this road for over two miles until she came to the San Mateo river.
+
+</p>
+<p>Although given a few hardtack by her captors at the time of her release, she was getting hungry. As she approached the stream
+she noticed an old Filipino standing near his bamboo cabin which was neatly tucked away oh the slope of a deep ravine near
+by. Turning from her pathway which had now grown somewhat indistinct she approached the old gentleman.
+
+</p>
+<p>When quite close to him she said, &#8220;Buenos dias,&#8221; (Good morning in Spanish.)
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;<span id="d0e853" class="corr" title="Source: Magundi eropo">Magandang umaga</span>,&#8221; (Good morning, in Tagalo), muttered the old man.
+
+</p>
+<p>After a brief conversation during which Marie told him that she had been captured by the Americans, had been terribly misused
+<a id="d0e858"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e858">89</a>]</span>and he had a miraculous escape, he invited her into his cabin where his aged wife gave her something to eat. This breakfast
+consisted of boiled rice, some fish which the old man had just brought from his set lines in the San Mateo river, and some
+bacon which he had found along the trail made by the American&#8217;s pack train the day before.
+
+</p>
+<p>While the old couple were outside of their home&#8212;he breaking up some bamboo with which to re-kindle the fire, and she, cleaning
+the fish&#8212;Marie ransacked the house. She stole a large diamond ring which the old man had taken from the finger of a Spanish
+officer during the previous insurrection. She opened an old mahogany chest and took from it a rosary valued at several hundred
+dollars; also a gold lined cup which the old man, himself, had stolen from a Spanish priest, and some Spanish coins.
+
+</p>
+<p>After a hearty lunch, she started on.
+
+</p>
+<p>Crossing the river at the rapids, on the boulders which projected above the water, she quickened her steps and hurried along.
+<a id="d0e866"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e866">90</a>]</span>Changing her course to the southward, she started for the northern end of Lake <span id="d0e868" class="corr" title="Source: Leguna">Laguna</span> de Bay to see her mother.
+
+</p>
+<p>She had not gone far through a small clump of timber when she came upon the corpse of a Filipino soldier who had been shot
+in the previous day&#8217;s engagement,&#8212;perhaps by a stray ball. Hastily stealing the cross which hung from a small cord about his
+neck, and a valueless ring from one of his fingers, she seized his Mauser rifle and his cartridge belt which was partly filled
+with ammunition, and then resumed her journey.
+
+</p>
+<p>A short distance ahead was a large opening&#8212;an old rice field well cleared. She had scarcely begun to cross it when she heard
+a noise. She turned and saw the bow-legged old man whom she had robbed, with a machete in his hand, coming after her as fast
+as he could. He had discovered that the rosary was missing, and upon looking around, that several other things were gone;
+therefore he at once started in pursuit of the fiend who had just enjoyed his hospitality. <a id="d0e875"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e875">91</a>]</span>Marie was not disturbed. Raising to her shoulder the rifle which she had just found, she took deliberate aim and at the first
+shot laid him low in death.
+
+</p>
+<p>She reached the small native village of Angono, where her mother was stopping, about four o&#8217;clock in the afternoon of March
+26th.
+
+</p>
+<p>The old lady was wonderfully elated to receive the new jewels which Marie had stolen. She put on the rosary and danced about
+in the native hut like a young child on Christmas morning, when it sees the gorged stocking fastened to its bed.
+
+
+
+<a id="d0e881"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e881">93</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+<div id="d0e882" class="div1"><span class="pagenum">
+[<a href="#d0e226">Contents</a>]
+</span><h2 class="label">Chapter VII.</h2>
+<h2 class="normal">Off For Baler</h2><a id="d0e887"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e887">95</a>]</span><p>That night Marie had a good rest. The next morning, fired with ambition and discontent, she lit her accustomed cigarette and
+started for Manila. Instead of going overland, she went in a row boat via the Pasig river which drains the lake into Manila
+bay and which flows through the city of Manila situated at its mouth.
+
+</p>
+<p>While stealthily prowling around through Manila during the next few days, Marie accidentally discovered that plans were being
+carried out by the Americans to relieve the remnant of the old Spanish garrison of fifty men stationed at the little town
+of Baler, near the eastern coast of Luzon. This garrison was of course surrendered to the American forces with the remainder
+of the Spanish army on August 13, 1898, but as all lines of communication with them had been destroyed by the Filipinos they
+had never <a id="d0e892"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e892">96</a>]</span>been officially notified of the capitulation. Scouting parties brought in the information that they were being besieged by
+a horde of blood-thirsty Filipinos which outnumbered them ten to one, and that it was only a question of time before all would
+be exterminated.
+
+</p>
+<p>Accordingly, Admiral Dewey and General Otis decided that something must be done at once to relieve them. A rescuing party
+was formed and placed aboard the &#8220;Yorktown,&#8221; which carried them around the southern point of Luzon and then northward to the
+mouth of the Baler river.
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie, nerved by the thought of a new exploit, forgot her oath not to take up arms against the Americans again during the
+insurrection, and hastily departed overland for Baler to notify the besieging Filipinos of what was to take place, and to
+help them as best she could to resist the advance of the rescuing party.
+
+</p>
+<p>Although Baler is situated on the Baler river, near the eastern coast of Luzon, and <a id="d0e900"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e900">97</a>]</span>Manila is on the west side of the island Baler is, nevertheless, almost directly north of Manila. This is caused by the deep
+indention of Manila bay, on the extreme eastern side of which Manila is situated, and by the abrupt inclination to the westward
+of the eastern coast line of Luzon directly above a point straight east of Manila.
+
+</p>
+<p>In starting on her journey Marie left Manila by a little Filipino foot-path which enters the city in the northeastern part
+near the San Sebastian church. She followed it to Block-house No. 4, which is situated about three miles north and a trifle
+east of Manila. At that point she took a road which veered off perceptibly to the east for a short distance and which was
+made by the Americans&#8217; commissary train on the morning that the advance was begun toward Malolos, March 25, preceding.
+
+</p>
+<p>She had gone but a quarter of a mile when her attention was attracted to a board used as the head-stone for a grave only a
+few feet distant from her pathway. She <a id="d0e906"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e906">98</a>]</span>walked over to in and found these words inscribed thereon:
+
+
+</p>
+<div class="blockquote">
+<div class="body">
+<div class="div1">
+<p class="aligncenter">&#8220;R. I. P. D. O. M.
+
+
+</p>
+<p class="aligncenter">Wat Erbuf Falo
+
+
+</p>
+<p class="aligncenter">Born &#8212; (?) Died, February 12, 1899.
+
+</p>
+<div class="&#xA; poem&#xA; ">
+<p class="line" style=""><span>To those who bring flowers to this lonely grave,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>Some facts on its headstone we wish to engrave;</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>If this mound could speak no doubt it would tell
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>Bill Sherman was right when he said, &#8217;War is Hell.&#8217;</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>He charged on two pickets whose names are below;
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>They took him for niggers,&#8212;poor wronged buffalo.</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>As to the way he met death, everybody knows how;
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>As to whom he belonged we don&#8217;t caribou.</span></p>
+</div>
+<p>Signed: Barney and Barkley, Co. &#8220;M,&#8221; 1st. Col. Vols.&#8221;</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div><p>
+
+
+</p>
+<p>It was now April 2nd, and Marie had <a id="d0e940"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e940">99</a>]</span>ahead of her about ninety miles overland to be made on foot or else on horse-back; and it was necessary for her to hurry along,
+as the rescuing party was scheduled to reach the mouth of Baler river April 10th, or 12th.
+
+</p>
+<p>Her course led past the little shack on the bank of the San Mateo river, where she had robbed the elderly couple who had been
+so kind to her and near where she later had shot the old man when he was pursuing her to regain possession of his stolen property.
+
+</p>
+<p>She found it deserted; but in a little bamboo corral nearby she found three Chinese ponies. Evidently they had made their
+escape from the scene of battle and had drifted into this yard for refuge. There was a small stack of rice straw just outside
+the corral. From this Marie soon made a stoutly-twisted rope which she hastily arranged in the form of a bridle. Placing it
+over the head of the largest pony she mounted him and rode off.
+
+</p>
+<p>She got ten miles beyond this last stopping <a id="d0e948"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e948">100</a>]</span>place before sunset. That night she stopped at a small inland village. As she lay down to sleep on the bamboo floor in the
+hut of a Tagalo family whose acquaintance she had readily formed, recollections of the place which she had passed during the
+afternoon where she had previously robbed the old couple immediately after she was released upon oath by the Americans, suggested
+to her the thought that she was violating her oath; that she was now out in a country where she might be betrayed at any moment
+by her own people, or else be captured by a squad of American infantry or cavalry; therefore, she decided that on the following
+day she would destroy her identity.
+
+</p>
+<p>Upon retiring the previous night Marie coiled up for a pillow her head of long black hair. &#8220;I hate to give it up,&#8221; thought
+she, &#8220;but what will the Americans do to me if they capture me another time? Oh! well, after the war is over it will soon grow
+out again.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>The next morning, after a scanty breakfast <a id="d0e954"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e954">101</a>]</span>of bananas and rice, and a pineapple which Marie salted heavily before she ate it, she went to a native barber and had her
+long hair cut close to the scalp, except for a little tuft on top which she had him brush up for a pompadour.
+
+</p>
+<p>Before cutting off her hair the barber tied a piece of hemp very tightly around it, just back of her neck. After he had detached
+it, he held it in front of Marie and asked her what she wished done with it. She took it in her own hands.
+
+</p>
+<p>The barber kept on trimming her shortened hair. Marie stopped talking and seemed to be in deep meditation.
+
+</p>
+<p>Presently the barber said. &#8220;That&#8217;s all.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie arose from the rough mahogany slab on which she had been sitting, handed him a puesta (twenty cents, Mexican), looked
+out of the window and said, &#8220;I&#8217;ll tell you what I&#8217;ll do: I&#8217;ll trade you my hair for that quilas (two-wheeled cart) standing
+there.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;All right&#8221;; said the barber, &#8220;My pony is dead, and the war has so devasted the <a id="d0e966"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e966">102</a>]</span>country, and money has become so scarce, that I can&#8217;t afford to buy another one.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;The harness hanging on it goes with the cart,&#8221; said Marie.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Oh no!&#8221; exclaimed the barber, &#8220;my wife borrowed that, and I must return it.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;It doesn&#8217;t make any difference to whom it belongs,&#8221; said Marie, emphatically, &#8220;you traded me the cart, and everything that
+was in it goes with the trade. How do you suppose I could hitch my pony into the cart without a harness?&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>Just then she pulled a bolo out from under her apron. The barber said no more.
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie hitched her pony into the cart and started on toward Baler.
+
+</p>
+<p>That day she followed a good road leading toward the mountains near the eastern coast of Luzon. By night her pony had made
+twenty miles.
+
+</p>
+<p>She had already reached the foot-hills. It was impossible for her to make head-way any longer with the cart. She would soon
+be across the mountains and be in the <a id="d0e982"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e982">103</a>]</span>region to be approached by the American relief party. What was to be done?
+
+</p>
+<p>A happy thought came to Marie. She clasped her hands and muttered to herself, &#8220;I&#8217;ll trade the cart for a suit of men&#8217;s clothes
+and trade the harness for a sombrero,&#8221; (bamboo hat.)
+
+</p>
+<p>Since the middle of the afternoon she had been driving parallel to a stream that wound its way, nearby, from the mountains
+across the plains to the sea. Villages along the banks were numerous. At night fall she was still in Tagalo territory. It
+was her own tribe. She soon found a place to stay over night. Her pony was turned loose in a vacant yard, with an old bamboo
+fence around it, and given some young rice.
+
+</p>
+<p>That evening while smoking cigarettes, and while inflaming the minds of the villagers with startling stories about the atrocities,
+of the American soldiers, Marie finally succeeded in making the trade which she had planned during the afternoon.
+
+</p>
+<p>Next morning, April 5, she rode on. Before <a id="d0e992"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e992">104</a>]</span>her lay sixty miles of unknown territory to be covered during the next four days, if she were to reach Baler in time to warn
+the besieging Filipinos of the contemplated attack by the Americans.
+
+</p>
+<p>A half mile out from the village, Marie came to an abrupt turn in the road. Near by was a dense cluster of banana trees. She
+dismounted, and while her pony was nibbling young rice she went into the thicket and changed her attire. Then she tied a good-sized
+stone up in her old clothes and threw them into the river. As she stood on the bank watching them sink, she saw her shadow
+in the water. How changed she looked! The sombrero was such a relief in keeping the hot sun off her head.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Now, I&#8217;ll not be recognized,&#8221; thought she. &#8220;How nice it is to be dressed like a man. From now on I mean to play a man&#8217;s part
+and be a full-fledged soldier.&#8221;
+
+
+
+<a id="d0e998"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e998">105</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+<div id="d0e999" class="div1"><span class="pagenum">
+[<a href="#d0e226">Contents</a>]
+</span><h2 class="label">Chapter VIII.</h2>
+<h2 class="normal">The Gilmore Incident</h2><a id="d0e1004"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1004">107</a>]</span><p>Marie reached her destination late in the evening of April 9th, and she at once notified the officers commanding the Filipinos
+who were besieging Baler, what to expect. Knowing that with so small a force, if the Americans undertook to relieve the Spanish
+garrison, it would necessarily have to be done by way of the Baler river&#8212;as the town of Baler where the Spanish garrison was
+located is some two miles up the river from where it empties into the Pacific ocean, and the American troops were too greatly
+outnumbered by the Filipinos to make a land expedition safe,&#8212;she suggested to them the advisability of fortifying the river
+at specific intervals along either bank and of taking the precaution to cover the fortifications with freshly-cut brush so
+that the Americans could not locate them for the purpose of bombarding them in case they saw fit to load <a id="d0e1007"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1007">108</a>]</span>some of the smaller cannon on cascoes and make their way up the river for an attack in that way.
+
+</p>
+<p>The Filipinos took her suggestions, and the entrenchments and places for the sentries were quickly, yet very wisely, arranged.
+It was during the dry season and the river was very low at the time. This made it possible to dig ditches on the sand bars
+which extended far out into the stream; and by throwing into the river the loose sand taken therefrom, to conceal these entrenchments
+by strewing over them some fresh-cut limbs and old under brush which had the appearance of having drifted to their lodgment.
+
+</p>
+<p>The Yorktown arrived off the mouth of the Baler river, April 11, as scheduled. Ensign Stanley went ashore, under a flag of
+truce, where, to his surprise, he was cordially received by the Filipino officers; but their exceptionally good behavior and
+the twinkle of their eyes told only too plainly to the ensign that something was wrong. He therefore returned to the Yorktown
+without having <a id="d0e1013"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1013">109</a>]</span>accomplished anything in particular.
+
+</p>
+<p>The next morning, at four o&#8217;clock, Lieutenant Gilmore and sixteen brave associates left the Yorktown in a row boat, and entered
+the mouth of the river. Ensign Stanley and Quartermaster Lysac were put ashore to reconnoiter. In a few minutes daylight broke
+forth and those left in the boat were discovered by the Filipino sentry who was walking his beat along the shore. He gave
+the alarm. Lieutenant Gilmore and his party could easily have pulled out to sea and gotten away, but humanity forbade it.
+What would become of the two scouts who went ashore? Their comrades in the boat could not desert them, so they rowed up the
+river into the very jaws of impending danger.
+
+</p>
+<p>Presently out of a concealed trench hundreds of armed Filipinos opened a deadly fire on Gilmore and his comrades, at only
+fifty yards distance. The water at this point was shallow. The boat got stuck in the mud. There was nothing to do but to fight.
+In a moment Morrisy fell dead, having been <a id="d0e1019"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1019">110</a>]</span>shot through the head; Dillon followed; then McDonald, then Nygard;&#8212;Marie was doing deadly work with her Mauser rifle.
+
+</p>
+<p>The Americans returned the fire as best they could; but what was the use. They could see nothing to fire at, so perfectly
+had the Filipinos screened their trenches; besides, the Filipinos were using smokeless powder.
+
+</p>
+<p>Four of Gilmore&#8217;s men were already dead, two were mortally wounded and begging their comrades to shoot them before they fell
+into the hands of the Filipinos, and two more were slightly wounded. Most of the oars had been badly shattered by the enemy&#8217;s
+rifle balls. In this moment of desperation, Ellsworth, Woodbury and Edwards jumped overboard and tried to push the boat out
+to mid-stream. It was no use; the tide was coming in and the current was so strong that they could not compete against it.
+
+</p>
+<p>Lieutenant Gilmore was firing his revolver. He decided to change and use one of <a id="d0e1027"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1027">111</a>]</span>the dead men&#8217;s rifles. As he picked it up he noticed the lock had been struck by a Remington ball and the clip had been jammed
+in. He handed it to an apprentice lad, named Venville, to be fixed.
+
+</p>
+<p>The boy had scarcely begun to examine the gun, when a bullet struck him in the fleshy part of the neck. He had never been
+under fire before. Looking up calmly, he said, &#8220;Mr. Gilmore, I&#8217;m hit.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>In a moment another bullet struck him in the chest and came out of his arm pit. With his attention <span id="d0e1033" class="corr" title="Source: rivited">riveted</span> on his task, he remarked, &#8220;I&#8217;m hit again, Mr. Gilmore.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>Only a moment later another ball grazed the side of his head and cut a painful wound in his scalp. &#8220;Mr. Gilmore, they&#8217;ve hit
+me again,&#8221; he muttered, while he kept on working at the gun, with blood running down all over him.
+
+</p>
+<p>In a few minutes a fourth ball passed through the lad&#8217;s ankle, one of the most painful parts of the body in which to get shot.
+This time, with a slight tremble in his voice, <a id="d0e1040"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1040">112</a>]</span>he said, &#8220;Mr. Gilmore, I&#8217;m hit once more; but I&#8217;ve fixed your gun, Sir.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>Just at this moment the Filipinos saw that the Americans&#8217; fire had practically ceased. Throwing back from off their trench
+the limbs and underbrush that had concealed them, the Filipinos, armed with guns, spears, bolos and clubs, made a bold dash
+for the boat and captured the entire crew.
+
+
+
+<a id="d0e1044"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1044">113</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+<div id="d0e1045" class="div1"><span class="pagenum">
+[<a href="#d0e226">Contents</a>]
+</span><h2 class="label">Chapter IX.</h2>
+<h2 class="normal">The American Prisoners</h2><a id="d0e1050"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1050">115</a>]</span><p>Those of the Americans who were alive and able to help themselves were ordered to go ashore on the sand bar, where the Filipinos
+robbed them of their personal effects and then lined them up preparatory to shooting them all down in a body. Gilmore, being
+an officer, protested against having his hands tied. He claimed, according to the accepted rules of warfare, that on account
+of his rank he had a right to die honorably with his hands free. The Filipinos have great superstitions about &#8220;rank&#8221; in military
+affairs. Marie knew the significance of Gilmore&#8217;s request; she respected it.
+
+</p>
+<p>The Filipinos had loaded their rifles, cocked them, raised the same to their shoulders, had taken aim, and Marie was about
+to give the fatal command, &#8220;Fire!&#8221;, when a shout from the bank stopped her and for a moment engaged the attention of both
+the <a id="d0e1055"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1055">116</a>]</span>Americans and the Filipinos. It came from a Filipino officer, running down to the shore. He ordered them to stop. One second
+longer would have been too late.
+
+</p>
+<p>This Tagalo officer ordered the Americans to get back into their boat and to row across to the opposite shore. After bailing
+the water out of the boat and plugging up the holes in it made by the enemy&#8217;s rifle balls, they obeyed his command.
+
+</p>
+<p>When they went ashore, Lieutenant Gilmore asked permission to bury his dead comrades. This privilege was emphatically denied.
+What was done with their bodies by the Filipinos is hard to tell, but in all probability, as was customary with the natives,
+they cut them into fragments and threw them away.
+
+</p>
+<p>The ones who were mortally wounded, but who were still alive, were placed under a tree by Gilmore and his comrades, and left
+to die. The Lieutenant asked that a native doctor be summoned to give them aid, but it <a id="d0e1063"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1063">117</a>]</span>was not done. What their fate was Eternity alone will reveal.
+
+</p>
+<p>Gilmore and his comrades picked up the lesser wounded and carried them, and together the whole procession was marched inland
+about a mile to the Filipino Commandante&#8217;s headquarters.
+
+</p>
+<p>Here they were questioned at length. Gilmore asked permission to write a note to the commander of the Yorktown telling him
+of their fate. Permission was granted, but the note was never delivered. The two scouts who went ashore, returned to the Yorktown
+in the afternoon and reported that they had heard heavy firing up the river.
+
+</p>
+<p>After waiting several days for news of some kind for them, and finally concluding that they were either captured or killed,
+the crew of the Yorktown, heavy-hearted over their failure and their sacrifice, steamed back to Manila.
+
+</p>
+<p>During the afternoon of the same day that the battle took place, the American prisoners <a id="d0e1073"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1073">118</a>]</span>were ordered to march to an old bamboo church in the northern outskirts of the little town of Baler, a mile and a half farther
+on. By this time the wounded men were suffering terribly. Little Venville&#8217;s ankle had swollen badly. From his four wounds
+he had bled so much that he had grown faint. Therefore, he and several of the others had to be carried.
+
+</p>
+<p>En route to their new destination, the Americans passed in sight of the old stone church being used as a fortress by the Spanish
+garrison whom they had originally set out to relieve. The Americans had gone to the Philippines to fight the Spaniards. They
+were now sacrificing their lives to save them.
+
+</p>
+<p>At the bamboo church, an old Filipino with a kindly face and a manner that elevated him above his fellow tribesmen, came in
+to see them. He examined the wounded and then disappeared. Presently he returned with some large leaves that resembled rhubarb,
+under his arm. Out of the big stems of these native herbs he squeezed a milky <a id="d0e1079"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1079">119</a>]</span>secretion which he permitted to drop into the gaping wounds of the Americans. The torture of the wounded occasioned by this
+liquid was damnable. The men grew deathly pale. They rolled and screamed and begged to be shot. But it did not last long.
+In ten minutes the torture had ceased, the men became quiet, the swelling around their wounds was gradually reduced, and their
+temperatures soon lowered. The herb doctor evidently knew his business.
+
+</p>
+<p>The next day the Filipinos received orders from Aguinaldo, who, with his appointed congress, was now at San Isidro, to march
+the captured Americans to his headquarters. Accordingly, the trip was undertaken. But the apprentice lad, Venville, was unable
+to go along. Obeying the stubborn orders of the rapacious Filipinos his comrades left him lying on the floor of the old rickety
+bamboo church,&#8212;wounded&#8212;uncared for&#8212;suffering&#8212;hungry&#8212;thirsty&#8212;dying. A year later the assistance of the entire naval organization
+in the Philippines was given to <a id="d0e1083"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1083">120</a>]</span>the task of trying to ascertain from the Filipinos in the neighborhood of Baler some information concerning the lad&#8217;s whereabouts
+or his burial place, but no trace of him, dead or alive, could ever be found.
+
+
+</p>
+<div class="&#xA; poem&#xA; ">
+<p class="line" style=""><span>An aged mother, ill and bowed,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>Keeps asking, &#8220;Where&#8217;s my boy?&#8221;</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>But zephyrs from the Orient
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>Refuse to bring the joy.</span></p>
+</div>
+<p>Amid great privations the marching column crossed the mountains and the fertile plains on the opposite side, to the city of
+San Isidro. It was heralded in advance that the Americans were coming through the country. Obeying their greatest national
+instinct&#8212;curiosity&#8212;the natives assembled by thousands in the villages along the road. Every one of them kept crowding forward
+to get to touch the Americans to see what their skins felt like. Others were looking for the long feathers in their hair,
+which they had heard so much about. It was all the Filipino guards could do to restrain their own people. The latter, like
+monkeys, jabbered incessantly. <a id="d0e1096"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1096">121</a>]</span>Gilmore&#8217;s men hurled back at them defiant epithets. They realized that involuntarily they had become the chief actors in a
+new moving circus.
+
+</p>
+<p>Again, when they reached San Isidro, a great throng of curious natives had come to town to see them. These fellows were very
+hostile to the Americans. It was all the native guard could do to keep the Filipinos from doing violence to them. Gilmore
+was again questioned at length and then he was separated from his comrades and all were hurried off to jail.
+
+</p>
+<p>In a few days it was rumored that the American army was approaching the city. Aguinaldo and his associates hurriedly prepared
+to leave. Orders were given to march the prisoners overland north and then westward across another range of high mountains
+to Arancay, on the western coast of Luzon,&#8212;a distance of 100 miles.
+
+</p>
+<p>This time the crowd of prisoners was greatly increased. At San Isidro there were added 600 Spaniards; a small tribe of mountain
+<a id="d0e1104"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1104">122</a>]</span>Negritos whom Aguinaldo had originally sent to fight the Americans, but who, being armed only with spears and bolos, soon
+got tired of seeing their number decrease so rapidly before American riflemen, and refused to fight, and who were later imprisoned
+and terribly misused by Aguinaldo&#8217;s selected guards; and eighteen Americans in addition to Gilmore&#8217;s party (total twenty-six
+Americans), who had been captured in as many different ways around Manila by the crafty, cunning Filipinos. Among them was
+Frank Stone, of the U. S. Signal Corps, captured by some &#8220;amigos&#8221; (friendly natives) on the railroad track near Manila, while
+out strolling one Sunday afternoon; Private Curran, of the 16th U.S. Infantry who was grabbed within fifty feet of his own
+outpost, gagged and dragged into captivity; also a civilian who had gone to the Philippines to sell liquor.
+
+</p>
+<p>This fellow was captured by the Filipinos in the outskirts of Manila while he was searching for a small boatload of stolen
+<a id="d0e1108"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1108">123</a>]</span>beer. He was the life of the expedition. He took his captivity as a joke, told stories to keep the prisoners good natured,
+and painted on ever boulder that he passed the seemingly sacrilegious words, &#8220;Drink Blank&#8217;s beer on the road to H&#8212;&#8212;.&#8221; It was,
+however, this harmless practice that later on enabled the American relief party to follow the prisoners&#8217; trail.
+
+</p>
+<p>After reaching the western shore of Luzon, the party was marched northward along the beach, another 100 miles, to the city
+of Vigan. Here they were imprisoned for three months longer. The sudden presence of an American war-ship in the harbor, off
+Vigan, caused the natives to abandon that city and start inland with their prisoners for some mountain fastness. The Americans
+were separated from the rest of the prisoners whom they never saw again.
+
+</p>
+<p>High up in the mountains of northern Luzon, two of the American boys were taken sick with fever and fell down, exhausted.
+The Filipino lieutenant who had charge of the <a id="d0e1114"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1114">124</a>]</span>prisoners, ordered them to go on; they could not. He threatened to shoot them. Gilmore interceded for them without avail.
+The Americans refused to leave their Anglo-Saxon comrades and prepared to fight. At this moment the Filipino officer himself
+was suddenly taken ill, and by the time he was able to advance, the sick Americans were able to go along.
+
+</p>
+<p>A few days later they struggled over the crest of the divide and came upon the headwaters of a beautiful mountain torrent
+dancing down the rocky ledges in its onward course to the sea. At a widened place in the canon, the Filipinos withdrew from
+the Americans, and with guns in hand took their positions on the rocks round-about and above them.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Prepare to die,&#8221; said Gilmore to his companions; &#8220;they are going to shoot us.&#8221; Calling the Filipino lieutenant to his side
+Gilmore asked him why he did not shoot them on the opposite side of the mountains, <a id="d0e1120"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1120">125</a>]</span>and not have made them make all of that hard climb for nothing.
+
+</p>
+<p>The native officer said in reply: &#8220;My orders were to shoot all of you when I got you up in the mountains, where, in all probability,
+your bodies would be destroyed by wild animals and no trace of them ever be found by your countrymen; but a few nights ago
+when you showed me that crucifix tattooed on your chest while you were a midshipman in America, I decided not to carry out
+my order, but to let you all go free. I may be punished for disobedience of orders; but we are both bound together by the
+great Catholic church, and my conscience forbids that I should kill you.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>Gilmore replied: &#8220;You might as well shoot us as to set us free away up here in the mountains in our weakened condition with
+nothing to defend ourselves with against the savages whose territory we will have to cross in order to get to the sea. Can&#8217;t
+you spare us at least two rifles and some ammunition? If you will do this, I will give <a id="d0e1126"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1126">126</a>]</span>you a letter which, should you fall into the hands of the Americans, will make you safe and bring you ample reward.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>The Filipino looked meditatingly at the ground for several moments, then he calmly said, &#8220;I shall not dare to do it. An American
+relief party, seeking your liberation, is close on our heels. They will protect and care for you. Goodby!&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>Gilmore did not believe him.
+
+</p>
+<p>Under cover of the night the Filipinos disappeared. In the morning, after nine long, tedious months of captivity resulting
+from Marie Sampalit&#8217;s depredations,&#8212;sick, nearly starved, practically nude, with nothing but two battle axes and a bolo for
+both weapons of defense and for tools&#8212;the Americans at last found themselves free men in the wilds of northern Luzon, with
+positive death left behind, and with possible life and all of its happy associations still before them.
+
+</p>
+<p>Their first day of liberty was spent in preparing bamboo rafts on which to float down the tortuous, winding river to the sea.
+<a id="d0e1136"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1136">127</a>]</span>The next night they all slept well; and on the following morning, just after they had gotten up and begun to saunter around,
+everybody present was suddenly shocked by the shrill yell of a strong American voice. They all looked up, and while their
+hearts for a moment seemingly stopped beating and fairly rose in their throats, the liberated prisoners beheld the blue shirts
+and khaki trousers of Colonel Hare&#8217;s rescue party that for several weeks had been on their trail.
+
+</p>
+<p>What rejoicing! The bony, ill-clad prisoners fell on the strong bosoms of their rescuers and wept.
+
+</p>
+<p>Colonel Hare&#8217;s father, Judge Hare, of Washington, D.C., knew Gilmore personally. He had seen the military reports of his captivity
+among the natives. When his son bade him goodby as he started for the Philippines, Judge Hare said, &#8220;My boy, God bless you;
+find Gilmore and bring him home!&#8221; Colonel Hare had remained true to his trust.
+
+</p>
+<p>The party could not retrace their steps over the mountains, owing to the weakened <a id="d0e1144"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1144">128</a>]</span>condition of the prisoners and the lack of food. Their only chance for self-preservation and a possible return to civilization
+lay in carrying out Gilmore&#8217;s designs to build bamboo rafts and float down the river to the sea. This was done. In going over
+rapids and water-falls, many rafts were destroyed and new ones had to be built.
+
+</p>
+<p>Two of the boys got the measles. The raft on which one of them, Private Day, was being transported, got smashed on the rocks
+and he was thrown into the water. He took cold and died the next day. His comrades took his body with them and did not bury
+it until they finally reached the little town of Ambulug, at the mouth of the stream they had been following, on the northern
+coast of Luzon. There, amid a simple but impressive ceremony, it was buried in the church-yard of the cathedral to await the
+resurrection morn.
+
+</p>
+<p>At Ambulug the Americans secured ox-carts drawn by caribous and drove along the beach to the city of Aparri, at the mouth
+of <a id="d0e1150"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1150">129</a>]</span>the Cagayan river. Here they were met by a detachment of American Marines who took them aboard a war-ship, lying out to sea,
+which carried them around the northwest promontory of Luzon to the city of Vigan on the western coast, at which place they
+had been imprisoned for so long.
+
+</p>
+<p>Here they met General Young who shook hands with each of them; congratulated the rescued and complimented the rescuers.
+
+
+
+<a id="d0e1154"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1154">131</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+<div id="d0e1155" class="div1"><span class="pagenum">
+[<a href="#d0e226">Contents</a>]
+</span><h2 class="label">Chapter X.</h2>
+<h2 class="normal">Death of General Lawton.</h2><a id="d0e1160"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1160">133</a>]</span><p>After the battle of Baler, Marie and a few native soldiers hastened westward in advance of the prisoners, to San Isidro to
+notify Aguinaldo who had moved his headquarters to that place, that the Americans were advancing northward in great numbers
+and that nothing could impede their progress. This information had previously been conveyed to the Filipino general from other
+sources, so that Marie found him in his so-called congress packed up and ready to move,&#8212;a thing they were forced to do a few
+days after the American prisoners arrived. She accompanied them for several long, tedious months, acting as cook for the expedition
+and serving in other capacities&#8212;none of them seeming to her to be ample reward for all she had done.
+
+</p>
+<p>Early in the coming fall, Marie, tired of Aguinaldo&#8217;s game of hide-and-go-seek, and <a id="d0e1165"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1165">134</a>]</span>anxious to find out about her mother and to get into more fighting, if there be a chance, made her way back to Manila.
+
+</p>
+<p>But her conscience bothered her. She remembered that broken oath and many other acts of wanton treachery that would shock
+the civilized world. She feared that her own life would soon be sought either by the Americans or by the Filipinos. Accordingly
+she suggested to her mother that they again go to her aunt&#8217;s in the little town of Angono at the north end of Lake Laguna
+de Bay, where she had left her mother stationed when last they had parted. Her mother, growing old and nervous through accumulated
+years, past grievances, hard work and the strain of the present conflict, favored the plan; and so they departed on December
+2nd, taking the same road over McLeod&#8217;s Hill and on down over the Santa Mesa bridge that they had traveled on February 4th.
+
+</p>
+<p>Before leaving Manila she learned through the private Filipino Junta which was secretly assisting in the war by accumulating
+<a id="d0e1171"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1171">135</a>]</span>funds for its prosecution and by distributing among the native troops the inflammatory literature which was being promiscuously
+sent out by the people in the United States who opposed the war, that a secret reward of $10,000. had been offered for the
+death of General Lawton.
+
+</p>
+<p>About the middle of December, 1899, the General had returned to Manila from another telling campaign northward, when he learned
+that the Filipinos were assembling in large numbers under one of their fearless leaders, General Geronemo, on the San Mateo
+river, but a few miles out of Manila, for the purpose of making one more attempt to break through the American lines guarding
+that city.
+
+</p>
+<p>On December 17, Marie heard that another attack was to be made on Manila, so she left her mother at Angono and made her way
+to the Filipinos&#8217; camp along the San Mateo river, only a few miles south of where she had crossed it at the rapids the morning
+<a id="d0e1177"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1177">136</a>]</span>after she had been liberated under oath by Major Allison.
+
+</p>
+<p>The next day, she was in secret consultation with Geronemo, and she disclosed to him all the information she had concerning
+the defenses of Manila.
+
+</p>
+<p>That evening, Filipino scouts, dressed in female attire, brought to General Geronemo the news that the Americans, under General
+Lawton, who was supposed to be away up in the northern part of Luzon, had anticipated his movements and were assembling in
+the woods on the opposite side of the valley in large numbers, possibly for a night attack.
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie told Geronemo what she had learned while in Manila concerning the reward that had been secretly offered for the killing
+of General Lawton. He knew all about it and confirmed the offer. She told him all about her training as a marksman with the
+Spanish on Corregidor island and of her subsequent experience, and said she knew General Lawton well; that she could <a id="d0e1185"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1185">137</a>]</span>single him out, and in case he led his troops, as he usually did in battle, she was sure she could capture the prize.
+
+</p>
+<p>A place of unusual safety and concealment was selected along the Filipinos&#8217; lines, directly in front of the center of the
+probable point of attack by the Americans, for Marie, and for a Filipino lieutenant and a corporal, both of whom were also
+good shots.
+
+</p>
+<p>Geronemo had instructed them that Marie was to have the first three shots at the general, in case he appeared on the scene
+of battle. If she failed to hit him, the lieutenant was then to try it. After he had taken three shots, if he, too, failed,
+the corporal was to be given a chance.
+
+</p>
+<p>The next morning, December 19, the American line of battle came out of the woods on the opposite side of the valley, ready
+to charge on the Filipinos&#8217; position. The morning was bright and clear, so that General Lawton, with his tall figure, resplendent
+uniform and large white helmet, <a id="d0e1193"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1193">138</a>]</span>could easily be discerned by the entire Filipino command.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;I&#8217;ll fix him,&#8221; whispered Marie, &#8220;just wait till the firing begins, so that I can shoot without attracting attention to our
+position.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>In a moment, the Filipinos opened fire on the Americans all along the line. The latter sought cover. General Lawton remained
+erect. He made an ideal target. Marie took careful aim. &#8220;Bang!&#8221; went her rifle, and at that very moment this peerless leader
+of men, this hero of several wars, was shot through the heart and fell dead in the arms of his aide. His only words were,
+&#8220;I&#8217;m shot.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;See that! What did I tell you?&#8221; snapped out Marie, &#8220;I told you I&#8217;d get him! Now for my dinero.&#8221; (money).
+
+</p>
+<p>The Americans were so angered because of the sudden death of their beloved commander that they made a mad rush forward, without
+orders, and swept the Filipino army from the field.
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie returned to Manila where she <a id="d0e1205"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1205">139</a>]</span>claimed the reward for having shot the general. The lieutenant who was with her claimed that he did it, and by promising half
+of the bounty to the corporal for swearing to the lie, he proved it. Meager reports of the affair state that only $7000 of
+the money was actually paid over. Like Aguinaldo who crept into a cave northwest of Manila and sold out his country during
+the insurrection of 1896, and then could not collect his fee, so Marie, too, found herself deprived of the compensation for
+her bloody deed.
+
+
+
+<a id="d0e1207"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1207">141</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+<div id="d0e1208" class="div1"><span class="pagenum">
+[<a href="#d0e226">Contents</a>]
+</span><h2 class="label">Chapter XI.</h2>
+<h2 class="normal">North-bound</h2><a id="d0e1213"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1213">143</a>]</span><p>The controversy over the distribution of the fund in Manila for the death in any form of General Lawton permitted the unholy
+scheme to simmer its way into publicity. The United States authorities employed secret detectives to investigate the matter
+and if possible to locate the persons who claimed to be responsible for the act. Marie soon found herself under surveillance
+and she quickly left the city.
+
+</p>
+<p>Making her way north on horse back along the same route she had taken when on her way to Baler about a year before, she came
+to the city of San Miguel where one of the hardest battles of the war had been fought. The troops engaged in this fight had
+become so disorganized that all formation by regiments, companies, etc., had been broken up. Unfortunately, one of the Americans&#8217;
+dead privates could not be identified. He was buried <a id="d0e1218"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1218">144</a>]</span>where he fell, and a board tombstone was placed at the head of his grave, on which was carved this lonely word,
+
+
+
+</p>
+<p class="aligncenter">&#8220;UNKNOWN&#8221;.
+
+
+</p>
+<p>As Marie passed over the old field, she saw this grave and read the solemn word on its headstone. &#8220;Alas!&#8221; she muttered, &#8220;I
+wonder if the same sad fate will some day overtake me.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>The body of this &#8220;unknown&#8221; soldier was exhumed by the government a few months later and brought back to the United States
+for burial. Upon its arrival the following pathetic poem appeared in &#8220;Leslie&#8217;s Weekly&#8221;;
+
+
+</p>
+<div class="&#xA; poem&#xA; ">
+<h4 class="&#xA; lghead&#xA; ">JUST AN &#8220;UNKNOWN&#8221;</h4>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>After the fight was over,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>They found him stark and dead,</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>Where all the bamboo thicket
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>Was splashed and stained and red.</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>No name was missed at roll call,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>Not one among them knew</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>The slender, boyish figure
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>Arrayed in army blue.</span></p>
+</div><a id="d0e1245"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1245">145</a>]</span><div class="&#xA; poem&#xA; ">
+<p class="line" style=""><span>Among our fallen soldiers
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>They brought him o&#8217;er the deep,</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>And with the nation&#8217;s heroes
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>They laid him down to sleep.</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>A starry flag above him,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>And on the simple stone</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>That marked his final bivouac,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>The single word, &#8220;Unknown.&#8221;</span></p>
+</div>
+<div class="&#xA; poem&#xA; ">
+<p class="line" style=""><span>Perchance a mother watches,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>Her eyes with weeping dim,</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>Or sweetheart waits the postman
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>In vain for news of him.</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>While snow of winter freezes,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>And April violets thrust</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>Sweet blossoms through the grasses
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>Above his nameless dust.</span></p>
+</div>
+<div class="&#xA; poem&#xA; ">
+<p class="line" style=""><span>But when the last great trumpet
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>Shall sound the reveille,</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>And all the blue battalions
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>March up from land and sea,</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>He shall awake to glory&#8212;
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>Who sleeps unknown to fame,</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>And with Columbia&#8217;s bravest
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>Will answer to his name.</span></p>
+</div><a id="d0e1297"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1297">146</a>]</span><p>Her personal safety demanded that she continue her journey northward, without delay; also her inclination to rejoin Aguinaldo
+and his troops&#8212;although his exact whereabouts were unknown&#8212;invited her in this direction.
+
+</p>
+<p>At San Isidro, from which place Aguinaldo had been driven, she saw some American soldiers administering the water cure to
+some Filipinos in order to make them reveal the whereabouts of their wily general. Marie was angry. She yearned to shoot,
+but she was no longer on the aggressive; she was now a fugitive from justice. At this place she inspected the old Filipino
+prison and on its walls found the names of Gilmore and his party, whom she had helped to capture at Baler, who had been imprisoned
+there, and who were still alive when Aguinaldo was driven from the city of San Isidro by the approach of the Americans. She
+determined to take her revenge on them for this water cure punishment, if she ever found them. But the opportunity never came.
+<a id="d0e1302"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1302">147</a>]</span>So journeying on toward the northern part of Luzon she had many experiences, and she came in contact with tribes whom she
+had never seen before and whose dialect was foreign to her. Many things combined to retard her progress. Often she grew very
+weary and would have turned back, except for fear.
+
+</p>
+<p>Following up the valley of the Pampanga river and thence on northward along the Barat, she passed through the province of
+Nueva Ecija, crossed the Caraballo mountains which form its northern boundary, and then entered the province of Nueva Vizcaya,
+where she came upon the head-waters of the Rio Magat river.
+
+</p>
+<p>In crossing the Caraballo mountains she made her way through a deep gorge at night. It was now about the middle of February.
+A full moon shone at its best. The weather was ideal. Journeying was abnormally pleasant. Under favorable conditions, during
+times of peace, the trip she was taking would have been a delightful outing. Just <a id="d0e1308"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1308">148</a>]</span>now things were different. Small garrisons of American soldiers had crowded forward and were occupying the largest cities
+along her route. As yet she had not gotten beyond them. &#8220;A guilty conscience needs no accuser&#8221;; everywhere that she went she
+imagined herself to be under suspicion.
+
+</p>
+<p>Far up in the Caraballos she came across a little mountain torrent which leaped down over the mountain side from one rocky
+ledge to another at quite regular intervals in a series of waterfalls until it beat itself into a turbulent spray in the bed
+of the chasm below. The laughing moon filtered its beaming rays through the thin sheet of shimmering water as it danced down
+its course from precipice to precipice, and seemingly converted it into a great silvery stair-way connecting earth with heaven.
+Marie&#8217;s heart throbbed with emotion. The dashing of the falling water on the rocks below in the bed of the canon made a hollow
+sound as its echoes reverberated through the gorge above.
+
+</p>
+<p>A half mile farther up, the valley widened <a id="d0e1314"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1314">149</a>]</span>somewhat; and finding here some grass for her pony to forage on, she stopped for the night. The flimsy saddle was removed
+from her horse and converted into a crude pillow, in true cowboy style. Marie was uneasy. This was the first night in all
+her adventures that she had been absolutely alone, separated from both friends and foes, with no house to shelter her weary
+head, with the cloudless canopy of the silent heavens arched above her, the silvery moonbeams dancing in her face, and with
+no voice, save the echoes of her own, to answer back the whispers of night.
+
+</p>
+<p>It is often only in such a silent nook as this, with no one present but God and self, that humanity asserts itself and the
+tenderest portions of the human soul become paramount and give rise to sacred thoughts. Even the savage cannot escape it,
+for he, too, feels his responsibility to something outside of self. No doubt the self-conscious criminal would be the most
+susceptible to it.
+
+</p>
+<p>What a night for Marie! Solitude gave <a id="d0e1320"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1320">150</a>]</span>rise to fear; fear, to conscious criminality; a sense of wrong-doing, to grief. Would morning never come? Every time she fell
+into a doze her sleep was disturbed by dreams of the past. Recollections of her dying benefactor in the woods by the San Mateo
+river, of Gilmore&#8217;s comrades bleeding by his side, and of Lawton in the arms of his aide, filled her soul with remorse and
+suggested to her with an unspeakable vividness that in all probability she would pay the penalty on both sides of the grave.
+Awakening from one awful dream, she would, after listening to the stillness of the night for a time, lapse into another. Again
+she would suddenly awake and begin to fumble her rosary and repeat selections from a Catholic prayer book. Would she dare
+to turn back? Behind her was certain death; before her, the possibility of life. She resolved to go on.
+
+</p>
+<p>The night whiled away. Her pony ate his fill and lay down to rest. Beaded dew drops collected themselves in close proximity
+upon the grasses and foliage about her feet. <a id="d0e1324"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1324">151</a>]</span>The cool mountain air from without and fear from within caused her to shiver a great deal. Day finally came; Marie rode on.
+
+</p>
+<p>Following the Magat river she finally reached the city of Bayombong with a population of 20,000 people. Here she learned from
+the natives that Aguinaldo and a loyal remnant of his appointed congress had passed through the city ahead of her, en route
+northward.
+
+</p>
+<p>At Bayombong she was advised to follow down the Magat river for twenty miles, then to bear to the northeast along the pathway
+made by Aguinaldo and his followers in their recent retreat. This she did, crossing another range of mountains near Fort Del
+Pilar, which had been erected by the Filipinos to circumvent as well as to prevent the progress of the Americans, should they
+attempt to follow them. On the farther side of this slope she came upon the headwaters of the Rio Grande de Cagayan river,
+which she followed on to the north for several weeks, enjoying the hospitality of the natives <a id="d0e1330"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1330">152</a>]</span>along the course, until at last she came upon the beautiful city of Ilagan at the confluence of the Cagayan and Pinacanalan
+rivers.
+
+</p>
+<p>It was now late in April. Marie was tired and needed rest. At Ilagan she was cordially received by the curious natives who
+were eager to learn some news concerning the war which was being conducted several hundred miles further south. Marie grew
+cheerful. There were no Americans in the city, and nobody knew of any within the valley. She felt that at last she had successfully
+eluded her supposed pursuers and that she was safe. Ilagan is the capital of Isabella province. It has a population of approximately
+60,000 people. Marie&#8217;s natural ability, information gathered in the school of experience, knowledge of the details of the
+war, and her willingness to talk (quite a number at Ilagan could speak Spanish) made of her a sort of responsive idol for
+the entire populace.
+
+
+
+<a id="d0e1334"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1334">153</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+<div id="d0e1335" class="div1"><span class="pagenum">
+[<a href="#d0e226">Contents</a>]
+</span><h2 class="label">Chapter XII.</h2>
+<h2 class="normal">Crossing the Sierra Madres.</h2><a id="d0e1340"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1340">155</a>]</span><p>She remained at Ilagan until the middle of June, when it began to be rumored that the Americans were preparing to invade the
+Cagayan valley, not only soldiers from the south but with the &#8220;mosquito fleet&#8221; coming up the river from its mouth at the extreme
+northern end of the island of Luzon. Nobody in the city seemed to know just where Aguinaldo had gone. Part of his advance
+guard had arrived in the city some three months before, but he had not come, and his soldiers had soon departed for the southeast,
+following the valley of the Pinacanalan river.
+
+</p>
+<p>Tired of her surroundings and impatient to join Aguinaldo, Marie departed by the same route that his soldiers had taken. From
+an old native living all alone in a bamboo shack on the bank of the Rio Masagan river, which empties into the Pinacanalan
+about eighteen miles southeast of Ilagan, she <a id="d0e1345"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1345">156</a>]</span>learned that Aguinaldo and his troops had started up the valley of the Masagan. This stream rises high up near the summit
+of the Sierra Madre mountains which parallel the eastern coast of northern Luzon for nearly five hundred miles, and are inland
+from the coast from ten to thirty miles.
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie had with her three trusted natives from Ilagan. She did not want to spend another night alone in the mountains. After
+proceeding up the Masagan for thirty-five miles to a place where its valley narrows itself to a gorge, its bed was so strewn
+with huge boulders that it became impossible to travel any longer on horseback; therefore, one of the natives was sent back
+with the horses, and Marie and the two others continued the ascent on foot, taking with them such equipment and provisions
+as they could conveniently carry.
+
+</p>
+<p>After many hardships they succeeded in crossing the range in safety and soon found themselves descending the other side. A
+Filipino scouting party was met at the evening <a id="d0e1351"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1351">157</a>]</span>of the first day&#8217;s tramp down the Pacific slope. They were well supplied with food&#8212;thing Marie and her companions greatly
+needed. From them it was learned that Aguinaldo and his body guard and quite a complement of Filipino soldiers were secreted
+at the little town of Palanan on a small stream by the same name, about ten miles back from the coast and lying directly east
+of them on the journey which they were pursuing. This party escorted them to Filipino headquarters, which they reached July
+10, 1900.
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie was cordially welcomed by Aguinaldo, who restored her to a position on his staff and secured from her the identical
+information which he desired relative to the movement of the American troops, and the very information, strange to say, which
+led to his own discovery and capture by General Funston of the American forces in March of the following year.
+
+</p>
+<p>Aguinaldo learned from Marie that from the Filipinos&#8217; standpoint, the war around <a id="d0e1357"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1357">158</a>]</span>Manila had been a dismal failure. He decided, therefore, to send one of his trusted generals south by practically the same
+route over which Marie had come, with information to the Filipino troops east and south of Manila to move all their available
+forces north with the quickest possible despatch and to place them under his immediate command so that he might not only render
+himself immune from capture, but take the initiative and oppose the American campaign in the valley of the Cagayan river.
+
+</p>
+<p>In December, 1900, about three months before his capture by General Funston, Aguinaldo, having learned that the Americans
+were making their way in great numbers into the valley of the Cagayan, asked Marie to take up duty as a spy again; to recross
+the Sierra Madre mountains; visit the American lines; ascertain their number of soldiers on duty in the valley on the opposite
+side of the mountains and then to bring this information to him, so that when reinforcements <a id="d0e1361"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1361">159</a>]</span>should arrive he would know better how to undertake the campaign.
+
+</p>
+<p>To this, Marie willingly assented, but she insisted that she could not make the trip alone over the rugged Sierra Madre mountains;
+that she had nearly famished crossing them the first time. Aguinaldo therefor fitted out a little expedition consisting of
+eight Filipinos, in addition to Marie, and a pack-train of fourteen ponies to accompany her over the divide. Nine of the animals
+were for riding purposes; the other five were to pack the supplies,&#8212;three of them for the outward trip, two for the incoming.
+In addition to the rice which they took along, they were instructed to forage as much as possible.
+
+</p>
+<p>On December 9, the party started out on their perilous undertaking. A point far up on the mountain slope, near a refreshing
+mineral spring, having been reached on December 17, the party halted and established a sub-base for their return trip. It
+was evident to them that they had struck the wrong <a id="d0e1367"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1367">160</a>]</span>trail and were going to be compelled to send Marie back through a different gorge from the one by which she and her associates
+had come over a few months before.
+
+</p>
+<p>Here the party divided into two relays&#8212;one to accompany Marie close to the top of the mountains, the other to remain where
+it was until her guides returned. At this temporary base three Filipinos and two pack-horses were left. The Filipinos thus
+left behind were instructed to hunt and trap all they could till their comrades returned.
+
+</p>
+<p>The on-going squad, consisting of Marie and five native soldiers, took with them their six riding ponies and three of the
+pack-horses. They departed from their comrades early in the morning, December 18. By night of the second day they had gotten
+so near the crest they could plainly discern that in one long march Marie could cross the divide and get a safe distance down
+the slope on the opposite side. Coming to an old stone church they dismounted and established themselves for the night. It
+was December <a id="d0e1373"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1373">161</a>]</span>19,&#8212;the anniversary of Lawton&#8217;s death. Marie remarked about it.
+
+</p>
+<p>This old church had partly fallen down. Vines and mosses had so interlaced themselves in climbing over its rocky walls and
+across its openings that they had to be cut away by the unwelcome intruders before they could gain an entrance. The stone
+cross on the front gable was still in place; but the old mahogany door had long since been torn from its hinges by the mountain
+storms, and it lay in a state of decay on the ground. An earthquake had destroyed part of the roof, and had caused the west
+wall to become inclined and to crumble.
+
+</p>
+<p>Within, one end of the old altar was still found to be intact. The priest&#8217;s pulpit chair had become ivy-mantled, and one handle
+had rotted from its fastenings and had fallen to the floor. Statues of the Saints had pitched from their moorings in the alcoves
+along the walls and were lying face-downward or standing on their heads amid the debris below.
+<a id="d0e1379"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1379">162</a>]</span></p>
+<p>What hands had built this old church, none could tell. It seemed certain that no human being had entered it for over a century.
+The mountain tribes who had lifted into place the huge chalk stones that composed its massive walls, under the devout leadership
+of some pious monk, for a place of worship, had long since perished from the earth. The mountain game which rendered possible
+their habitation in this altitude had vanished. Everything and everybody had evidently given way before some fierce invasion
+of one of their southern tribes.
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie was busy cleaning off the trash from the massive rock that lay at the entrance to the door-way. &#8220;1765,&#8221; said she; &#8220;come,
+see the date chiseled in the rock! I wonder what has become of the tribe that built it?&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>A soldier who had made his entrance by one of the window openings, was busily engaged in prying up a huge flat stone just
+back of the altar. He had it loosened; he called for help to remove it. When the stone <a id="d0e1386"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1386">163</a>]</span>had been overturned and had fallen back onto its aged neighbors, some soft damp earth beneath it was slowly scraped away.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Listen!&#8221; said the native who on bended knees was doing the sacrilegious work, &#8220;Did you hear that grating noise?&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>He scraped again with his bolo turned edgewise, and gripping the back of it firmly with both hands. &#8220;Do you hear it?&#8221; said
+he. &#8220;It&#8217;s here!&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>In a few minutes a metallic box was pried out of the earth wherein it had lain unmolested for many years.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Can you read the inscription on it?&#8221; asked Marie.
+
+</p>
+<p>Carefully the sediment and rust shales were removed. The grooves in the letters and figures of the inscription were carefully
+cleaned out with a knife. It read
+
+
+</p>
+<div class="blockquote">
+<p class="aligncenter">FATHER<br>
+JUADANEZ<br>
+1768.
+</p>
+</div><p>
+
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;The old father has been dead a long <a id="d0e1408"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1408">164</a>]</span>time,&#8221; said the fellow who was doing the details of the work.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;I wonder,&#8221; said Marie, &#8220;if we really ought to disturb his bones.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Do you suppose they put any valuables in the little chest when they sealed it up?&#8221; asked another.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;It has always been customary to put in the sacred urn,&#8221; said Marie.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Cut it open!&#8221; commanded a corporal.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;I can&#8217;t,&#8221; said the robber; &#8220;we&#8217;ll have to build a fire and melt it open.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>This they did; and in it they found the dust of his bones and a number of valuables including the Patricia&#8217;s gold-lined cup
+which Marie took and hung on her belt.
+
+</p>
+<p>That night a terrible storm swept over the mountains. Marie and her companions crept into the old church for refuge. The ponies
+had been given some rice and then set free to forage as best they could. They were stampeded by the violence of the wind and
+rain.
+
+</p>
+<p>The morning broke cool and clear. <a id="d0e1426"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1426">165</a>]</span>Everybody was astir at day-break. The ponies were gone, but plenty of rice remained. Marie soon saw a way out of the difficulty.
+She left three of her men at the old church to await the return of the two who were to accompany her until she reached some
+plan for speedy descent on the opposite side of the mountains.
+
+</p>
+<p>The advance party started out early on foot, taking with them such a supply of rice and bananas as they could carry. Only
+three miles farther up they entered a canon whose rocky walls, at places almost perpendicular and seeming to form pillars
+for the sky, were so close together at their base that it would have been impossible to have used the ponies for travel, even
+though they had not retreated in the storm.
+
+</p>
+<p>Good progress was made, and by sun-down, December 20, they had reached the upper rivulets of what afterwards proved to be
+the north fork of the Rio Masagan, instead of the south fork which she had previously followed. The beautiful valleys below
+<a id="d0e1432"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1432">166</a>]</span>them were plainly visible as the sun sank to rest over the distant hills. A small native village could be seen on the bank
+of the stream a few miles ahead. The party bivouacked for the night.
+
+</p>
+<p>Early the next morning, after a light lunch of cold rice, Marie was off on her important mission.
+
+</p>
+<p>Her two escorts made their way back to the old church, where after another night&#8217;s rest, the five undertook their return journey
+to the sub-base at the spring far down the mountain side. When they reached this camp they found their ponies all returned
+to it; and their comrades, thinking they had all been captured or slain by the Americans, were hastily preparing to retreat.
+The entire party, except Marie, got back to Aguinaldo&#8217;s camp at Palanan, on Christmas Day.
+
+</p>
+<p>Marie, was therefore, left to arrange for her own return, after her spy work had been completed. She contemplated securing
+help from the natives at Ilagan, among whom she had previously lived for a few months.
+
+
+
+<a id="d0e1440"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1440">167</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+<div id="d0e1441" class="div1"><span class="pagenum">
+[<a href="#d0e226">Contents</a>]
+</span><h2 class="label">Chapter XIII.</h2>
+<h2 class="normal">Compensation</h2><a id="d0e1446"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1446">169</a>]</span><p>On the evening of December 24, 1900,&#8212;one of those dark nights in the Philippines when the air seems so dense that you can
+almost take hold of it with your hands&#8212;when the heavy clouds blanket the earth so closely that the terrible thunders seem
+to shake the earth in its orbit, with the deep-toned diapason of their melody&#8212;when the lightening bugs flutter from twig to
+twig, revealing their lanterned wings&#8212;when the human heart beats with a conscious thump in anticipation of something awful&#8212;when
+those who are out alone whistle to give themselves courage&#8212;when the zigzag openings rent through the clouds by the vicious
+lightning flashes almost reveal Eternity;&#8212;Christmas Eve, that sacred occasion which we all celebrate and shall continue to
+celebrate till the end of time, to commemorate the birth of our Christ,&#8212;a sharp-eyed, dare-devil <a id="d0e1449"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1449">170</a>]</span>Filipino crept slowly out of the city of Ilagan along a foot-path toward the Americans&#8217; camp about a mile north of that city.
+
+</p>
+<p>When so near to the Americans that their out-posts were plainly visible during the flashes of lightning, the Filipino spy
+crept into a bamboo thicket not over fifty feet from an American sentry. After lying there for a half hour, waiting for the
+storm to come, the native grew a trifle bolder and arose to his knees. That moment the sharp eyes of the sentry caught him.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Corporal of the Guard!&#8221; called the sentry in a loud voice.
+
+</p>
+<p>The corporal, being suspicious that something unusual was taking place, in responding to the call took with him two armed
+privates.
+
+</p>
+<p>Approaching the sentry, with light steps and in a crouching attitude, the corporal said in a heavy whisper, &#8220;What&#8217;s the matter,
+Jack?&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>The sentry was standing with gun in hand, loaded, cocked, and with bayonet fixed. <a id="d0e1461"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1461">171</a>]</span>Keeping his eye centered on the exact spot where he had last seen the slowly gravitating figure before him, the guard said
+in an undertone that denoted grave alarm, &#8220;Do you see that thicket just to the left of that big mango tree?&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Yes;&#8221; said the corporal in a whisper, &#8220;What&#8217;s the trouble?&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;There&#8217;s a man in there,&#8221; said the sentry. &#8220;I saw him quite plainly at first&#8212;and I think he&#8217;s got a gun in his hand. You better
+watch out, boys. He&#8217;s still there.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>The corporal and the two privates fixed the bayonets on their Krag-Jorgensons, filled the magazines, slipped a shell into
+the barrel of each rifle, cocked them, crouched close to the ground, some ten feet apart, and began to move forward, a step
+at a time, between the flashes of lightening. Each time it would flash, they would peer into the thicket. Each step brought
+them nearer.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;There he lies!,&#8221; said one of the privates in a quick out-spoken voice.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Amigo,&#8221; (a friend) said the stretched-out <a id="d0e1473"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1473">172</a>]</span>form, as three guns were raised in unison with the anxious muzzles pointing directly at him.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Este no quere combate&#8221; (you don&#8217;t desire to fight), said the corporal, in crude Spanish.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Mucho amigo&#8221; (very friendly), came the reply.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Vamose aque!&#8221; (come here), commanded the corporal.
+
+</p>
+<p>With his eyes fixed in theirs, the Filipino raised himself slowly up and came toward the three Americans who stood but twelve
+feet away.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Take him by the arms,&#8221; said the corporal to the two privates who were with him, &#8220;while I look behind that rice-dyke to see
+if he had a gun.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Here&#8217;s what the rascal was up to,&#8221; said the corporal, holding a Mauser above his head. &#8220;Good thing you saw him when you did,
+Jack.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>The storm was coming nearer; the first gust of wind had just struck them. It blew <a id="d0e1489"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1489">173</a>]</span>back the Filipino&#8217;s little checkered frock. The corporal saw a glitter.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Watch out! boys, he&#8217;s got a machete under his coat,&#8221; said the corporal.
+
+</p>
+<p>He was searched for more weapons and then marched inside the American lines and taken directly to headquarters. A drum-head
+court was convened at once and the prisoner led in.
+
+</p>
+<p>With hands clinched, muscles taut, eyes piercing at the court, he listened to the reading of the charge:
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Caught acting as a spy for the enemy in violation of the Articles of War; armed, with intent to take the life of an American
+sentry on guard!&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>After the testimony had been taken, the prisoner was given a chance to speak, but he absolutely refused to do so, even though
+addressed in several different languages and dialects.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;He spoke Spanish to us as we captured him,&#8221; interjected the corporal.
+<a id="d0e1503"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1503">174</a>]</span></p>
+<p>&#8220;GUILTY!&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>said the lieutenant-colonel who was presiding, in a firm military tone. &#8220;The court fixes the penalty at death, and sentences
+the prisoner to be shot at sun-rise.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Remove him, Sergeant, and detail a firing squad to execute the order of the court!&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>As the prisoner was led away, the lieutenant-colonel dropped his chin in the palms of his hands as he rested his elbows on
+his knees, and muttered in a semi-regretful way: &#8220;I hate to do it; but in the past we have always been so chicken-hearted
+about punishing these blood-thirsty natives that they have now come to regard our kindness as cowardice. I can&#8217;t help but
+feel that it will bring the war to a close quicker if we deal with them hereafter with a good firm hand.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;I wonder what province the young fellow came from,&#8221; said a major who was sitting near.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;I really don&#8217;t know,&#8221; replied the lieutenant-colonel: &#8220;his face shows him to be a <a id="d0e1516"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1516">175</a>]</span>Tagalo. Certain it is that he didn&#8217;t come from Isabella province in which we are now campaigning. I wouldn&#8217;t be surprised
+if Aguinaldo were near here and if he had sent this young dare-devil to cut down our sentry, so as to make an attack upon
+us tonight during the storm.&#8221;
+
+</p>
+<p>Toward morning the storm subsided. At day-break a comparatively shallow grave was hastily dug near the edge of a little bamboo
+thicket on a slightly elevated piece of ground. As the flickering rays of the tropical sun began to shoot above the pale,
+ashen-gray hue of the eastern horizon, the prisoner was led to the foot of his prospective tomb. The firing squad took its
+place in line.
+
+</p>
+<p>The guns had been carefully loaded in advance for their deadly work; all but one contained blank cartridges. As usual, after
+loading, the guns were intermixed, so that no man might know which one contained the deadly bullet.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Ready!&#8221; commanded the sergeant who <a id="d0e1524"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1524">176</a>]</span>had charge of the squad,&#8212;the corporal having taken his usual place in line with his men.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Click,&#8221; went the hammers of the rifles in unison, as they were brought to a full cock.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Aim!&#8221; came the next command in a firmer tone. The soldiers brought their rifles to their shoulders. Every barrel was pointed
+at the chest of the prisoner, who now for the first time, began to tremble and turn a sickly yellow.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Fire!&#8221; commanded the sergeant.
+
+</p>
+<p>&#8220;Bang!&#8221; went the united roar of the guns; and as the light powder smoke cleared away and the echoes reverberated through the
+woods of northern Luzon, the firing squad stepped forward to view their heroic dead.
+
+</p>
+<p>A private jumped into the grave and turned the corpse over onto its back.
+
+</p>
+<p>That night Frank W. Pugh, of the regular army, a member of this unfortunate firing squad, who died later at Fort Worth, Texas,
+of fever contracted in the Philippines, <a id="d0e1538"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1538">177</a>]</span>sitting in his little dog-tent, meditating, wrote in his diary, which is now preserved in the archives at Washington with
+other relics of the war, the following appropriate poem:
+
+
+</p>
+<div class="&#xA; poem&#xA; ">
+<h4 class="&#xA; lghead&#xA; ">A CHRISTMAS COURT-MARTIAL</h4>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>&#8220;The night was dark and threatening rain,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>No stars were in the sky;</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>We caught him hiding in the pines&#8212;
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>A Filipino spy.</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>A slender youth with coal black eyes,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>Brim full of frightened tears;</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>We turned him over to the guard,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>I fear with callous jeers.</span></p>
+</div>
+<div class="&#xA; poem&#xA; ">
+<p class="line" style=""><span>Next morning it was Christmas day,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>The sun was shining hot,</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>A drum-head court had said, &#8220;The spy,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>Is sentenced to be shot.&#8221;</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>Erect before the officers,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>He still disdained to speak,</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>Although a single crystal drop,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>Empearled his olive cheek.</span></p>
+</div>
+<div class="&#xA; poem&#xA; ">
+<p class="line" style=""><span>Upon a long and hurried march,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>In light array, you see,<a id="d0e1581"></a><span class="pagenum">[<a href="#d0e1581">178</a>]</span></span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>We could not take the boy along,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>So stood him near a tree;</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>Told off the little firing squad,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>And ordered it in line.</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>One gun was loaded in the lot&#8212;
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>I hope it was not mine.</span></p>
+</div>
+<div class="&#xA; poem&#xA; ">
+<p class="line" style=""><span>Birds in the branches overhead
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>Sang softly in the heat.</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>The grave, a trench of steaming sand,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>Gaped yellow at his feet;</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>He faced us with a dauntless air,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>Although his lips were white;&#8212;</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>Our grim old Sergeant turned away,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>He could not stand the sight.</span></p>
+</div>
+<div class="&#xA; poem&#xA; ">
+<p class="line" style=""><span>A flash, a roar, a cloud of smoke,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>And headlong to the ground</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>He fell face downward in the grave,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>And died without a sound.</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>We turned him over on his back,
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>And DEATH the TRUTH confessed,</span></p>
+<p class="line" style=""><span>For through his open jacket peeped
+</span></p>
+<p class="line" style="text-indent: 2em; "><span>A Woman&#8217;s tender breast.&#8221;</span></p>
+</div>
+<p>Marie Sampalit had earned her doom. After her grave had been filled, the soldier boys placed at its head a cartridge-box lid
+on which they inscribed the pitiful word,
+
+</p>
+<p class="aligncenter">&#8220;UNKNOWN.&#8221;
+
+
+</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="back">
+<div class="transcribernote">
+<h2>Colophon</h2>
+<h3>Availability</h3>
+<p>This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give
+it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at <a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/">www.gutenberg.org</a>.
+
+</p>
+<p>This eBook is produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at <a href="http://www.pgdp.net/">www.pgdp.net</a>.
+
+</p>
+<p>This eBook has been produced from scans made available by Google. <a href="http://books.google.com/books?id=MUifQ1dFz8kC">First</a>, <a href="http://books.google.com/books?id=m2rrJJ9LDvoC">Second</a>, and <a href="http://books.google.com/books?id=-pQiAAAAMAAJ">Third</a> copy. (Snippet view for visitors from outside the U.S.)
+
+</p>
+<p>The illustrations have been omitted from this ebook. If you can provide high quality scans of the illustrations, please send
+them to Project Gutenberg.
+
+</p>
+<h3>Encoding</h3>
+<p></p>
+<h3>Revision History</h3>
+<ol class="lsoff">
+<li>2008-02-26 Started.
+
+</li>
+</ol>
+<h3>Corrections</h3>
+<p>The following corrections have been applied to the text:</p>
+<table width="75%">
+<tr>
+<th>Location</th>
+<th>Source</th>
+<th>Correction</th>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="20%"><a href="#d0e486">Page 31</a></td>
+<td width="40%">agin</td>
+<td width="40%">again</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="20%"><a href="#d0e659">Page 63</a></td>
+<td width="40%">Maries</td>
+<td width="40%">Marie&#8217;s</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="20%"><a href="#d0e853">Page 88</a></td>
+<td width="40%">Magundi eropo</td>
+<td width="40%">Magandang umaga</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="20%"><a href="#d0e868">Page 90</a></td>
+<td width="40%">Leguna</td>
+<td width="40%">Laguna</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td width="20%"><a href="#d0e1033">Page 111</a></td>
+<td width="40%">rivited</td>
+<td width="40%">riveted</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+</div>
+</div>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Woman with a Stone Heart, by 
+Oscar William Coursey
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WOMAN WITH A STONE HEART ***
+
+***** This file should be named 24705-h.htm or 24705-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/7/0/24705/
+
+Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net/ (This book was
+produced from scanned images of public domain material
+from the Google Print project.)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>